45154590 OSN 3500 2500 1500 Hardware Description Manual

1 Equipment Architecture 1-1...............................................................................

1.1 Architecture of the OptiX OSN 3500 1-1......................................................1.2 Architecture of the OptiX OSN 2500 1-3......................................................1.3 Architecture of the OptiX OSN 1500A 1-5....................................................1.4 Architecture of the OptiX OSN 1500B 1-5....................................................

2 Cabinet 2-1...........................................................................................................

2.1 Types 2-1......................................................................................................2.2 Cabinet Configuration 2-3.............................................................................

2.2.1 Cabinet Indicators 2-3..........................................................................2.2.2 Power Distribution Unit 2-4..................................................................2.2.3 Other Configuration 2-4........................................................................

2.3 Technical Parameters 2-5............................................................................

3 Subrack 3-1..........................................................................................................

3.1 Subrack for the OptiX OSN 3500 3-1...........................................................3.1.1 Structure 3-1........................................................................................3.1.2 Slot Distribution 3-3..............................................................................3.1.3 Boards and the Corresponding Slots 3-4.............................................3.1.4 Technical Parameters 3-9....................................................................

3.2 Subrack for the OptiX OSN 2500 3-9...........................................................3.2.1 Structure 3-9........................................................................................3.2.2 Slot Distribution 3-11..............................................................................3.2.3 Boards and the Corresponding Slots 3-13.............................................3.2.4 Technical Parameters 3-17....................................................................

3.3 Subrack for the OptiX OSN 2500 REG 3-18..................................................3.4 Subrack for the OptiX OSN 1500A 3-19.........................................................

3.4.1 Structure 3-19........................................................................................3.4.2 Slot Distribution 3-19..............................................................................3.4.3 Boards and the Corresponding Slots 3-20.............................................3.4.4 Technical Parameters 3-23....................................................................

3.5 Subrack for the OptiX OSN 1500B 3-24.........................................................3.5.1 Structure 3-24........................................................................................3.5.2 Slot Distribution 3-25..............................................................................3.5.3 Boards and the Corresponding Slots 3-27.............................................3.5.4 Technical Parameters 3-31....................................................................

4 Board Classification and List 4-1......................................................................

4.1 Board Classification 4-1................................................................................4.1.1 SDH Boards 4-1...................................................................................4.1.2 PDH Boards 4-3...................................................................................

4.1.3 Data Processing Boards 4-4................................................................4.1.4 Cross-Connect and SCC Boards 4-6...................................................4.1.5 Other Boards 4-9..................................................................................

4.2 Board Appearance 4-10.................................................................................

5 SDH Boards 5-1...................................................................................................

5.1 SL64 5-1.......................................................................................................5.1.1 Functionality 5-1...................................................................................5.1.2 Principle 5-2.........................................................................................5.1.3 Front Panel 5-4....................................................................................5.1.4 Parameter Configuration 5-5................................................................5.1.5 Version Description 5-5........................................................................5.1.6 Technical Parameters 5-5....................................................................

5.2 SF16/SL16 5-7.............................................................................................5.2.1 Functionality 5-7...................................................................................5.2.2 Principle 5-8.........................................................................................5.2.3 Front Panel 5-10....................................................................................5.2.4 Parameter Configuration 5-11................................................................5.2.5 Version Description 5-11........................................................................5.2.6 Technical Parameters 5-12....................................................................

5.3 SL4/SLD4/SLQ4 5-15.....................................................................................5.3.1 Functionality 5-15...................................................................................5.3.2 Principle 5-16.........................................................................................5.3.3 Front Panel 5-17....................................................................................5.3.4 Parameter Configuration 5-18................................................................5.3.5 Version Description 5-19........................................................................5.3.6 Technical Parameters 5-19....................................................................

5.4 SL1/SLQ1/SLT1 5-21.....................................................................................5.4.1 Functionality 5-22...................................................................................5.4.2 Principle 5-22.........................................................................................5.4.3 Front Panel 5-24....................................................................................5.4.4 Parameter Configuration 5-25................................................................5.4.5 Version Description 5-25........................................................................5.4.6 Technical Parameters 5-26....................................................................

5.5 R1SLD4/R1SL4/R1SL1/R1SLQ1 5-27...........................................................5.5.1 Functionality 5-28...................................................................................5.5.2 Principle 5-29.........................................................................................5.5.3 Front Panel 5-29....................................................................................5.5.4 Parameter Configuration 5-30................................................................5.5.5 Version Description 5-31........................................................................5.5.6 Technical Parameters 5-31....................................................................

5.6 SEP1/EU08/OU08/TSB8 5-32........................................................................5.6.1 Functionality 5-33...................................................................................5.6.2 Principle 5-34.........................................................................................5.6.3 Front Panel 5-35....................................................................................5.6.4 Protection Configuration 5-36................................................................5.6.5 Parameter Configuration 5-40................................................................5.6.6 Version Description 5-40........................................................................5.6.7 Technical Parameters 5-40....................................................................

6 PDH Boards 6-1...................................................................................................

6.1 SPQ4/MU04/TSB8 6-1.................................................................................6.1.2 Functionality 6-2...................................................................................6.1.3 Principle 6-2.........................................................................................6.1.4 Front Panel 6-4....................................................................................6.1.5 Protection Configuration 6-5................................................................6.1.6 Parameter Configuration 6-9................................................................6.1.7 Version Description 6-9........................................................................6.1.8 Technical Parameters 6-9....................................................................

6.2 PL3/PD3/PL3A/C34S/D34S 6-11...................................................................6.2.1 Functionality 6-11...................................................................................6.2.2 Principle 6-12.........................................................................................6.2.3 Front Panel 6-13....................................................................................6.2.4 Protection Configuration 6-15................................................................6.2.5 Parameter Configuration 6-20................................................................6.2.6 Version Description 6-20........................................................................6.2.7 Technical Parameters 6-20....................................................................

6.3 PQ1/PQM/D75S/D12S/D12B 6-22.................................................................6.3.1 Functionality 6-22...................................................................................6.3.2 Principle 6-23.........................................................................................6.3.3 Front Panel 6-24....................................................................................6.3.4 Protection Configuration 6-26................................................................6.3.5 Parameter Configuration 6-29................................................................6.3.6 Version Description 6-29........................................................................6.3.7 Technical Parameters 6-29....................................................................

6.4 PD1/PL1/L75S/L12S 6-31..............................................................................6.4.1 Functionality 6-31...................................................................................6.4.2 Principle 6-32.........................................................................................6.4.3 Front Panel 6-32....................................................................................6.4.4 Protection Configuration 6-33................................................................6.4.5 Parameter Configuration 6-35................................................................6.4.6 Version Description 6-35........................................................................

6.4.7 Technical Parameters 6-35....................................................................

7 Data Processing Boards 7-1..............................................................................

7.1 EGT2/EFT8/EFT4/EFF8/ETF8 7-2...............................................................7.1.1 Functionality 7-3...................................................................................7.1.2 Principle 7-4.........................................................................................7.1.3 Front Panel 7-5....................................................................................7.1.4 Parameter Configuration 7-8................................................................7.1.5 Version Description 7-8........................................................................7.1.6 Technical Parameters 7-9....................................................................

7.2 EGS2/EFS4/EFS0/ETF8/EFF8/ETS8 7-11....................................................7.2.1 Functionality 7-12...................................................................................7.2.2 Principle 7-14.........................................................................................7.2.3 Front Panel 7-15....................................................................................7.2.4 Protection Configuration 7-17................................................................7.2.5 Parameter Configuration 7-19................................................................7.2.6 Version Description 7-20........................................................................7.2.7 Technical Parameters 7-21....................................................................

7.3 EMR0/EGR2 7-24...........................................................................................7.3.1 Functionality 7-24...................................................................................7.3.2 Principle 7-27.........................................................................................7.3.3 Front Panel 7-28....................................................................................7.3.4 Parameter Configuration 7-30................................................................7.3.5 Version Description 7-32........................................................................7.3.6 Technical Parameters 7-33....................................................................

7.4 ADL4/ADQ1 7-34............................................................................................7.4.1 Functionality 7-34...................................................................................7.4.2 Principle 7-35.........................................................................................7.4.3 Front Panel 7-36....................................................................................7.4.4 Protection Configuration 7-38................................................................7.4.5 Parameter Configuration 7-38................................................................7.4.6 Version Description 7-39........................................................................7.4.7 Technical Parameters 7-39....................................................................

7.5 IDL4/IDQ1 7-40..............................................................................................7.5.1 Functionality 7-40...................................................................................7.5.2 Principle 7-41.........................................................................................7.5.3 Front Panel 7-41....................................................................................7.5.4 Protection Configuration 7-43................................................................7.5.5 Parameter Configuration 7-43................................................................7.5.6 Version Description 7-44........................................................................7.5.7 Technical Parameters 7-44....................................................................

7.6 MST4 7-45......................................................................................................7.6.1 Functionality 7-45...................................................................................7.6.2 Principle 7-46.........................................................................................7.6.3 Front Panel 7-48....................................................................................7.6.4 Parameter Configuration 7-49................................................................7.6.5 Version Description 7-49........................................................................7.6.6 Technical Parameters 7-49....................................................................

8 Cross-Connect and System Control Boards 8-1..............................................

8.1 GXCS/EXCS/UXCS/XCE 8-2.......................................................................8.1.1 Functionality 8-2...................................................................................8.1.2 Principle 8-3.........................................................................................8.1.3 Front Panel 8-4....................................................................................8.1.4 Protection Configuration 8-6................................................................8.1.5 Parameter Configuration 8-7................................................................8.1.6 Version Description 8-7........................................................................

8.2 CXL1/CXL4/CXL16 8-9................................................................................8.2.1 Functionality 8-9...................................................................................8.2.2 Principle 8-10.........................................................................................8.2.3 Front Panel 8-11....................................................................................8.2.4 Protection Configuration 8-13................................................................8.2.5 Parameter Configuration 8-13................................................................8.2.6 Version Description 8-14........................................................................8.2.7 Technical Parameters 8-14....................................................................

8.3 SCC/GSCC 8-16............................................................................................8.3.1 Functionality 8-16...................................................................................8.3.2 Principle 8-17.........................................................................................8.3.3 Front Panel 8-18....................................................................................8.3.4 Version Description 8-21........................................................................8.3.5 Technical Parameters 8-21....................................................................

8.4 CRG 8-22.......................................................................................................8.4.1 Functionality 8-22...................................................................................8.4.2 Principle 8-23.........................................................................................8.4.3 Front Panel 8-24....................................................................................8.4.4 Version Description........................................................................ 8 -268.4.5 Technical Parameters .................................................................... 8-26

9 Other Boards 9-1.................................................................................................

9.1 LWX 9-1........................................................................................................9.1.1 Functionality 9-1...................................................................................9.1.2 Principle 9-2.........................................................................................

9.1.3 Front Panel 9-3....................................................................................9.1.4 Version Description 9-5........................................................................9.1.5 Technical Parameters 9-5....................................................................

9.2 MR2A/MR2B/MR2C 9-7...............................................................................9.2.1 Functionality 9-7...................................................................................9.2.2 Principle 9-8.........................................................................................9.2.3 Front Panel 9-9....................................................................................9.2.4 Version Description 9-11........................................................................9.2.5 Technical Parameters 9-11....................................................................

9.3 BA2/BPA 9-12................................................................................................9.3.1 Functionality 9-12...................................................................................9.3.2 Application 9-12.....................................................................................9.3.3 Principle 9-13.........................................................................................9.3.4 Front Panel 9-14....................................................................................9.3.5 Version Description 9-15........................................................................9.3.6 Technical Parameters 9-15....................................................................

9.4 COA 9-16........................................................................................................9.4.1 Functionality 9-17...................................................................................9.4.2 Application 9-17.....................................................................................9.4.3 Principle 9-18.........................................................................................9.4.4 Front Panel 9-19....................................................................................9.4.5 Installation 9-22......................................................................................9.4.6 Version Description. 9-23.......................................................................9.4.7 Technical Parameters 9-23....................................................................

9.5 DCU 9-25........................................................................................................9.5.1 Functionality 9-25...................................................................................9.5.2 Application 9-25.....................................................................................9.5.3 Principle 9-26.........................................................................................9.5.4 Front Panel 9-26....................................................................................9.5.5 Version Description 9-28........................................................................9.5.6 Technical Parameters 9-28....................................................................

9.6 AUX/EOW/SAP/SEI 9-30...............................................................................9.6.1 Functionality 9-30...................................................................................9.6.2 Principle Of AUX 9-33............................................................................9.6.3 Principle of EOW 9-33............................................................................9.6.4 Principle of SAP 9-34.............................................................................9.6.5 Principle of SEI 9-35..............................................................................9.6.6 Front Panel 9-36....................................................................................9.6.7 Alarm Concatenation 9-44.....................................................................9.6.8 DIP Switch and Jumper 9-46.................................................................9.6.9 Version Description 9-46........................................................................

9.6.10 Technical Parameters 9-47..................................................................9.7 PIU 9-48.........................................................................................................

9.7.1 Functionality 9-48...................................................................................9.7.2 Principle of N1PIU and Q1PIU 9-48.......................................................9.7.3 Principle of R1PIU 9-49..........................................................................9.7.4 Principle of R2PIU 9-49..........................................................................9.7.5 Front Pane 9-50.....................................................................................9.7.6 Version Description 9-54........................................................................9.7.7 Technical Parameters 9-54....................................................................

9.8 UPM 9-55.......................................................................................................9.8.1 Functionality 9-56...................................................................................9.8.2 Principle 9-56.........................................................................................9.8.3 Front Panel 9-57....................................................................................9.8.4 Precautions 9-58....................................................................................9.8.5 Technical Parameters 9-58....................................................................

9.9 FAN 9-59........................................................................................................9.9.1 Functionality 9-60...................................................................................9.9.2 Principle of N1FAN 9-60........................................................................9.9.3 Principle of R1FAN 9-61........................................................................9.9.4 Front Panel 9-61....................................................................................9.9.5 Version Description 9-62........................................................................9.9.6 Technical Parameters 9-62....................................................................

10 Cables 10-1..........................................................................................................

10.1 Fiber Jumper 10-1........................................................................................10.1.1 Classification 10-1................................................................................10.1.2 Connector 10-2....................................................................................

10.2 Power Cable and Grounding Cable 10-5......................................................10.2.1 Cabinet -48 V/BGND/PGND Power cable 10-5...................................10.2.2 Cabinet Door Grounding Cable 10-7....................................................10.2.3 Subrack Power Cable 10-8..................................................................10.2.4 Equipment -48 V/-60 V Power Cable/PGND Grounding Cable 10-9...10.2.5 HUB/COA Power Cable 10-11...............................................................10.2.6 UPM Power Cable 10-12.......................................................................

10.3 Alarm Cable 10-14..........................................................................................10.3.1 Cabinet Indicator Cable 10-14...............................................................10.3.2 Indicator/ Alarm Concatenating Cables between OSNSubracks 10-15.................................................................................................10.3.3 Alarm Concatenating Cable between OSN Subrack andOther Subrack 10-17.........................................................................................10.3.4 Housekeeping Alarm Input/ Output Cable 10-18...................................

10.4 Management Cable 10-21..............................................................................

10.4.1 OAM Serial Port Cable 10-21.................................................................10.4.2 Serial 1-4/F&f Cable 10-22.....................................................................10.4.3 RS-232/422 Serial Port Cable 10-24......................................................10.4.4 Orderwire Telephone Wire 10-25...........................................................10.4.5 COA Concatenating Cable 10-26...........................................................10.4.6 Straight Through Cable 10-27................................................................10.4.7 Crossover Cable 10-29..........................................................................

10.5 Signal Cable 10-31.........................................................................................10.5.1 75ohm 8xE1 Cable 10-31......................................................................10.5.2 75ohm 16xE1 Cable 10-33....................................................................10.5.3 120ohm 8xE1 Cable 10-35....................................................................10.5.4 120ohm 16xE1 Cable 10-37..................................................................10.5.5 E3/DS3/STM-1 Cable 10-39..................................................................10.5.6 Extended Subrack Service Connection Cable 10-41.............................

10.6 Clock Cable 10-43..........................................................................................10.6.1 Clock Cable 10-43..................................................................................10.6.2 1/2-Channel Clock Transfer Cable 10-45...............................................

A Indicator Description for Equipment and Board A-1.......................................

A.1 Cabinet Indicator Description A-1.................................................................A.2 Board Indicator Description A-2....................................................................

B Board Version Description B-1..........................................................................

B.1 Board Version List B-1..................................................................................B.2 Version Description B-4................................................................................

B.2.1 Optical Line Interface Board B-4..........................................................B.2.2 Ethernet Processing Board B-5............................................................B.2.3 Cross-Connect and SCC boards B-7...................................................B.2.4 Other Boards B-8.................................................................................

C Power Consumption and Weight C-1................................................................

D Abbreviations and Acronyms D-1.....................................................................

Index .................................................................................................................

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

HUAWEI

OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Hardware Description Manual

V100R003


OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Hardware Description Manual Manual Version T2-042590-20051020-C-1.31

Product Version V100R003

BOM 31250390

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. provides customers with comprehensive technical support and service. Please feel free to contact our local office or company headquarters.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Address: Administration Building, Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd., Bantian, Longgang District, Shenzhen, P. R. China Postal Code: 518129 Website: http://www.huawei.com Email: [email protected]


Copyright © 2005 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

All Rights Reserved No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks

, HUAWEI, C&C08, EAST8000, HONET, , ViewPoint, INtess, ETS, DMC, TELLIN, InfoLink, Netkey, Quidway, SYNLOCK, Radium, M900/M1800, TELESIGHT, Quidview, Musa, Airbridge, Tellwin, Inmedia, VRP, DOPRA, iTELLIN, HUAWEIOptiX, C&C08 iNET, NETENGINE, OptiX, iSite, U-SYS, iMUSE, OpenEye, Lansway, SmartAX, infoX, TopEng are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this manual are the property of their respective holders.

Notice The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and recommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.


Summary of Updates

This section provides the update history of this manual and introduces the updates of contents.

Update History

Manual Version Notes

T2-042587-20040215-C-1.10 Initial field trial release

T2-042586-20040501-C-1.11 The manual style is modified.

T2-042552-20041026-C-1.20 Descriptions of the EGT2, EMR0, EFF8, ADL4, ADQ1, MST4, LMST4, UXCS, XCE, LWX, and MR2A are added.

T2-042552-20050228-C-1.21 Descriptions of the ETS8, SF64, and COA are added.

T2-042590-20050820-C-1.30 1. The hardware description manuals of the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500 and OptiX OSN 1500 are combined into one. 2. The descriptions of the CRG, PIU, PL3A, R1SL4, R1SLD4, R1SL1, R1SLQ1and MST4 boards are added. 3. The manual is reorganized. The boards are described in several chapters.

T2-042590-20051020-C-1.31 Fix several bugs in the manual of the previous version. Delete the description of the N1SL64 and N1SF64 board. Update the weight of the ETSI cabinet and the power consumption of the boards.

Updates of Contents

Updates between document versions are cumulative. Therefore, the latest document version contains all updates made to previous versions.

Updates in Manual Version 1.31

Fix several bugs in the manual of the previous version. Delete the description of the N1SL64 and N1SF64 board.


The hardware description manuals of the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500 and


OptiX OSN 1500 are combined into one. The manual is reorganized. Chapter 4 of the original manual is divided into 6 chapters (chapter 4 to chapter 9).

Chapter 1 Equipment Architecture Introduces the structure of the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, OptiX OSN 1500A and OptiX OSN 1500B respectively.

Chapter 2 Cabinet Introduces the cabinet used by OptiX OSN series products.

Chapter 3 Subrack Introduces the subrack structure and board configuration of the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, OptiX OSN 2500REG, OptiX OSN 1500A and OptiX OSN 1500B. Chapter 4 Board Classification and List This is a new chapter, which introduces board classification and gives a list of boards. The subsequent chapters (chapter 5–chapter 9) give detailed descriptions. Chapter 5 SDH Boards The descriptions of the R1SL4, R1SLD4, R1SL1 and R1SLQ1 are added. Chapter 6 PDH Boards The descriptions of the PL3A is added. Chapter 7 Data Processing Boards The descriptions of the N3EFS0, N3EGS2 and N3EFS4 are added. Chapter 8 Cross-connect and SCC Boards The descriptions of the CRG is added. Chapter 9 Other Boards The descriptions of the PIU and FANA are added. Appendix B Board Version Description It is newly added, introducing version characteristics of all boards of the OptiX OSN series products and their differences.


Chapter 3 Subrack The boards ETS8, SF64 and COA are added in the table 3-2.

Chapter 4 Boards The detailed descriptions of following boards are added: ETS8, SF64 and COA. The detailed descriptions of following boards are modified and improved: EGS2/EFS0/EFS4.

Chapter 5 Cables Classification and descriptions of cables are improved.


Chapter 3 Subrack The boards EMR0, EFF8, ADL4, ADQ1, MR2A, LWX, EGT2, XCE and UXCS are added in the table 3-2.


Chapter 4 Boards The detailed descriptions of following boards are added: EMR0, EFF8, ADL4, ADQ1, MR2A, LWX, EGT2, XCE and UXCS.

OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual Contents


i

Contents

1 Equipment Architecture 1-1

1.1 Architecture of the OptiX OSN 3500 1-1

1.2 Architecture of the OptiX OSN 2500 1-3

1.3 Architecture of the OptiX OSN 1500A 1-5

1.4 Architecture of the OptiX OSN 1500B 1-5

2 Cabinet 2-1

2.1 Types 2-1

2.2 Cabinet Configuration 2-3

2.2.1 Cabinet Indicators 2-3

2.2.2 Power Distribution Unit 2-4

2.2.3 Other Configuration 2-4

2.3 Technical Parameters 2-5

3 Subrack 3-1

3.1 Subrack for the OptiX OSN 3500 3-1

3.1.1 Structure 3-1

3.1.2 Slot Distribution 3-3

3.1.3 Boards and the Corresponding Slots 3-4

3.1.4 Technical Parameters 3-9

3.2 Subrack for the OptiX OSN 2500 3-9

3.2.1 Structure 3-9




3.3 Subrack for the OptiX OSN 2500 REG 3-18



ii

3.4 Subrack for the OptiX OSN 1500A 3-19

3.4.1 Structure 3-19




3.5 Subrack for the OptiX OSN 1500B 3-24

3.5.1 Structure 3-24




4 Board Classification and List 4-1

4.1 Board Classification 4-1

4.1.1 SDH Boards 4-1

4.1.2 PDH Boards 4-3

4.1.3 Data Processing Boards 4-4

4.1.4 Cross-Connect and SCC Boards 4-6

4.1.5 Other Boards 4-9

4.2 Board Appearance 4-10

5 SDH Boards 5-1

5.1 SL64 5-1

5.1.1 Functionality 5-1

5.1.2 Principle 5-2

5.1.3 Front Panel 5-4

5.1.4 Parameter Configuration 5-5

5.1.5 Version Description 5-5


5.2 SF16/SL16 5-7


5.2.2 Principle 5-8





5.3 SL4/SLD4/SLQ4 5-15


5.3.2 Principle 5-16



iii





5.4 SL1/SLQ1/SLT1 5-21







5.5 R1SLD4/R1SL4/R1SL1/R1SLQ1 5-27







5.6 SEP1/EU08/OU08/TSB8 5-32




5.6.4 Protection Configuration 5-36




6 PDH Boards 6-1

6.1 SPQ4/MU04/TSB8 6-1


6.1.3 Principle 6-2






6.2 PL3/PD3/PL3A/C34S/D34S 6-11



iv








6.3 PQ1/PQM/D75S/D12S/D12B 6-22








6.4 PD1/PL1/L75S/L12S 6-31








7 Data Processing Boards 7-1

7.1 EGT2/EFT8/EFT4/EFF8/ETF8 7-2


7.1.2 Principle 7-4





7.2 EGS2/EFS4/EFS0/ETF8/EFF8/ETS8 7-11







v




7.3 EMR0/EGR2 7-24







7.4 ADL4/ADQ1 7-34








7.5 IDL4/IDQ1 7-40








7.6 MST4 7-45







8 Cross-Connect and System Control Boards 8-1

8.1 GXCS/EXCS/UXCS/XCE 8-2




vi

8.1.2 Principle 8-3





8.2 CXL1/CXL4/CXL16 8-9








8.3 SCC/GSCC 8-16






8.4 CRG 8-22






9 Other Boards 9-1

9.1 LWX 9-1


9.1.2 Principle 9-2




9.2 MR2A/MR2B/MR2C 9-7


9.2.2 Principle 9-8




vii



9.3 BA2/BPA 9-12


9.3.2 Application 9-12





9.4 COA 9-16





9.4.5 Installation 9-22

9.4.6 Version Description. 9-23


9.5 DCU 9-25







9.6 AUX/EOW/SAP/SEI 9-30


9.6.2 Principle Of AUX 9-33

9.6.3 Principle of EOW 9-33

9.6.4 Principle of SAP 9-34

9.6.5 Principle of SEI 9-35


9.6.7 Alarm Concatenation 9-44

9.6.8 DIP Switch and Jumper 9-46



9.7 PIU 9-48




viii

9.7.2 Principle of N1PIU and Q1PIU 9-48

9.7.3 Principle of R1PIU 9-49

9.7.4 Principle of R2PIU 9-49

9.7.5 Front Pane 9-50



9.8 UPM 9-55




9.8.4 Precautions 9-58


9.9 FAN 9-59


9.9.2 Principle of N1FAN 9-60

9.9.3 Principle of R1FAN 9-61




10 Cables 10-1

10.1 Fiber Jumper 10-1

10.1.1 Classification 10-1

10.1.2 Connector 10-2

10.2 Power Cable and Grounding Cable 10-5

10.2.1 Cabinet –48 V/BGND/PGND Power cable 10-5

10.2.2 Cabinet Door Grounding Cable 10-7

10.2.3 Subrack Power Cable 10-8

10.2.4 Equipment –48 V/–60 V Power Cable/PGND Grounding Cable 10-9

10.2.5 HUB/COA Power Cable 10-11

10.2.6 UPM Power Cable 10-12

10.3 Alarm Cable 10-14

10.3.1 Cabinet Indicator Cable 10-14

10.3.2 Indicator/Alarm Concatenating Cables between OSN Subracks 10-15

10.3.3 Alarm Concatenating Cable between OSN Subrack and Other Subrack 10-17

10.3.4 Housekeeping Alarm Input/Output Cable 10-18

10.4 Management Cable 10-21



ix

10.4.1 OAM Serial Port Cable 10-21

10.4.2 Serial 1–4/F&f Cable 10-22

10.4.3 RS-232/422 Serial Port Cable 10-24

10.4.4 Orderwire Telephone Wire 10-25

10.4.5 COA Concatenating Cable 10-26

10.4.6 Straight Through Cable 10-27

10.4.7 Crossover Cable 10-29

10.5 Signal Cable 10-31

10.5.1 75 Ω 8xE1 Cable 10-31

10.5.2 75 Ω 16xE1 Cable 10-33

10.5.3 120 Ω 8xE1 Cable 10-35

10.5.4 120 Ω 16xE1 Cable 10-37

10.5.5 E3/DS3/STM-1 Cable 10-39

10.5.6 Extended Subrack Service Connection Cable 10-41

10.6 Clock Cable 10-43

10.6.1 Clock Cable 10-43

10.6.2 1/2-Channel Clock Transfer Cable 10-45

A Indicator Description for Equipment and Board A-1

A.1 Cabinet Indicator Description A-1

A.2 Board Indicator Description A-2

B Board Version Description B-1

B.1 Board Version List B-1

B.2 Version Description B-4

B.2.1 Optical Line Interface Board B-4

B.2.2 Ethernet Processing Board B-5

B.2.3 Cross-Connect and SCC boards B-7

B.2.4 Other Boards B-8

C Power Consumption and Weight C-1

D Abbreviations and Acronyms D-1

OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual Figures


x

Figures

Figure 1-1 The OptiX OSN 3500 1-1

Figure 1-2 Components and architecture of the OptiX OSN 3500 1-2

Figure 1-3 The OptiX OSN 2500 1-3

Figure 1-4 Components and architecture of the OptiX OSN 2500 1-4

Figure 1-5 The OptiX OSN 1500A 1-5

Figure 1-6 The OptiX OSN 1500B 1-5

Figure 2-1 The 300-mm deep ETSI cabinet 2-2

Figure 2-2 The ETSI cabinet configuration 2-3

Figure 2-3 The power distribution unit 2-4

Figure 3-1 Structure of the OptiX OSN 3500 subrack 3-2

Figure 3-2 Slot distribution of the OptiX OSN 3500 3-3

Figure 3-3 Structure of the OptiX OSN 2500 subrack 3-10

Figure 3-4 Slot distribution of the OptiX OSN 2500 (before slot segmentation) 3-11

Figure 3-5 Access capacity of the OptiX OSN 2500 (before slot segmentation) 3-11

Figure 3-6 Slot distribution of the OptiX OSN 2500 (after slot segmentation) 3-12

Figure 3-7 Access capacity of the OptiX OSN 2500 (after slot segmentation) 3-12

Figure 3-8 Structure of the OptiX OSN 1500A 3-19

Figure 3-9 Slot distribution of the OptiX OSN 1500A (before slot segmentation) 3-19

Figure 3-10 Slot distribution of the OptiX OSN 1500A (after slot segmentation) 3-20

Figure 3-11 Access capacity of the OptiX OSN 1500A 3-20

Figure 3-12 Structure of the OptiX OSN 1500B 3-24

Figure 3-13 Slot distribution of the OptiX OSN 1500B (before slot segmentation) 3-25

Figure 3-14 Access capacity of the OptiX OSN 1500B (before slot segmentation) 3-25

Figure 3-15 Slot distribution of the OptiX OSN 1500B (after slot segmentation) 3-26

Figure 3-16 Access capacity of the OptiX OSN 1500B (after slot segmentation) 3-26



xi

Figure 4-1 Board appearance 4-11

Figure 5-1 The principle block diagram of the SL64 5-3

Figure 5-2 The front panel of the SL64 5-4

Figure 5-3 The principle block diagram of the SF16 5-9

Figure 5-4 The front panel of the SL16 and the SF16 5-10

Figure 5-5 The principle block diagram of the SL4/SLD4/SLQ4 5-16

Figure 5-6 The front panel of the SL4, SLQ4, and SLD4 5-18

Figure 5-7 The principle block diagram of the SLT1/SLQ1/SL1 5-23

Figure 5-8 The front panel of the SLT1/SLQ1/SL1 5-24

Figure 5-9 The front panel of the R1SL4 and R1SLD4 5-29

Figure 5-10 The front panel of the R1SL1 and R1SLQ1 5-29

Figure 5-11 The principle block diagram of the SEP1 5-34

Figure 5-12 The front panel of the SEP1, EU08, OU08, and TSB8 5-35

Figure 5-13 1:3 TPS protection of the SEP1 in the OptiX OSN 3500 5-37

Figure 5-14 Board distribution upon two-group 1:3 TPS for the SEP1 in the OptiX OSN 3500 5-38

Figure 5-15 Board distribution upon two-group 1:1 TPS for the SEP1 in the OptiX OSN 2500 5-39

Figure 5-16 Board distribution upon 1:1 TPS for the SEP1 in the OptiX OSN 1500B 5-39

Figure 6-1 The functional block diagram of the SPQ4 6-3

Figure 6-2 The front panel of the SPQ4 and MU04 6-4

Figure 6-3 The 1:3 TPS protection of the SPQ4 in the OptiX OSN 3500 6-6

Figure 6-4 Board distribution upon two-group 1:3 TPS for the SPQ4 in the OptiX OSN 3500 6-7

Figure 6-5 Board distribution upon two-group 1:1 TPS for the SPQ4 in the OptiX OSN 2500 6-8

Figure 6-6 Board distribution upon 1:1 TPS for the SPQ4 in the OptiX OSN 1500B 6-8

Figure 6-7 The functional block diagram of the PD3, PL3, and PL3A 6-12

Figure 6-8 The mapping and multiplexing process of E3/DS3 signals 6-13

Figure 6-9 The front panel of the PD3, PL3, PL3A, C34S and D34S 6-14

Figure 6-10 The 1:3 TPS protection of the PD3 in the OptiX OSN 3500 6-16

Figure 6-11 Board layout upon 1:3 TPS protection for the PL3/PD3 in the OptiX OSN 3500 6-18

Figure 6-12 Board layout upon 1:1 TPS protection for the PL3/PD3 n the OptiX OSN 2500 6-19

Figure 6-13 Board layout upon 1:1 TPS protection for the PL3/PD3 in the OptiX OSN 1500B 6-20

Figure 6-14 The functional block diagram of the PQ1/PQM 6-23

Figure 6-15 The mapping and multiplexing process of E1/T1 signals 6-24

Figure 6-16 The front panel of the PQ1, PQM, D75S, D12S, and D12B 6-25

Figure 6-17 The 1:8 TPS protection of the PQ1 in the OptiX OSN 3500 6-27

Figure 6-18 Slot assignment upon 1:8 protection for the PQ1/PQM in the OptiX OSN 3500 6-28

Figure 6-19 Slot assignment upon 1:4 protection for the PQ1/PQM in the OptiX OSN 2500 6-29



xii

Figure 6-20 The front panel of the PD1, PL1, L12S and L75S 6-32

Figure 6-21 Board distribution upon 1:2 TPS protection of the PD1 in the OptiX OSN 2500 6-34

Figure 6-22 Board distribution upon 1:1 TPS protection of the PD1 6-35

Figure 7-1 Functional block diagram of the EGT2 7-5

Figure 7-2 Front panel of the EGT2/EFT8/EFT4/EFF8/ETF8 7-6

Figure 7-3 Functional block diagram of the EGS2 7-14

Figure 7-4 Front panel of the EGS2/EFS4/EFS0/ETS8 7-15

Figure 7-5 Board distribution upon 1:1 TPS protection of the OptiX OSN 3500 7-18

Figure 7-6 Board configuration upon 1:1 TPS protection of the OptiX OSN 2500 7-19

Figure 7-7 Board distribution upon 1:1 TPS protection of the OSN 1500 7-19

Figure 7-8 Functional block diagram of the EMR0 7-27

Figure 7-9 Front panel of the EMR0 and EGR2 7-29

Figure 7-10 Functional block diagram of the ADL4 and ADQ1 7-35

Figure 7-11 Front panel of the ADL4 and ADQ1 7-37

Figure 7-12 Front panel of the IDL4 and IDQ1 7-42

Figure 7-13 The functional block diagram of the MST4 7-47

Figure 7-14 The front panel of the MST4 7-48

Figure 8-1 Functional block diagram of the GXCS/EXCS/UXCS 8-3

Figure 8-2 Front panel of the GXCS, EXCS, UXCS and XCE 8-4

Figure 8-3 Configuration of extended subracks 8-6

Figure 8-4 Functional block diagram of the CXL16 8-11

Figure 8-5 Front panel of the CXL1, CXL4 and CXL16 8-11

Figure 8-6 Functional block diagram of the SCC 8-17

Figure 8-7 Position of respective orderwire bytes in the SDH frame 8-18

Figure 8-8 The front panel of the SCC and the GSCC 8-19

Figure 8-9 Functional block diagram of the CRG 8-23

Figure 8-10 Front panel of the CRG 8-24

Figure 9-1 Functional block diagram of the LWX 9-2

Figure 9-2 Front panel of the LWX 9-4

Figure 9-3 MR2A/MR2B/MR2C serves as OTM station 9-8

Figure 9-4 MR2A/MR2B/MR2C and LWX form OADM station adding/dropping two channels of signals 9-8

Figure 9-5 Functional block diagram of the MR2A/MR2B/MR2C 9-9

Figure 9-6 Front panel of the MR2A 9-10

Figure 9-7 Position of BA and PA in the network 9-13

Figure 9-8 Functional block diagram of the BA2/BPA 9-13

Figure 9-9 Front panel of the BA2 and BPA 9-14



xiii

Figure 9-10 Appearance of the 61COA (PA) 9-16

Figure 9-11 Appearance of the 62COA 9-17

Figure 9-12 Application of Raman amplifier (62COA) 9-18

Figure 9-13 Functional block diagram of 61COA 9-18

Figure 9-14 Front panel of the COA 9-19

Figure 9-15 Front panel of the 62COA 9-19

Figure 9-16 E2000 flange and fiber connector 9-20

Figure 9-17 Serial communication between the COA and the SCC 9-21

Figure 9-18 The position of the 61COA in the ETSI cabinet 9-23

Figure 9-19 The position of DCU in the optical transmission system 9-25

Figure 9-20 Functional block diagram of the DCU 9-26

Figure 9-21 Front panel of the DCU 9-27

Figure 9-22 Functional block diagram of the AUX 9-33

Figure 9-23 Functional block diagram of the EOW 9-34

Figure 9-24 Position of orderwire bytes in the SDH frame 9-34

Figure 9-25 Functional block diagram of the SAP 9-35

Figure 9-26 Functional block diagram of the SEI 9-36

Figure 9-27 Connection of alarm input and alarm output (OptiX OSN 3500) 9-45

Figure 9-28 Connection of alarm input and alarm output (OptiX OSN 2500) 9-45

Figure 9-29 Connection of cabinet alarm indicators (OptiX OSN 3500) 9-46

Figure 9-30 Connection of cabinet alarm indicators (OptiX OSN 2500) 9-46

Figure 9-31 The principle block diagram of the PIU 9-48

Figure 9-32 Functional block diagram of the R1PIU 9-49

Figure 9-33 Functional block diagram of the R2PIU 9-50

Figure 9-34 Front panel of the N1PIU 9-51

Figure 9-35 Front panel of the Q1PIU 9-51

Figure 9-36 Front panel of the R1PIU 9-52

Figure 9-37 Front panel of the R2PIU 9-53

Figure 9-38 Appearance of the power box 9-55

Figure 9-39 Rear view of the power box 9-57

Figure 9-40 Appearance of the FAN (OptiX OSN 3500) 9-59

Figure 9-41 Functional block diagram of the N1FAN 9-60

Figure 9-42 Functional block diagram of the R1FAN 9-61

Figure 9-43 Front panel of the R1FAN 9-62

Figure 10-1 LC/PC optical interface 10-3

Figure 10-2 SC/PC Optical interface 10-4



xiv

Figure 10-3 FC/PC optical interface 10-4

Figure 10-4 E2000/APC optical interface 10-5

Figure 10-5 –48 V cabinet power cable/cabinet BGND power cable 10-6

Figure 10-6 Cabinet PGND power cable 10-6

Figure 10-7 Structure of the cabinet door grounding cable 10-7

Figure 10-8 Structure of the subrack power cable 10-8

Figure 10-9 Structure of the –48 V/–60 V power cable 10-9

Figure 10-10 Structure of the PGND power cable 10-10

Figure 10-11 Structure of the HUB/COA power cable 10-11

Figure 10-12 Structure of the subrack power cable 10-12

Figure 10-13 Structure of the cabinet indicator cable 10-14

Figure 10-14 Structure of the indicator/alarm concatenating cable between OSN subracks 10-16

Figure 10-15 Alarm concatenating cable between OSN subrack and other subrack 10-17

Figure 10-16 Structure of the housekeeping alarm input/output cable 10-19

Figure 10-17 Structure of the OAM serial port cable 10-21

Figure 10-18 Structure of the serial 1–4/F&f cable 10-23

Figure 10-19 Structure of the RS-232/422 serial port cable 10-24

Figure 10-20 Structure of ordinary telephone wire 10-25

Figure 10-21 Structure of the COA concatenating serial port cable 10-27

Figure 10-22 Structure of straight through cable 10-28

Figure 10-23 Structure of the crossover cable 10-29

Figure 10-24 Structure of the 75 Ω 8xE1 cable 10-31


Figure 10-26 Structure of the 120 Ω 8 x E1 cable 10-36


Figure 10-28 Structure of the E3/DS3/STM-1 cable 10-40

Figure 10-29 Structure of the extended subrack service connection cable 10-41

Figure 10-30 Structure of the 75 Ω clock cable 10-44

Figure 10-31 Structure of the 120 Ω clock cable 10-44

Figure 10-32 Structure of the 1-channel 120 Ω/75 Ω clock transfer cable 10-45

Figure 10-33 Structure of the 2-channel 120 Ω/75 Ω clock transfer cable 10-46

OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual Tables


xv

Tables

Table 2-1 Types of the cabinets for OptiX OSN products 2-1

Table 2-2 Description of ETSI cabinet indicators 2-3

Table 2-3 Mapping relation between terminals and PIU boards 2-4

Table 2-4 Technical parameters of the ETSI cabinet 2-5

Table 3-1 Slot mapping table for OptiX OSN 3500 3-3

Table 3-2 The relation between processing boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 3500 (80 Gbit/s cross-connect capacity) 3-4

Table 3-3 The relation between processing boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 3500 (40 Gbit/s cross-connect capacity) 3-6

Table 3-4 The relation between interface boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 3500 3-7

Table 3-5 The relation between other boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 3500 3-8

Table 3-6 Technical parameters of the OptiX OSN 3500 subrack 3-9

Table 3-7 Slot mapping table for the OptiX OSN 2500 3-13

Table 3-8 The relation between processing boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 2500 3-13

Table 3-9 The relation between interface boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 2500 3-16

Table 3-10 The relation between other boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 2500 3-16

Table 3-11 Technical parameters of the OptiX OSN 2500 subrack 3-17

Table 3-12 The relation between boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 2500 REG 3-18

Table 3-13 The relation between processing boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 1500A 3-21

Table 3-14 The relation between other boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 1500A 3-22

Table 3-15 Technical parameters of the OptiX OSN 1500A 3-23

Table 3-16 Slot mapping table for the OptiX OSN 1500B 3-27

Table 3-17 The relation between processing boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 1500B 3-27

Table 3-18 The relation between interface boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 1500B 3-29

Table 3-19 The relation between other boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 1500B 3-30

Table 3-20 Technical parameters of the OptiX OSN 1500B 3-31



xvi

Table 4-1 SDH boards 4-2

Table 4-2 PDH boards 4-3

Table 4-3 Data processing boards 4-5

Table 4-4 Cross-Connect and SCC boards 4-7

Table 4-5 Other boards 4-9

Table 5-1 Slots for the SL64 5-1

Table 5-2 Relationship between C2 setting and service type for the SL64 5-5

Table 5-3 Technical parameters of the SL64 5-5

Table 5-4 Parameters of the fixed wavelength interfaces complying with ITU-T G.692 5-6

Table 5-5 Slots for the SL16 and SF16 5-7

Table 5-6 Relationship between C2 setting and service type for the SF16/SL16 5-11

Table 5-7 Technical parameters of the SL16 5-12

Table 5-8 Technical parameters of the SF16 5-13

Table 5-9 Parameters of the fixed wavelength interfaces complying with G.692 5-14

Table 5-10 Slots for the SLQ4, SLD4 and SL4 5-15

Table 5-11 Relationship between C2 setting and service type for the SL4/SLD4/SLQ4 5-19

Table 5-12 Technical parameters of the SL4, SLD4 and SLQ4 5-19

Table 5-13 Slots for the SLT1, SLQ1, and SL1 5-21

Table 5-14 Relationship between C2 setting and service type for the SLT1/SLQ1/SL1 5-25

Table 5-15 Technical parameters of the SLT1, SLQ1, and SL1 5-26

Table 5-16 Slots for the R1SLD4/R1SL4/R1SLQ1/R1SL1 5-27

Table 5-17 Relationship between C2 setting and service type for half-slot optical processing boards 5-30

Table 5-18 Technical parameters of the R1SL4, R1SLD4, R1SLQ1, and R1SL1 5-31

Table 5-19 Slot for the SEP1, EU08, OU08, and TSB8 5-32

Table 5-20 Different access abilities of the SEP1 5-32

Table 5-21 Interfaces of the EU08 and OU08 5-36

Table 5-22 TPS protection of the SEP1 5-36

Table 5-23 Slot assignment of the SEP1, EU08, and TSB8 in the OptiX OSN 3500 5-38

Table 5-24 Slot assignment of the SEP1, EU08, and TSB8 in the OptiX OSN 2500 5-39

Table 5-25 Slot assignment of the SEP1, EU08, and TSB8 in the OptiX OSN 1500B 5-40

Table 5-26 Relationship between C2 setting and service type for the SEP1 5-40

Table 5-27 Technical parameters of the SEP1, EU08, OU08, and TSB8 5-41

Table 6-1 Slots for the SPQ4, MU04, and TSB8 6-1

Table 6-2 Interfaces on the MU04 6-5

Table 6-3 The TPS protection of the SPQ4 6-5

Table 6-4 Slot assignment of the SPQ4, MU04, and TSB8 in the OptiX OSN 3500 6-7



xvii

Table 6-5 Slot assignment of the SPQ4, MU04, and TSB8 in the OptiX OSN 2500 6-8

Table 6-6 Slot assignment of the SPQ4, MU04, and TSB8 in the OptiX OSN 1500B 6-9

Table 6-7 Relationship between C2 setting and service type for the SPQ4 6-9

Table 6-8 Technical parameters of the SPQ4 and MU04 6-10

Table 6-9 Slots for the PL3, PL3A, PD3, C34S, D34S, and TSB8 6-11

Table 6-10 Interfaces on the D34S 6-15

Table 6-11 The TPS protection of the PL3/PD3 6-15

Table 6-12 Relation between working and protection boards upon 1:3 TPS in the OptiX OSN 3500 6-17

Table 6-13 Slot assignment of the PL3/PD3, D34S and TSB8 in the OptiX OSN 3500 6-18


Table 6-15 Slot assignment of the PL3/PD3, D34S and TSB8 in the OptiX OSN 2500 6-19

Table 6-16 Relation between working and protection boards upon 1:1 TPS in the OptiX OSN 1500B 6-19

Table 6-17 Slot assignment of the PL3/PD3, D34S, and TSB8 in the OptiX OSN 1500B in the OptiX OSN 1500B 6-20

Table 6-18 Technical parameters of the PL3, PD3, PL3A, C34S and D34S 6-21

Table 6-19 Slots for the PQ1, PQM, D75S, D12S, and D12B 6-22

Table 6-20 Comparison between the PQ1 and PQM 6-22

Table 6-21 Comparison between the D75S, D12S, and D12B 6-25

Table 6-22 The TPS protection of the PQ1 and PQM 6-26



Table 6-25 Board distribution upon 1:2 TPS for the PQ1 or PQM in the OptiX OSN 1500B 6-29

Table 6-26 Technical parameters of the PQ1, PQM, D75S, D12S, and D12B 6-29

Table 6-27 Slots for the PD1, PL1, L75S, and L12S 6-31

Table 6-28 Comparison between the PL1, L75S, and L12S 6-33

Table 6-29 The TPS protection of the PD1 6-33

Table 6-30 Relation between working and protection boards upon 1:2 TPS of the PD1 in the OptiX OSN 2500 6-34

Table 6-31 Slot assignment upon 1:1 TPS protection of the PD1 in the OptiX OSN 1500B 6-35

Table 6-32 Technical parameters of the PD1, PL1, L75S, and L12S 6-36

Table 7-1 Slots for the EGT2/EFT8/EFT4/EFF8/ETF8 7-2

Table 7-2 Indicators of the EGT2 7-7

Table 7-3 Indicators of the EFF8 7-7

Table 7-4 Interfaces of the EGT2/EFT8/EFT4/EFF8/ETF8 7-7

Table 7-5 Parameters for the Ethernet interface of EGT2/EFT8/EFT4 7-8

Table 7-6 Technical parameters of the EGT2/EFT8/EFT4/EFF8/ETF8 7-9



xviii

Table 7-7 Slots for the EGS2/EFS4/EFS0/EFF8/ETF8/ETS8 7-11

Table 7-8 Indicators of the EGS2 7-16

Table 7-9 Interfaces of EGS2/EFS4/EFS0/ETS8 7-16

Table 7-10 TPS protection of the EFS0 7-17

Table 7-11 Slot assignment of the EFS0, ETS8 and TSB8 in the OptiX OSN 3500 7-18

Table 7-12 Parameters for the Ethernet interface on the EGS2/EFS4/EFS0 7-20

Table 7-13 N1 and N2 EGS2/EFS4/EFS0 boards 7-21

Table 7-14 Technical parameters of EGS2/EFS4/EFS0/ETS8 7-22

Table 7-15 Slots for the EMR0 and EGR2 7-24

Table 7-16 Indicators of the EGR2 7-30

Table 7-17 Interfaces of EMR0 and EGR2 7-30

Table 7-18 Parameters for the Ethernet interface on the EMR0 and EGR2 7-31

Table 7-19 Version description of the EMR0 and the EGR2 7-32

Table 7-20 Technical Parameters of the EMR0 and EGR2 7-33

Table 7-21 Slots for the ADL4 and ADQ1 7-34

Table 7-22 Parameters for the ATM port of the ADL4/ADQ1 7-38

Table 7-23 Technical parameters of the ADL4 and ADQ1 7-39

Table 7-24 Slots for the IDL4 and IDQ1 7-40

Table 7-25 Paired slots for the IDL4 and the IDQ1 7-43

Table 7-26 Parameters for the ATM interface on the IDL4/IDQ1 7-43

Table 7-27 Technical parameters of the IDL4 and IDQ1 7-44

Table 7-28 Slots for the MST4 7-45

Table 7-29 The service types and rates provided by the MST4 7-46

Table 7-30 Technical parameters of the MST4 7-49

Table 8-1 Comparison among GXCS, EXCS, UXCS and XCE. 8-2

Table 8-2 Indicators of the GXCS, EXCS, UXCS and XCE 8-5

Table 8-3 External clock interface of the GXCS, EXCS and UXCS 8-6

Table 8-4 N1 and N2 GXCSA boards 8-7

Table 8-5 Technical parameters of the GXCS, EXCS, UXCS and XCE 8-7

Table 8-6 Comparison among CXL1, CXL4 and CXL16 8-9

Table 8-7 Indicators of the CXL1, CXL4 and CXL16 8-12

Table 8-8 Interfaces of CXL 8-13

Table 8-9 Correspondence between C2 byte setting and service type 8-14

Table 8-10 Technical parameters of the CXL1, CXL4 and CXL16 8-14

Table 8-11 Switch description of the SCC 8-19

Table 8-12 Indicator description of the SCC 8-20



xix

Table 8-13 Technical parameters of the SCC 8-21

Table 8-14 Switch description of the CRG 8-24

Table 8-15 Indicator description of the CRG 8-25

Table 8-16 Technical parameters of the CRG 8-26

Table 9-1 Slots for the LWX 9-1

Table 9-2 Interfaces of the LWX 9-4

Table 9-3 Client-side optical interface parameters of the LWX 9-5

Table 9-4 DWDM-side optical interface parameters of the LWX 9-6

Table 9-5 Technical parameters of the LWX 9-6

Table 9-6 Slots for the MR2A, MR2B and MR2C 9-7

Table 9-7 Interfaces of the MR2A/MR2B/MR2C 9-10

Table 9-8 Technical parameters of the MR2A/MR2B/MR2C 9-11

Table 9-9 Slots for the BA2 and BPA 9-12

Table 9-10 Technical parameters of the BA2 and BPA 9-15

Table 9-11 Indicators of the 61COA/62COA 9-20

Table 9-12 Relation between output alarm and interface pin 9-21

Table 9-13 Technical parameters of the 61COA and 62COA 9-23

Table 9-14 Technical parameters of the DCU 9-28

Table 9-15 Slots for the AUX, EOW, SAP and SEI 9-30

Table 9-16 Indicator of the AUX 9-36

Table 9-17 Interfaces of the N1AUX 9-37

Table 9-18 Pin assignment of CLK1 and CLK2 interface 9-38

Table 9-19 Pin assignment of ETH, COM, EXT and F1 interface 9-38

Table 9-20 Pin assignment of F&f interface 9-38

Table 9-21 Pin assignment of PHONE, V1 and V2 interface 9-39

Table 9-22 Pin assignment of LAMP1 and LAMP2 interface 9-39

Table 9-23 Pin assignment of ALMO1 and ALMO2 interface 9-39

Table 9-24 Pin assignment of OAM interface 9-40

Table 9-25 Pin assignment of S1, S2, S3 and S4 interface 9-40

Table 9-26 Pin assignment of ALMI1 interface 9-40




Table 9-30 Interfaces on the R1/R2AUX front panel 9-42

Table 9-31 Indicators of the EOW 9-42

Table 9-32 Interfaces of the EOW 9-43



xx

Table 9-33 Interfaces of the SAP 9-43

Table 9-34 Interfaces of the SEI 9-43

Table 9-35 Jumper J9 setting 9-46

Table 9-36 Technical parameters of the AUX, EOW, SAP and SEI 9-47

Table 9-37 Interfaces on the N1PIU front panel 9-51

Table 9-38 Interfaces of the Q1PIU 9-52

Table 9-39 Indicator of the R1PIU 9-52

Table 9-40 Interfaces of the Q1PIU 9-52

Table 9-41 Indicators and the switch on the R2PIU front panel 9-53

Table 9-42 Technical parameters of the PIU 9-54

Table 9-43 Indicators of the power box 9-57

Table 9-44 Interfaces on the power box front panel 9-57

Table 9-45 Technical parameters of the UPM 9-58

Table 9-46 Indicator of the N1FAN 9-61

Table 9-47 Indicators of the R1FAN 9-62

Table 9-48 Technical parameters of the FAN 9-62

Table 10-1 Classification of fiber jumper 10-2

Table 10-2 Classification of fiber connector 10-3

Table 10-3 OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 power cables and grounding cables 10-5

Table 10-4 Pin assignment of subrack power cable 10-8

Table 10-5 Pin assignment of the –48 V/–60 V power cable 10-10

Table 10-6 Pin assignment of the HUB power cable 10-12

Table 10-7 Pin assignment of the UPM power cable 10-13

Table 10-8 OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 alarm cable 10-14

Table 10-9 Pin assignment of the cabinet indicator cable 10-15

Table 10-10 Pin assignment of indicator/alarm concatenating cables between OSN subracks 10-16

Table 10-11 Pin assignment of alarm concatenating cable between OSN subrack and other subrack 10-18

Table 10-12 Pin assignment of housekeeping alarm input/output cable for OptiX OSN 3500/2500 10-19

Table 10-13 Pin assignment of housekeeping alarm input/output cable for OptiX OSN 1500 10-20

Table 10-14 OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 management cables 10-21

Table 10-15 Pin assignment of OAM serial port cable 10-22

Table 10-16 Pin assignment of the serial 1–4/F&f cable 10-23

Table 10-17 Pin assignment of the RS-232/422 serial port cable 10-25

Table 10-18 Pin assignment of ordinary telephone wire 10-26

Table 10-19 pin assignment of the COA concatenating serial port cable 10-27

Table 10-20 Pin assignment of the straight through cable 10-28



xxi

Table 10-21 Pin assignment of crossover cable 10-29

Table 10-22 OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 signal cables 10-31

Table 10-23 Pin assignment of the 75 Ω 8xE1 cable 10-32


Table 10-25 Pin assignment of the 120 Ω 8 x E1 cable 10-36


Table 10-27 Pin assignment of the extended subrack service connection cable 10-42

Table 10-28 OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 clock cables 10-43

Table 10-29 Pin assignment of the 120 Ω clock cable 10-44

Table 10-30 Pin assignment of the 75 Ω/120 Ω clock transfer cable 10-46

Table B-1 N1 and N2 optical line interface boards B-5

Table B-2 Ethernet processing board version B-5

Table B-3 N1 and N2 Ethernet processing boards B-6

Table B-4 N1 and N2 GXCSA boards B-7

Table B-5 N1SCC, N1GSCC and N2GSCC B-7

Table B-6 Q1 and Q2 CXL1/4/16 boards B-8

Table B-7 Version description of PIU, AUX and FAN B-8

OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual About This Manual


xxii

About This Manual

Release Notes

This manual covers: The OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System, version V100R003 The OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System, version V100R003 The OptiX OSN 1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System, version V100R003

Related Manuals

The following table shows the manuals of the OptiX OSN 3500, OSN 2500, and OSN 1500.

OptiX OSN 3500 OptiX OSN 2500 OptiX OSN 1500

OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Documentation Guide

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Technical Manual System Description



OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Installation Manual



OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Electronic Documentation



OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Technical Manual Networking and Application



OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Hardware Description Manual

OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Maintenance Manual Routine Maintenance



xxiii


OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Maintenance Manual Troubleshooting

OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Maintenance Manual Alarm and Performance Event

OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Commissioning Guide

OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Configuration Guide

Note: The manual name with OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 indicates that the manual is shared by the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, and OptiX OSN 1500.

Main points of the manuals for the OptiX OSN series products are as follows.

Documentation Guide Introduces the contents and usage of the manuals.

Technical Manual System Description Introduces the functionality, structure, performance, specifications, and theory of the product.

Technical Manual Networking and Application Introduces the networking, protection, and application of the product.

Hardware Description Manual Introduces the hardware of the product, including the cabinet, subrack, power, fan, board, and a variety of interfaces.

Maintenance Manual Routine Maintenance Introduces the main items and precautions involved in routing maintenance.

Maintenance Troubleshooting Guides the analysis and troubleshooting of common faults.

Maintenance Alarm and Performance Event Guides the way of processing alarms and performance events.

Installation Manual Guides the on-site installation of the product, covering the installation of cabinet, subrack and components, and grounding specifications.

Commissioning Guide Introduces the equipment commissioning process, including indices of hardware, software, and service operation.

Configuration Guide Introduces the way and procedures of configuring SDH services, Ethernet private line services, Ethernet LAN services, RPR services, and ATM services on the T2000.

Electronic Documentation (CD-ROM) Covers all the preceding manuals. Acrobat Reader is attached.

Organization

The manual is organized as follows.



xxiv

Chapter Description

Chapter 1 Equipment Architecture

Introduces the architecture of the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500 and OptiX OSN 1500.

Chapter 2 Cabinet Describes the dimensions, appearance, and technical specifications of the cabinets used by the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, and OptiX OSN 1500, and the configuration in the cabinets.

Chapter 3 Subrack Introduces the structure of the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500 and OptiX OSN 1500 subracks. Lists the board types that can seat in the slots of the subracks.

Chapter 4 Board Classification and List

Classifies the boards into SDH boards, PDH boards, data processing boards, cross-connect and SCC boards, and other boards, and gives a detailed list of all available boards.

Chapter 5 SDH Boards Introduces SDH boards in terms of functionality, principle, front panel, DIP switch, interfaces, board protection, version description, and technical parameters.

Chapter 6 PDH Boards Introduces PDH boards in terms of functionality, principle, front panel, DIP switch, interfaces, board protection, version description, and technical parameters.

Chapter 7 Data Processing Boards

Introduces data processing boards in terms of functionality, principle, front panel, DIP switch, interfaces, board protection, version description, and technical parameters.

Chapter 8 Cross-Connect and System Control Boards

Introduces cross-connect and SCC boards in terms of functionality, principle, front panel, DIP switch, interfaces, board protection, version description, and technical parameters.

Chapter 9 Other Boards Introduces other boards (for example, the system auxiliary interface board) in terms of functionality, principle, front panel, DIP switch, interfaces, board protection, version description, and technical parameters.

Chapter 10 Cables Introduces the external and the internal cables of the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500 and OptiX OSN 1500, and gives detailed description in terms of the structure, appearance, pin assignment, and technical parameters.

Appendix A–Appendix D Includes four appendices: Appendix A Quick Reference for Indicators Appendix B Power Consumption and Weight of Boards Appendix C Board Version Configuration Appendix D Abbreviations and Acronyms The appendices give a quick searching to equipment-related information during routine maintenance. Readers can locate the chapter where required information is covered through appendices quickly.



xxv

Intended Audience

This manual is intended for: Network administrator Maintenance engineer Provisioning engineer

Conventions

The manual uses the following conventions. Symbol Conventions

Symbol Description

Warning A warning notice with this symbol indicates high voltage could result in harm to person.

Warning A warning notice with this symbol indicates strong laser beam could result in personal injury.

Warning A warning notice with this symbol indicates a risk of personal injury.

Caution A caution notice with this symbol indicates a risk to equipment damage or loss of data.

Caution A caution notice with this symbol indicates the equipment is static-sensitive.

Important Note

An important note notice with this symbol helps you avoid an undesirable situation or indicates important supplementary information.

Note A note notice with this symbol indicates additional, helpful, non-critical information.

GUI Conventions

Convention Description

< > Button name are inside angle brackets. For example, click the <OK> button

[ ] Window names, menu items, data table and field names are inside square brackets. For example, pop up the [New User] window.

/ Multi-level menus are separated by forward slashes. For example, [File/Create/Folder].

OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual 1 Equipment Architecture


1-1

1 Equipment Architecture

This chapter introduces the architecture of the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, OptiX OSN 1500A, and OptiX OSN 1500B.

1.1 Architecture of the OptiX OSN 3500

Figure 1-1 shows the appearance of the OptiX OSN 3500.

Figure 1-1 The OptiX OSN 3500

The OptiX OSN 3500 can be seated in a 300-mm or 600-mm deep ETSI cabinet.



1-2

Figure 1-2 shows the components when the equipment seating in a 300-mm deep ETSI cabinet. The OptiX OSN 3500 is composed of cabinet, side panel, power distribution unit, subrack, fixing frame for order wire, boards, and cables.

1

2

3

4

5

6

1. Cabinet 2. Power distribution unit 3. Upper subrack 4. Fixing frame for order wire 5. Lower subrack 6. Side panel

Figure 1-2 Components and architecture of the OptiX OSN 3500



1-3

1.2 Architecture of the OptiX OSN 2500

Figure 1-3 shows the appearance of the OptiX OSN 2500.

Figure 1-3 The OptiX OSN 2500

The OptiX OSN 2500 can be seated in a 300-mm or 600-mm deep ETSI cabinet, or in a standard 19-inch cabinet. Figure 1-4 shows the components when the equipment seating in a 300-mm deep ETSI cabinet. The OptiX OSN 2500 is composed of cabinet, side panel, power distribution unit, subrack, fixing frame for order wire, boards, and cables.



1-4

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

1. Cabinet 2. Power distribution unit 3. Upper subrack 4. Fixing frame for order wire5. Middle subrack 6. Lower subrack 7. Side panel

Figure 1-4 Components and architecture of the OptiX OSN 2500



1-5

1.3 Architecture of the OptiX OSN 1500A

The OptiX OSN 1500A is a case-shape equipment. It can be seated in a 300-mm or 600-mm deep ETSI cabinet, a standard 19-inch cabinet, or be hanged on the wall. Figure 1-5 shows the appearance of the OptiX OSN 1500A.

Figure 1-5 The OptiX OSN 1500A

1.4 Architecture of the OptiX OSN 1500B

The OptiX OSN 1500B is a case-shape equipment. It can be seated in a 300-mm or 600-mm deep ETSI cabinet, a standard 19-inch cabinet, or be hanged on the wall. Figure 1-6 shows the appearance of the OptiX OSN 1500B.

Figure 1-6 The OptiX OSN 1500B

OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual 2 Cabinet


2-1

2 Cabinet

This chapter introduces the dimensions, technical specifications, and the configuration of the cabinet equipped by the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, OptiX OSN 1500A, or OptiX OSN 1500B.

2.1 Types

Table 2-1 shows the cabinets that can house the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, OptiX OSN 1500A, and OptiX OSN 1500B. Table 2-1 Types of the cabinets for OptiX OSN products

Cabinet Product

ETSI 300-mm deep

ETSI 600-mm deep

19-inch cabinet

Access network cabinet

Hanging

OptiX OSN 3500

OptiX OSN 2500

OptiX OSN 1500A

OptiX OSN 1500B

Notes: These cabinets should be provided by Huawei. Figure 2-1 shows the appearance of the ETSI cabinet.



2-2

Figure 2-1 The 300-mm deep ETSI cabinet



2-3

2.2 Cabinet Configuration

There are indicators and a power distribution unit on the top of ETSI cabinet, as shown in Figure 2-2.

1

2

PowerCritical MajorMinor

Power distribution unit

1. Cabinet indicators 2. Power distribution unit

Figure 2-2 The ETSI cabinet configuration

2.2.1 Cabinet Indicators

Table 2-2 shows the description of cabinet indicators. Table 2-2 Description of ETSI cabinet indicators

Indicator Status Description

On The equipment is powered on. Power indicator - Power (green)

Off The equipment is not powered on.

On There are critical alarms. Critical alarm indicator - Critical (red)

Off There are no critical alarms.

On There are major alarms. Major alarm indicator - Major (orange)

Off There are no major alarms.

On There are minor alarms. Minor alarm indicator - Minor (yellow)

Off There are no minor alarms.

Note: The cabinet indicators are driven by subrack, so you should connect the cable properly and power on the subrack first.



2-4

2.2.2 Power Distribution Unit

Figure 2-3 shows the power distribution unit.

NEG2(-)

INPUT

RTN2(+)RTN1(+) NEG1(-)

SW3/20ASW1/20A SW2/20A SW4/20ASW1/20A SW3/20ASW2/20A SW4/20A

1. Grounding stud 2. PGND 3. RTN1(+) 4. RTN2(+) 5. NEG1(–) 6. NEG2(–) 7. Left output cable terminal 8. Right output cable terminal

Figure 2-3 The power distribution unit

To the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, and OptiX OSN 1500A, the left output cable terminal feeds power to the PIU board on the left side of the subrack, and the right output cable terminal to that on the right side of the subrack. Table 2-3 reflects the mapping relation between the terminals and PIU boards. Table 2-3 Mapping relation between terminals and PIU boards

Left terminal Connected to Right

terminal Connected to

1 The PIU board on the left of the first subrack 1 The PIU board on the right of

the first subrack

2 The PIU board on the left of the second subrack 2 The PIU board on the right of

the second subrack

3 The PIU board on the left of the third subrack 3 The PIU board on the right of

the third subrack

4 The PIU board on the left of the fourth subrack 4 The PIU board on the right of

the fourth subrack

Note: To the OptiX OSN 3500, only terminal 1 and terminal 2 are in use normally. Terminals 3 and 4 can feed power to other equipment, such as COA.

To the OptiX OSN 1500B, the left output cable terminal feeds power to the upper PIU board of the subrack, and the right output cable terminal to the lower PIU board of the subrack.

2.2.3 Other Configuration

The cabinet can also house other external case-shape devices. Uninterruptible power modules (UPM)

The UPM numbered GIE4805S can feed power to the OptiX OSN 2500 and the OptiX OSN 1500 directly. The UPM converts the 220 V AC into –48 V DC, thus providing



2-5

power for equipment without –48 V DC feeding and for storage battery when required. Case-shape optical amplifier (COA)

The OptiX OSN 3500 and the OptiX OSN 2500 can be configured with two COA at most. The OptiX OSN 1500 can be configured with one COA.

Tone & Data access unit (TDA) Fiber spooling frame: spooling redundancy fibers inside the cabinet HUB

2.3 Technical Parameters

Table 2-4 shows the technical parameters of the ETSI cabinet. Table 2-4 Technical parameters of the ETSI cabinet

Dimensions (mm) Weight (kg)

OSN 3500 subracks housed



600 (W) x 300 (D) x 2000 (H) 55 1 2

600 (W) x 600 (D) x 2000 (H) 79 1 2

600 (W) x 300 (D) x 2200 (H) 60 2 3

600 (W) x 600 (D) x 2200 (H) 84 2 3

600 (W) x 300 (D) x 2600 (H) 70 2 4

600 (W) x 600 (D) x 2600 (H) 94 2 4

Up to the cabinet capacity and the number of available power supplies

OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual 3 Subrack


3-1

3 Subrack

This chapter introduces the structure, slot distribution, and technical parameters of the subrack of:

The OptiX OSN 3500 The OptiX OSN 2500 The OptiX OSN 2500 REG The OptiX OSN 1500A The OptiX OSN 1500B

3.1 Subrack for the OptiX OSN 3500

This section introduces the structure, slot distribution, and technical parameters of the OptiX OSN 3500 subrack.

3.1.1 Structure

The subrack of the OptiX OSN 3500 adopts two-layer structure. It is divided into board area, fan area, and fiber routing area, as shown in Figure 3-1.



3-2

1

2

3

1

1. Board area 2. Fan area 3. Fiber routing area

Figure 3-1 Structure of the OptiX OSN 3500 subrack

Board area: housing all boards of the OptiX OSN 3500 Fan area: housing three fan modules, enabling heat dissipation function Fiber routing area: for fiber routing



3-3

3.1.2 Slot Distribution

The subrack of the OptiX OSN 3500 has two layers. The upper layer gives 19 slots for interface boards. The lower layer gives 18 slots for processing boards. Figure 3-2 shows the slot distribution.

Fiber Routing

SLOT1

SLOT2

SLOT3

SLOT4

SLOT5

SLOT6

SLOT7

SLOT8

SLOT9

SLOT10

SLOT11

SLOT12

SLOT13

SLOT14

SLOT15

SLOT16

SLOT17

SLOT18

SLOT27

SLOT19

SLOT20

SLOT21

SLOT22

SLOT23

SLOT24

SLOT25

SLOT26

SLOT37

SLOT29

SLOT30

SLOT31

SLOT32

SLOT33

SLOT34

SLOT36

SLOT35

SLOT28

FAN FAN FAN

PIU

PIU

AUX

SCC

SCC

XCS

XCS

Figure 3-2 Slot distribution of the OptiX OSN 3500

1. Slots for Interface Boards Service interface boards: slots 19–26, slots 29–36

2. Slots for Processing Boards Service processing boards: slots 1–8 and slots 11–17

3. Slots for Other Boards XCS boards: slots 9–10 SCC boards: slots 17–18 (Slot 17 can also hold a service processing board) Power interface boards: slot 27 and slot 28 Auxiliary interface boards: slot 37

4. Slot Mapping Table Table 3-1 shows the slot mapping table which associates slots for processing boards to the slots for its corresponding interface boards. Table 3-1 Slot mapping table for OptiX OSN 3500

Slot for processing boards

Slots for corresponding interface boards



Slot 2 Slots 19, 20 Slot 3 Slots 21, 22



3-4




3.1.3 Boards and the Corresponding Slots

1. Processing Boards The OptiX OSN 3500 offers an 80 Gbit/s or 40 Gbit/s cross-connect capacity depending on the type of cross-connect boards. Table 3-2 and Table 3-3 associate processing boards to the corresponding slots under the two cross-connect configurations. Table 3-2 The relation between processing boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 3500 (80 Gbit/s cross-connect capacity)

Slots and capacity

Boards

Slot

1

(1.2

5 G

bit/s

)

Slot

2–s

lot 4

(1

.25

Gbi

t/s )

Slot

5–s

lot 6

(2

.5 G

bit/s

)

Slot

7–s

lot 8

(1

0 G

bit/s

)

Slot

11–

slot

12

(10

Gbi

t/s)

Slot

13–

slot

14

(2.5

G

bit/s

) Sl

ot 1

5–sl

ot

16 (1

.25

Gbi

t/s )

Slot

17

(1.2

5 G

bit/s

)

Slot

2–s

lot 5

, sl

ot 1

3–sl

ot

16

N2SL64

N1SF16, N1/N2SL16(A)

N1/N2SLQ4

N1/N2SLD4, N1/N2SL4, N1/N2SLQ1, N1/N2SL1

N1SLT1 (Note 1)

N1SEP (Note 2)

N1SEP1 (Note 2)

N1/N2SPQ4, N1PD3, N1PL3

N1PL3A

N1PQ1, N1PQM

N1EFS4

N1/N2EFS0



3-5

Slots and capacity

Boards

Slot

1

(1.2

5 G

bit/s

)

Slot

2–s

lot 4

(1

.25

Gbi

t/s )

Slot

5–s

lot 6

(2

.5 G

bit/s

)

Slot

7–s

lot 8

(1

0 G

bit/s

)

Slot

11–

slot

12

(10

Gbi

t/s)

Slot

13–

slot

14

(2.5

G

bit/s

) Sl

ot 1

5–sl

ot

16 (1

.25

Gbi

t/s )

Slot

17

(1.2

5 G

bit/s

)

Slot

2–s

lot 5

, sl

ot 1

3–sl

ot

16

N1/N2EGS2, N1EGT2, N1/N2EGR2

N1EFT8（work with interface boards）

N1EFT8 (led out from front panel)

N1/N2EMR0 (work with interface boards)

N1/N2EMR0 (led out from front panel)

N1ADL4, N1ADQ1, N1IDQ1, N1IDL4 (Note 3)

N1MR2A

N1MR2C (Note 4)

N1LWX

N1DCU, N1BA2, N1BPA

Note 1: The SLT1 in the OptiX OSN 3500 provides 1–12 optical interfaces. Note 2: On the T2000, the SEP1 is displayed as SEP1 when led out directly from the front panel, or displayed as SEP when working with interface boards. Note 3: The maximum bandwidth at SDH side for the N1ADL4, N1ADQ1, N1IDL4, and N1IDQ1 is 1.25 Gbit/s. Note 4: The N1MR2C seats in any of slots 19–26 or slots 29–36.



3-6

Table 3-3 The relation between processing boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 3500 (40 Gbit/s cross-connect capacity)

Slots and capacity

Boards

Slot

1

(622

Mbi

t/s )

Slot

2–s

lot 5

(6

22 M

bit/s

)

Slot

6–s

lot 7

(2

.5 G

bit/s

)

Slot

8

(10

Gbi

t/s)

Slot

11

(1

0 G

bit/s

)

Slot

12–

slot

13

(2.5

Gbi

t/s)

Slot

14–

slot

16

(622

Mbi

t/s )

Slot

17

(6

22 M

bit/s

)

Slot

2–s

lot 5

, sl

ot 1

3–sl

ot6

N2SL64

N1SF16, N1/N2SL16(A)

N1/N2SLQ4, N1/N2SLD4

N1/N2SL4, N1/N2SLQ1, N1/N2SL1, N1SLT1 (Note 1)

N1SEP (Note 2)

N1SEP1 (Note 2)

only in slot 6

only in slot 13


N1PL3A

N1PQ1, N1PQM

N1EFS4

N1/N2EFS0

N1/N2EGS2, N1EGT2, N1/N2EGR2

N1EFT8 (work with interface boards)

only in slot 13


only in slot 6

only in slot 13

N1/N2EMR0 (work with interface boards)



3-7

Slots and capacity

Boards

Slot

1

(622

Mbi

t/s )

Slot

2–s

lot 5

(6

22 M

bit/s

)

Slot

6–s

lot 7

(2

.5 G

bit/s

)

Slot

8

(10

Gbi

t/s)

Slot

11

(1

0 G

bit/s

)

Slot

12–

slot

13

(2.5

Gbi

t/s)

Slot

14–

slot

16

(622

Mbi

t/s )

Slot

17

(6

22 M

bit/s

)

Slot

2–s

lot 5

, sl

ot 1

3–sl

ot6


only in slot 6

only in slot 13

N1ADL4, N1ADQ1 (Note 3)

N1IDQ1, N1IDL4 (Note 3)

N1MR2A

N1MR2C (Note 4)

N1LWX

N1DCU, N1BA2, N1BPA

Note 1: The SLT1 in the OptiX OSN 3500 provides 1–12 optical interfaces. Note 2: On the T2000, the SEP1 is displayed as SEP1 when led out directly from the front panel, or displayed as SEP when working with interface boards. Note 3: The maximum bandwidth at SDH side for the N1ADL4, N1ADQ1, N1IDL4, and N1IDQ1 is 1.25 Gbit/s. Note 4: The N1MR2C seats in any of slots 19–26 or slots 29–36.

2. Interface Boards Table 3-4 associates interface boards to the corresponding slots. Table 3-4 The relation between interface boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 3500

Slots

Boards

Slot

19

Slot

20

Slot

21

Slot

22

Slot

23

Slot

24

Slot

25

Slot

26

Slot

29

Slot

30

Slot

31

Slot

32

Slot

33

Slot

34

Slot

35

Slot

36

N1EU08 (Note)

N1OU08 (LC interface) (Note)

N2OU08 (SC interface) (Note)

N1EU04



3-8

Slots

Boards

Slot

19

Slot

20

Slot

21

Slot

22

Slot

23

Slot

24

Slot

25

Slot

26

Slot

29

Slot

30

Slot

31

Slot

32

Slot

33

Slot

34

Slot

35

Slot

36

N1MU04

N1D34S

N1D75S

N1D12S

N1D12B

N1ETF8

N1EFF8

N1ETS8

N1TSB8

Note 1: The OptiX OSN 3500 does not support the N1EU08, N1OU08, and N2OU08 board when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s.

3. Other Boards Table 3-5 associates cross-connect boards, SCC boards, and auxiliary interface boards to the corresponding slots. Table 3-5 The relation between other boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 3500

Slots Boards

Slot

9–s

lot

10 Sl

ot

17–s

lot 1

8

Slot

27

–slo

t 28

Slot

37

Slot

38

–slo

t 40

Slot

59

–slo

t 60

Slot

10

1–sl

ot 1

02

N1GXCS, N2GXCS

N1EXCS (Note 1)

N1UXCSA(Note 1)

N1UXCSB(Note 1)

N1XCE (Note 2)

N1SCC

N1GSCC, N2GSCC



3-9

Slots Boards

Slot

9–s

lot

10 Sl

ot

17–s

lot 1

8

Slot

27

–slo

t 28

Slot

37

Slot

38

–slo

t 40

Slot

59

–slo

t 60

Slot

10

1–sl

ot 1

02

N1PIU

N1AUX

N1FAN (Note 3)

61COA, 62COA (Note 3)

Note 1: The OptiX OSN 3500 does not support the N1EXCS, N1UXCSA, N1UXCSB, and N1XCE board when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s. Note 2: The N1XCE can only seat in the extended subrack of the OptiX OSN 3500. Logical slots for the N1XCE are slot 59 and slot 60. Note 3: The corresponding slots for the N1FAN, 61COA, and 62COA are logical slots, not physical slots.

3.1.4 Technical Parameters

Table 3-6 lists the technical parameters of the subrack of the OptiX OSN 3500. Table 3-6 Technical parameters of the OptiX OSN 3500 subrack

Dimensions 722 mm (H) x 497 mm (W) x 295 mm (D)

Weight 23 kg (net weight of the subrack, not including spare boards and fans)

3.2 Subrack for the OptiX OSN 2500

This section introduces the structure, slot distribution, and technical parameters of the OptiX OSN 2500 subrack.

3.2.1 Structure

The subrack of the OptiX OSN 2500 adopts one-layer structure. It is divided into processing board area, interface board area, auxiliary interface area, fan area, and fiber routing area, as shown in Figure 3-1.



3-10

1

4

5

3

2

1. Auxiliary interface area 2. Interface board area 3. Processing board area 4. Fan area 5. PIU area

Figure 3-3 Structure of the OptiX OSN 2500 subrack

Auxiliary interface area: including alarm interfaces, orderwire interface, clock

interfaces, operation and maintenance interfaces, F1 port, serial ports and so on Processing board area: housing the processing boards of the OptiX OSN 2500 Interface board area: housing the interface boards of the OptiX OSN 2500 Fan area: housing two fan modules, enabling heat dissipation function PIU area: housing PIU modules, providing power for the OptiX OSN 2500



3-11


The subrack of the OptiX OSN 2500 has eight slots for interface boards and ten slots for processing boards. Figure 3-4 shows the slot distribution. Figure 3-5 shows the access capacity for the subrack.

Fiber routing

SLOT9

SLOT10

SLOT13

SLOT14

SLOT12

SLOT8

SLOT11

PIU(Slot 22)

PIU(Slot 23)

FAN(Slot 25)

FAN(Slot 24)

SLOT5

SLOT6

SLOT7

SLOT15

SLOT16

SLOT17

SLOT18

SLOT4

SLOT3

SLOT2

SLOT1

CXL

16/4

/1

CXL

16/4

/1

SAP

Pro

cess

ing

boar

dP

roce

ssin

g bo

ard

Pro

cess

ing

boar

d

Pro

cess

ing

boar

d

Pro

cess

ing

boar

d

Pro

cess

ing

boar

d

Pro

cess

ing

boar

d

Inte

rface

boa

rd

Inte

rface

boa

rd

Inte

rface

boa

rd

Inte

rface

boa

rd

Inte

rface

boa

rd

Inte

rface

boa

rd

Inte

rface

boa

rd

Inte

rface

boa

rd

Figure 3-4 Slot distribution of the OptiX OSN 2500 (before slot segmentation)

Fiber routing

SLOT9

CXL16

SLOT10

CXL16

SLOT13

SLOT14

SAP

SLOT15

SLOT16

SLOT17

SLOT18

SLOT1

SLOT2

SLOT3

SLOT4

SLOT12

SLOT8

SLOT11

PIU(Slot 22)

PIU(Slot 23)

FAN(Slot 25)

FAN(Slot 24)

SLOT5

SLOT6

SLOT7

622

Mbi

t/s

622

Mbi

t/s

2.5

Gbi

t/s

2.5

Gbi

t/s

1.25

Gbi

t/s

2.5

Gbi

t/s

2.5

Gbi

t/s

Figure 3-5 Access capacity of the OptiX OSN 2500 (before slot segmentation)

The OptiX OSN 2500 subrack supports slot segmentation. Slots 5, 6, and 7 can be segmented into two half-height slots respectively. After segmentation, the slot distribution is shown in Figure 3-6, and the access capacity is shown in Figure 3-7.



3-12

Fiber routing

SLOT9

SLOT10

SLOT13

SLOT14

SLOT12

SLOT8

SLOT11

PIU(Slot 22)

PIU(Slot 23)

FAN(Slot 25)

FAN(Slot 24)

SLOT

5

SLOT

6

SLOT

7

SLOT15

SLOT16

SLOT17

SLOT18

SLOT4

SLOT3

SLOT2

SLOT1

CXL

16/4

/1

CXL

16/4

/1

SAP

Inte

rface

boa

rd

SLOT

19

SLOT

20

SLOT

21

Inte

rface

boa

rd

Inte

rface

boa

rd

Inte

rface

boa

rd

Inte

rface

boa

rd

Inte

rface

boa

rd

Inte

rface

boa

rd

Inte

rface

boa

rd

Figure 3-6 Slot distribution of the OptiX OSN 2500 (after slot segmentation)

Fiber routing

SLOT9

CXL

16

SLOT10

CXL16

SLOT13

SLOT14

SAP

SLOT15

SLOT16

SLOT17

SLOT18

SLOT1

SLOT2

SLOT3

SLOT4

SLOT12

SLOT8

SLOT11

PIU(Slot 22)

PIU(Slot 23)

FAN(Slot 25)

FAN(Slot 24)

2.5

Gbi

t/s

2.5

Gbi

t/s

1.25

Gbi

t/s

2.5

Gbi

t/sSLOT19

SLOT5

SLOT20

SLOT6

SLOT21

SLOT7

622

Mbi

t/s

622

Mbi

t/s62

2 M

bit/s

622

Mbi

t/s

1.25

Gbi

t/s1.

25 G

bit/s

Figure 3-7 Access capacity of the OptiX OSN 2500 (after slot segmentation)

1. Slots for Interface Boards Service interface boards: slots 1–4, slots 15–18



3-13

2. Slots for Processing Boards Service processing boards: slots 5–8 and slots 11–13 (before slot segmentation) Service processing boards: slots 5–8, slots 11–13, and slots 19–21 (after slot

segmentation) CXL boards: slots 9–10 SAP boards: slot 14

3. Slots for Other Boards SEI auxiliary interface boards: auxiliary interface area Power interface boards: slot 22 and slot 23 Fan units: slot 24 and slot 25

4. Slot Mapping Table Table 3-7 shows the slot mapping table which associates slots for processing boards to the slots for its corresponding interface boards. Table 3-7 Slot mapping table for the OptiX OSN 2500







Slot 6 (Note) Slots 2 Slot 20 (Note) Slots 1

Slot 7 (Note) Slots 4 Slot 21 (Note) Slots 3

Note: The slot is half-height slot after slot segmentation.


1. Processing Boards Table 3-8 associates processing boards to the corresponding slots. Table 3-8 The relation between processing boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 2500

Before slot segmentation After slot segmentation

Slots and capacity

Boards

Slot

5

(622

Mbi

t/s )

Slot

6

(622

Mbi

t/s )

Slot

7

(2.5

Gbi

t/s)

Slot

8

(2.5

Gbi

t/s)

Slot

11

(2

.5 G

bit/s

)

Slot

12

(2

.5 G

bit/s

)

Slot

13

(1

.25

Gbi

t/s )

Slot

5–S

lot

6 , S

lot

19–S

lot 2

0

(622

Mbi

t/s)

Slot

7, S

lot

21 (1

.25

Gbi

t/s )

N1SF16, N1/N2SL16(A), N1/N2SLQ4

N1/N2SLD4



3-14


Slots and capacity

Boards Sl

ot 5

(6

22 M

bit/s

)

Slot

6

(622

Mbi

t/s )

Slot

7

(2.5

Gbi

t/s)

Slot

8

(2.5

Gbi

t/s)

Slot

11

(2

.5 G

bit/s

)

Slot

12

(2

.5 G

bit/s

)

Slot

13

(1

.25

Gbi

t/s )

Slot

5–S

lot

6 , S

lot

19–S

lot 2

0

(622

Mbi

t/s)

Slot

7, S

lot

21 (1

.25

Gbi

t/s )

N1/N2SL4, N1/N2SLQ1, N1/N2SL1, N1SLT1 (Note 1)

R1SLD4

R1SL4, R1SLQ1, R1SL1

N1SEP (work with interface boards) (Note 2)

N1SEP1 (led out from front panel) (Note 2)


N1PL3A

N1PQ1, N1PQM

R1PD1

R1EFT4

N1EFS4

N1/N2EFS0

N2EGS2, N1EGT2, N2EGR2



N2EMR0 (work with interface boards)



3-15


Slots and capacity

Boards Sl

ot 5

(6

22 M

bit/s

)

Slot

6

(622

Mbi

t/s )

Slot

7

(2.5

Gbi

t/s)

Slot

8

(2.5

Gbi

t/s)

Slot

11

(2

.5 G

bit/s

)

Slot

12

(2

.5 G

bit/s

)

Slot

13

(1

.25

Gbi

t/s )

Slot

5–S

lot

6 , S

lot

19–S

lot 2

0

(622

Mbi

t/s)

Slot

7, S

lot

21 (1

.25

Gbi

t/s )

N2EMR0 (led out from front panel)

N1ADL4, N1ADQ1


N1MR2A

N1MR2B

N1MR2C (Note 4)

N1LWX

N1DCU, N1BA2, N1BPA

Note 1: The SLT1 provides 1–4 optical interfaces when in slots 1–4. The SLT1 provides 1–12 optical interfaces when in slots 7–slot 8 or slot 11–slot 12. The SLT1 provides 1–8 optical interfaces when in slot 13. Note 2: On the T2000, the SEP1 is displayed as SEP1 when led out directly from the front panel, or displayed as SEP when working with interface boards. Note 3: The maximum bandwidth at SDH side for the N1ADL4, N1ADQ1, N1IDL4, and N1IDQ1 is 1.25 Gbit/s. Note 4: The N1MR2C seats in any of slots 1–4 or slots 15–18.

2. Interface Boards Table 3-9 associates interface boards to the corresponding slots.



3-16

Table 3-9 The relation between interface boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 2500

Slots

Boards

Slot

1

Slot

2

Slot

3

Slot

4

Slot

15

Slot

16

Slot

17

Slot

18

N1EU08

N1EU08A

N1OU08 (LC type)

N2OU08 (SC type)

N1EU04

N1MU04

N1C34S

N1D34S

N1D75S

N1D12S

N1D12B

N1ETF8

N1EFF8

N1ETS8

N1TSB8

3. Other Boards Table 3-10 associates cross-connect boards, SCC boards, and auxiliary interface boards to the corresponding slots. Table 3-10 The relation between other boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 2500

Slots

Boards

Slot

9–s

lot 1

0

Slot

14

Slot

22–

slot

23

Slot

24–

slot

25

Slot

50

SEI a

rea

Slot

101

–slo

t 102

Q1CXL1/4/16, Q2CXL1/4/16/16A (physical board) (Note 1)



3-17

Slots

Boards

Slot

9–s

lot 1

0

Slot

14

Slot

22–

slot

23

Slot

24–

slot

25

Slot

50

SEI a

rea

Slot

101

–slo

t 102

SCC,GSCC (logical board)

slot 82–slot 83

CXL, ECXL (logical board)

slot 80–slot 81

Q1SL1/4/16/16A (logical board)

Q1SAP

Q1PIU

Q1SEI

N1FAN (Note 2)


CAU (Note 2)

Note 1: The CXL is a line, system control, cross-connect and timing board of the OptiX OSN 2500. It seats in slot 9 and slot 10. On the T2000, it is displayed as three board types: CXL, SCC and SL1/4/16, respectively occupying the logic slots 80–81, 82–83 and 9–10. Note 2: The corresponding slots for the N1FAN, 61COA, and 62COA are logical slots, not physical slots.


Table 3-11 lists the technical parameters of the subrack of the OptiX OSN 2500. Table 3-11 Technical parameters of the OptiX OSN 2500 subrack


Weight 17 kg (net weight of the subrack, not including spare boards and fans)



3-18

3.3 Subrack for the OptiX OSN 2500 REG

The OptiX OSN 2500 REG is used to regenerate STM-16 and STM-64 signals. The OptiX OSN 2500 REG uses the OptiX OSN 2500 subrack. The subrack structure and slot assignment are the same as those of the OptiX OSN 2500. This section mainly describes the basic configuration of the REG. Table 3-12 associates OptiX OSN 2500 REG boards to the corresponding slots. Table 3-12 The relation between boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 2500 REG

Slots and capacity Boards

Slot

5

(622

Mbi

t/s )

Slot

6

622

Mbi

t/s )

Slot

7

(2.5

Gbi

t/s)

Slot

8

(2.5

Gbi

t/s)

Slot

9

Slot

10

Slot

11

(2.5

Gbi

t/s)

Slot

12

(2.5

Gbi

t/s)

Slot

13

(1.2

5 G

bit/s

)

Slot

14

Slot

22

–slo

t 23

Slot

24–

slot

25

SEI a

rea

N1SL16

N1SL16A

N1SF16

Q1CRG

Q1SAP

Q1PIU

N1FAN

Q1SEI

N1BA2

N1BPA

N1DCU

The OptiX OSN 2500 REG can also be configured with N1BPA, N1BA2, N1DCU and external equipment like UPM and COA as required. For their specific slots, see Table 3-10.



3-19

3.4 Subrack for the OptiX OSN 1500A

This section introduces the structure, slot distribution, and technical parameters of the OptiX OSN 1500A subrack.

3.4.1 Structure

The OptiX OSN 1500A adopts one-layer structure. It is divided into board area, fan area, PIU area and fiber routing area, as shown in Figure 3-8.

1

2

4

5

6

3

1. Fan area 2. Board area 3. PIU area 4. Board area 5. Fiber routing area 6. Mounting ear

Figure 3-8 Structure of the OptiX OSN 1500A

Board area: for holding the boards of the OptiX OSN 1500A Fan area: housing one fan box, enabling heat dissipation function PIU area: housing two PIU boards, providing power for the OptiX OSN 1500A Fiber routing area: for fiber routing


The OptiX OSN 1500A has 11 slots before slot segmentation. Figure 3-9 shows the slot distribution.

Slot 20

FAN

Slot 1

Slot 12

Slot 13

Slot 4

Slot 6

Slot 7

Slot 8

Slot 9

Slot 10 AUX Slot 5

CXL16/4/1

CXL16/4/1

EOW

Slot 11

Figure 3-9 Slot distribution of the OptiX OSN 1500A (before slot segmentation)



3-20

The OptiX OSN 1500A supports slot segmentation. Slots 12 and 13 can be segmented into two half-height slots respectively. After segmentation, the slot distribution is shown in Figure 3-10.

Slot 20

FAN

Slot 1

Slot 2

Slot 3

Slot 4

Slot 6

Slot 7

Slot 8

Slot 9

Slot 10 AUX Slot 5

CXL16/4/1

CXL16/4/1

EOW

Slot 12

Slot 11

Slot 13

Figure 3-10 Slot distribution of the OptiX OSN 1500A (after slot segmentation)

Figure 3-11 shows the access capacity for the OptiX OSN 1500A.

XCS A XCS B

Slot20

Slot 1 Slot 11 Slot 6

Slot 2/12 Slot 7

Slot 3/13 Slot 8

Slot 4 Slot 9

Slot 5 Slot 102.5 Gbit/s

2.5 Gbit/s

2.5 Gbit/s

2.5 Gbit/s

1.25 Gbit/s

1.25 Gbit/s

1.25 Gbit/s

1.25 Gbit/s

Figure 3-11 Access capacity of the OptiX OSN 1500A

The access capacity for slot 12 or slot 13 is 2.5 Gbit/s before slot segmentation. After slot segmentation, the access capacity for half-height slot 2, slot 3, slot 12 or slot 13 is 1.25 Gbit/s.

1. Slots for Processing Boards Service processing boards: slots 6–9 and slots 12–13 (before slot segmentation) Service processing boards: slot 6–9, slot 12–13, slot 2–3 (after slot segmentation) CXL boards: slots 4–5 EOW boards: slot 9

2. Slots for Other Boards Auxiliary interface boards: slot 10 Power interface boards: slot 1 and slot 11 Fan units: slot 20


1. Processing Boards Table 3-13 associates processing boards to the corresponding slots.



3-21

Table 3-13 The relation between processing boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 1500A

Before slot segmentation After slot segmentation Slots and capacity

Boards Sl

ot 6

(1

.25

Gbi

t/s )

Slot

7

(1.2

5 G

bit/s

)

Slot

8

(1.2

5 G

bit/s

)

Slot

9

(1.2

5 G

bit/s

)

Slot

12–

slot

13

(2

.5 G

bit/s

)

Slot

2

(1.2

5 G

bit/s

)

Slot

3

(1.2

5 G

bit/s

)

Slot

12

(1

.25

Gbi

t/s)

Slot

13

(1

.25

Gbi

t/s)

N1SF16, N1/N2SL16(A), N1/N2SLQ4, N1/N2SLD4, N1/N2SL4, N1/N2SLQ1, N1/N2SL1, N1SLT1 (Note 1)

N1SEP1 (led out from front panel)

R1SLD4, R1SL4, R1SLQ1, R1SL1

R1PD1A, R1PD1B

R1PL1A, R1PL1B

N1PL3A

R1L75S, R1L12S

N1EFS4

R1EFT4




N1ADL4, N1ADQ1

N1IDQ1, N1IDL4

N1MR2A



3-22

Before slot segmentation After slot segmentation Slots and capacity

Boards Sl

ot 6

(1

.25

Gbi

t/s )

Slot

7

(1.2

5 G

bit/s

)

Slot

8

(1.2

5 G

bit/s

)

Slot

9

(1.2

5 G

bit/s

)

Slot

12–

slot

13

(2

.5 G

bit/s

)

Slot

2

(1.2

5 G

bit/s

)

Slot

3

(1.2

5 G

bit/s

)

Slot

12

(1

.25

Gbi

t/s)

Slot

13

(1

.25

Gbi

t/s)

N1MR2B

N1LWX

N1DCU, N1BA2, N1BPA

Note: The SLT1 in the OptiX OSN 1500A provides 1–12 optical interfaces.

2. Other Boards Table 3-14 associates cross-connect boards, SCC boards, and auxiliary interface boards to the corresponding slots. Table 3-14 The relation between other boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 1500A

Boards

Slots

Slot

4–s

lot 5

Slot

9

Slot

10

Slot

1, s

lot 1

1

Slot

20

Slot

50

Slot

101

–slo

t 102


SCC, GSCC (logical board)

Slots 82, -83

CXL, ECXL (logical board)

Slots 80, 81

Q1SL1/4/16/16AL (logical board)

R1EOW

R1AUX, R2AUX

R1PIUA

R1FAN (Note 1)




3-23

Boards

Slots

Slot

4–s

lot 5

Slot

9

Slot

10

Slot

1, s

lot 1

1

Slot

20

Slot

50

Slot

101

–slo

t 102

CAU (Note 1)

Note 1: The CXL is a line, system control, cross-connect and timing board of the OptiX OSN 1500. It seats in slot 4 and slot 5. On the T2000, it is displayed as three board types: CXL, SCC and SL1/4/16, respectively occupying the logic slots 80–81, 82–83 and 4–5. Note 2: The corresponding slots for the N1FAN, 61COA, 62COA , and CAU are logical slots, not physical slots.


Table 3-15 lists the technical parameters of the OptiX OSN 1500A equipment. Table 3-15 Technical parameters of the OptiX OSN 1500A

Dimensions 131mm mm (H) x 444 mm (W) x 262 mm (D)

Weight 8 kg (including backboard, 2 pieces PIU and fan)



3-24

3.5 Subrack for the OptiX OSN 1500B

This section introduces the structure, slot distribution, and technical parameters of the OptiX OSN 1500B subrack.

3.5.1 Structure

The OptiX OSN 1500B adopts two-layer structure. It is divided into processing board area, interface board area, auxiliary interface area, fan area, and PIU area, as shown in Figure 3-12.

3

4

5

6

7

1

2

1. Interface board area 2. PIU area 3. Fan area 4. Processing board area 5. Auxiliary interface area 6. Fiber routing area 7. Mounting ear

Figure 3-12 Structure of the OptiX OSN 1500B

Processing board area: for holding the processing boards of the OptiX OSN 1500B Interface board area: for holding the interface boards of the OptiX OSN 1500B Auxiliary interface area: including alarm interfaces, orderwire interface, clock

interfaces, operation and maintenance interfaces, F1 port, serial ports and so on Fan area: housing one fan module, enabling heat dissipation function PIU area: housing PIU modules, providing power for equipment Fiber routing area: for fiber routing ESD area: located above the fan box.



3-25


The OptiX OSN 1500B has four slots for interface boards on upper layer and ten slots (including slot 4 and slot 5) for processing boards before slot segmentation. Figure 3-13 shows the slot distribution. Figure 3-14 shows the access capacity for the OptiX OSN 1500B.

Slot 14 Slot 18 PIU

Slot 15

Slot 16

Slot 17

Slot 20

FAN

Slot 11

Slot 12

Slot 13

Slot 4

Slot 19 PIU

Slot 6

Slot 7

Slot 8

Slot 9

Slot 10 AUX Slot 5

CXL16/4/1

CXL16/4/1

EOW

Figure 3-13 Slot distribution of the OptiX OSN 1500B (before slot segmentation)

Slot 14 Slot 18 PIU

Slot 15

Slot 16

Slot 17

Slot 20

FAN

Slot 11

Slot 12

Slot 13

Slot 4

Slot 19 PIU

Slot 6

Slot 7

Slot 8

Slot 9

Slot 10 AUX Slot 5

2.5 Gbit/s

2.5 Gbit/s

2.5 Gbit/s

2.5 Gbit/s

2.5 Gbit/s

622 Mbit/s

622 Mbit/s

622 Mbit/s

622 Mbit/s

Figure 3-14 Access capacity of the OptiX OSN 1500B (before slot segmentation)

The OptiX OSN 1500B supports slot segmentation. Slots 11, 12, and13 can be segmented into two half-height slots respectively. After segmentation, the slot distribution is shown in Figure 3-15, and the access capacity is shown in Figure 3-16.



3-26

Slot 14 Slot 18 PIU

Slot 15

Slot 16

Slot 17

Slot 20

FAN

Slot 1

Slot 2

Slot 3

Slot 4

Slot 19 PIU

Slot 6

Slot 7

Slot 8

Slot 9

Slot 10 AUX Slot 5

CXL16/4/1

CXL16/4/1

EOW

Slot 11

Slot 12

Slot 13

Figure 3-15 Slot distribution of the OptiX OSN 1500B (after slot segmentation)

Slot 14 Slot 18 PIU

Slot 15

Slot 16

Slot 17

Slot 20

FAN

Slot 1

Slot 2

Slot 3

Slot 4

Slot 19 PIU

Slot 6

Slot 7

Slot 8

Slot 9

Slot 10 AUX Slot 5

2.5 Gbit/s

2.5 Gbit/s

622 Mbit/s

622 Mbit/s

622 Mbit/s

622 Mbit/s

Slot 11

Slot 12

Slot 13

1.25 Gbit/s

1.25 Gbit/s

1.25 Gbit/s

1.25 Gbit/s

1.25 Gbit/s

1.25 Gbit/s

Figure 3-16 Access capacity of the OptiX OSN 1500B (after slot segmentation)

1. Slots for Interface Boards Service interface boards: slots 14–17

2. Slots for Processing Boards Service processing board: slots 4–9 and slots 11–13 (before slot segmentation) Service processing board: slots 1–9 and slots 11–13 (after slot segmentation) CXL board: slots 4–5

3. Slots for Other Boards Auxiliary interface boards: slot 10 Orderwire boards: slot 9 (also for the processing boards) Fan units: slot 20 Power interface boards: slots 18 and 19

4. Slot Mapping Table Table 3-16 shows the slot mapping table which associates slots for processing boards to the slots for its corresponding interface boards.



3-27

Table 3-16 Slot mapping table for the OptiX OSN 1500B

Slot for processing boards Slot for corresponding interface boards

Slot 2 Slot 14

Slot 3 Slot 16

Slot 7 Slot 15

Slot 8 Slot 17

Slot 12 Slots 14, 15

Slot 13 Slots 16, 17

Note: The interface boards of the PD3, PL3, SEP, and SPQ4 boards can only be inserted in corresponding slots in even number. Slot 12 and slot 7 share slot 15 for interface boards. Slot 13 and slot 8 share slot 17 for interface boards.


1. Processing Boards Table 3-17 associates processing boards to the corresponding slots. Table 3-17 The relation between processing boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 1500B


Slots and capacity

Boards Slot

6

(622

Mbi

t/s )

Slot

7

(622

Mbi

t/s )

Slot

8

(622

Mbi

t/s)

Slot

9

(622

Mbi

t/s)

Slot

11

(2

.5 G

bit/s

)

Slot

12

(2

.5 G

bit/s

)

Slot

13

(2

.5 G

bit/s

)

Slot

1–s

lot 3

(1

.25

Gbi

t/s )

Slot

11,

slot

13

(1.2

5 G

bit/s

) N1SF16, N1/N2SL16(A), N1/N2SLQ4, N1/N2SLD4, N1/N2SL4, N1/N2SLQ1, N1/N2SL1, N1SLT1 (Note 1)

R1SLD4

R1SL4, R1SLQ1, R1SL1

N1SEP (work with interface boards) (Note 2)

N1SEP1 (led out from front panel) (Note 2)



3-28


Slots and capacity

Boards Slot

6

(622

Mbi

t/s )

Slot

7

(622

Mbi

t/s )

Slot

8

(622

Mbi

t/s)

Slot

9

(622

Mbi

t/s)

Slot

11

(2

.5 G

bit/s

)

Slot

12

(2

.5 G

bit/s

)

Slot

13

(2

.5 G

bit/s

)

Slot

1–s

lot 3

(1

.25

Gbi

t/s )

Slot

11,

slot

13

(1.2

5 G

bit/s

)


N1PL3A

N1PQ1, N1PQM

R1PD1

R1PL1A, R1PL1B

R1EFT4

N1EFS4

N1/N2EFS0




N2EMR0 (work with interface boards)

N2EMR0 (led out from front panel)

N1ADL4, N1ADQ1


N1MR2A

N1MR2B

N1MR2C (Note 4)



3-29


Slots and capacity

Boards Slot

6

(622

Mbi

t/s )

Slot

7

(622

Mbi

t/s )

Slot

8

(622

Mbi

t/s)

Slot

9

(622

Mbi

t/s)

Slot

11

(2

.5 G

bit/s

)

Slot

12

(2

.5 G

bit/s

)

Slot

13

(2

.5 G

bit/s

)

Slot

1–s

lot 3

(1

.25

Gbi

t/s )

Slot

11,

slot

13

(1.2

5 G

bit/s

)

N1LWX

N1DCU, N1BA2, N1BPA

Note 1: The SLT1 in the OptiX OSN 1500B provides 1–12 optical interfaces. Note 2: On the T2000, the SEP1 is displayed as SEP1 when led out directly from the front panel, or displayed as SEP when working with interface boards. Note 3: The maximum bandwidth at SDH side for the N1ADL4, N1ADQ1, N1IDL4, and N1IDQ1 is 1.25 Gbit/s. Note 4: The N1MR2C seats in any of slots 14–17.

2. Interface Boards Table 3-18 associates interface boards to the corresponding slots. Table 3-18 The relation between interface boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 1500B

Slots

Boards Slot

14

Slot

15

Slot

16

Slot

17

N1EU08

N1OU08 (LC type)

N2OU08 (SC type)

N1EU04

N1MU04

N1D34S

N1D75S

N1D12S

N1D12B

N1ETF8

N1EFF8

N1ETS8

N1TSB8



3-30

3. Other Boards Table 3-19 associates cross-connect boards, SCC boards, and auxiliary interface boards to the corresponding slots. Table 3-19 The relation between other boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 1500B

Slots

Boards Slot

4–s

lot 5

Slot

9

Slot

10

Slot

18,

slo

t 19

Slot

20

Slot

50

Slot

101

–slo

t 10

2


SCC, GSCC (logical board)

Slot 82, 83

CXL, ECXL (Logical board)

Slot 80, 81

Q1SL1/4/16/16AL (logical board)

R1EOW

R1AUX, R2AUX

R1PIU

R1FAN (Note 2)




3-31

Slots

Boards Slot

4–s

lot 5

Slot

9

Slot

10

Slot

18,

slo

t 19

Slot

20

Slot

50

Slot

101

–slo

t 10

2

CAU (Note 2)

Note 1: The CXL is a line, system control, cross-connect and timing board of the OptiX OSN 1500B. It seats in slot 4 and slot 5. On the T2000, it is displayed as three board types: CXL, SCC and SL1/4/16, respectively occupying the logic slots 80–81, 82–83 and 4–5. Note 2: The corresponding slots for the N1FAN, 61COA, and 62COA are logical slots, not physical slots.


Table 3-20 lists the technical parameters of the OptiX OSN 1500B. Table 3-20 Technical parameters of the OptiX OSN 1500B


Weight 9 kg (including backboard, 2 pieces PIU and fan)

OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual 4 Board Classification and List


4-1

4 Board Classification and List

This chapter introduces the classification and appearance of the boards of the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, and OptiX OSN 1500.

4.1 Board Classification

Most boards of the OptiX OSN products are interchangeable. The same boards can be used either in the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500 or in the OptiX OSN 1500 equipment. This section classifies the boards supported by the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, and OptiX OSN 1500 by function. Boards are classified into the following types.

SDH boards PDH boards Data processing boards Cross-Connect and SCC boards Other boards

4.1.1 SDH Boards

Table 4-1 lists the SDH boards supported by the OptiX OSN products.



4-2

Table 4-1 SDH boards

Product Board

Description 3500 (40 Gbit/s)

3500 (80 Gbit/s)

2500REG 2500 1500A 1500B

N2SL64 STM-64 processing board

√ √

N1SL16(A) STM-16 processing board

√ √ √ √ √ √

N2SL16(A) STM-16 processing board

√ √ √ √ √ √

N1SF16 STM-16 processing board with FEC

√ √ √ √ √ √

N1SLQ4 4 x STM-4 processing board

√ √ √ √ √


√ √ √ √ √

N1SLD4 2 x STM-4 processing board

√ √ √ √ √

N2SLD4 2 x STM-4 processing board

√ √ √ √ √

N1SL4 1 x STM-4 processing board

√ √ √ √ √


√ √ √ √ √

N1SLT1 12 x STM-1 processing board

√ √ √ √ √


√ √ √ √ √


√ √ √ √ √


√ √ √ √ √


√ √ √ √ √

R1SLD4 2 x STM-4 processing board (half-height slot)

√ √ √

R1SL4 1 x STM-4 processing board (half-height slot)

√ √ √



4-3

Product Board


3500 (80 Gbit/s)

2500REG 2500 1500A 1500B

R1SLQ1 4x STM-1 processing board (half-height slot)

√ √ √

R1SL1 1x STM-1 processing board (half-height slot)

√ √ √

N1SEP1 STM-1 processing board(led out from front panel)

√ √ √ √ √

N1SEP STM-1 processing board(work with interface boards)

√ √ √ √ √

N1EU08 8 x STM-1 interface board (e)

√ √ √

N1EU08A 8 x STM-1 interface board (e)

√ √ √

N1EU04 4 x STM-1 interface board (e)

√ √

N1OU08 8 x STM-1 interface board (o)

√ √ √

N2OU08 8 x STM-1 interface board (o)

√ √ √

N1TSB8 8-channel switching & bridging board

√ √ √ √

4.1.2 PDH Boards

Table 4-2 lists the PDH boards supported by the OptiX OSN products. Table 4-2 PDH boards

Product Board Description 3500

(40 Gbit/s) 3500 (80 Gbit/s) 2500REG 2500 1500A 1500B

N1PQ1 63 x E1 processing board √ √ √ √

R1PD1 A/B 32 x E1 processing board(75 Ω/120 Ω) √ √ √

R1PL1 A/B 16 x E1 processing board (75 Ω/120 Ω)

√ √



4-4

Product Board Description 3500

(40 Gbit/s) 3500 (80 Gbit/s) 2500REG 2500 1500A 1500B

R1L75S 16 x 75Ω E1/T1 switching interface board

√

R1L12S 16 x 120Ω E1/T1 switching interface board

√

N1PQM 63 x T1/E1 processing board √ √ √ √

N1PD3 6 x E3/DS3 processing board √ √ √ √

N1PL3 3 x E3/DS3 processing board √ √ √ √

N1PL3A 3 x E3/DS3 processing board √ √ √ √ √

N1SPQ4 4 x E4/STM-1 processing board √ √ √ √

N2SPQ4 4 x E4/STM-1 processing board √ √ √ √

N1D75S 32 x 75Ω E1/T1 switching interface board

√ √ √ √

N1D12S 32 x 120Ω E1/T1 switching interface board

√ √ √ √

N1D12B 32 x 120Ω E1/T1 interface board √ √ √ √

N1D34S 6 x E3/DS3 PDH interface board √ √ √ √

N1C34S 3 x E3/DS3 PDH interface board √ √ √ √

N1MU04 4 x E4/STM-1 interface board √ √ √ √

N1TSB8 8-channel switching & bridging board

√ √ √ √

4.1.3 Data Processing Boards

Table 4-3 lists the data processing boards supported by the OptiX OSN products, including ATM boards and Ethernet boards.



4-5

Table 4-3 Data processing boards

Product Board


3500 (80 Gbit/s) 2500REG 2500 1500A 1500B

N1EFS4 4-port FE processing board with L2 switching

√ √ √ √ √

N1EFS0 FE processing board with L2 switching

√ √ √ √

N2EFS0 FE processing board with L2 switching

√ √ √ √

N1EGS2

2-port Gigabit Ethernet switching processing board

√ √ √ √ √

N2EGS2

2-port Gigabit Ethernet switching processing board

√ √ √ √ √

N1EGT2

2-port Gigabit Ethernet transparent transmission board

√ √ √ √ √

N1EFT8

16-port Fast Ethernet transparent transmission board

√ √ √ √ √

R1EFT4

4-port Fast Ethernet transparent transmission board

√ √ √

N1EGS4

4 GE Ethernet transparent transmission and convergence board

√ √ √ √ √

N1EMR0

12 FE ＋ 1 GE Ethernet processing board with RPR function

√ √ √ √ √

N2EMR0 12 FE ＋ 1 GE Ethernet

√ √ √ √ √



4-6

Product Board


3500 (80 Gbit/s) 2500REG 2500 1500A 1500B

processing board with RPR function

N1EGR2

2-port GE processing board with RPR function

√ √ √ √ √

N2EGR2

2-port GE processing board with RPR function

√ √ √ √ √

N1EFF8 8-port 10/100M Ethernet optical interface board

√ √ √ √

N1ETF8

8-port 10/100M BaseT fast Ethernet interface board

√ √ √ √

N1ETS8

8-port 10/100M BaseT Ethernet interface switching board

√ √ √ √

N1ADL4 1 x STM-4 ATM service processing board

√ √ √ √ √

N1ADQ1 4 x STM-1ATM service processing board

√ √ √ √ √

N1IDL4

1 x STM-4 ATM service processing board with IMA (Note 1)

√ √ √ √ √

N1IDQ1

4 x STM-1 ATM service processing board with IMA (Note 1)

√ √ √ √ √

N1MST4

4 x multi-service transparent transmission processing board

√ √ √ √ √

Note 1: IMA is a kind of function named inverse multiplexing ATM.

4.1.4 Cross-Connect and SCC Boards



4-7

Table 4-4 lists the cross-connect and SCC boards supported by the OptiX OSN products. Table 4-4 Cross-Connect and SCC boards

Product Board


3500 (80 Gbit/s) 2500REG 2500 1500A 1500B

N1GXCSA

Cross-connect and timing board (40 Gbit/s higher order, 5 Gbit/s lower order)

√

N2GXCSA

Cross-connect and timing board (40 Gbit/s higher order, 5 Gbit/s lower order)

√

N1EXCSA

Enhanced cross-connect and timing board (80Gbit/s higher order, 5 Gbit/s lower order)

√

N1UXCSA

Super cross-connect and timing board (80 Gbit/s higher order, 20 Gbit/s lower order)

√

N1UXCSB

Super cross-connect and timing board (80 higher order, 20 Gbit/s lower order, supporting extended subrack)

√

N1XCE

Lower order cross-connect and timing board for extended subrack (1.25 Gbit/s)

√

Q1CXL1

STM-1 line, system control, cross-connect and timing board (20 Gbit/s higher order, 5 Gbit/s lower order)

√ √ √



4-8

Product Board


3500 (80 Gbit/s) 2500REG 2500 1500A 1500B

Q1CXL4


√ √ √

Q1CXL16


√ √ √

Q2CXL1


√ √ √

Q2CXL4


√ √ √

Q2CXL16


√ √ √

N1SCC

System control and communication board

√ √

N1GSCC

System control and communication board (supporting intelligent features)

√ √



4-9

Product Board


3500 (80 Gbit/s) 2500REG 2500 1500A 1500B

N2GSCC

System control and communication board (supporting intelligent features)

√ √

Q1CRG

System control, communication and timing board for OptiX OSN 2500 REG

√

4.1.5 Other Boards

Table 4-5 lists the other boards supported by the OptiX OSN products. Table 4-5 Other boards

Product Board

Description

3500 (40 Gbit/s)

3500 (80 Gbit/s)

2500REG 2500 1500A 1500B

N1MR2A 2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing board

√ √ √ √ √

N1MR2B 2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing board (half-height slot)

√ √ √

N1MR2C 2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing board (interface area)

√ √ √ √

N1LWX Arbitrary bit rate wavelength conversion board

√ √ √ √ √

N1BPA Booster amplifier and pre-amplifier board

√ √ √ √ √ √

N1BA2 Booster amplifier board

√ √ √ √ √ √

N1DCU Dispersion compensate board

√ √ √

N1PIU Power interface board

√ √



4-10

Product Board

Description

3500 (40 Gbit/s)

3500 (80 Gbit/s)

2500REG 2500 1500A 1500B

Q1PIU Power interface board

√ √

R1PIU Power interface board

√

R2PIU Power interface board

√

N1FAN Fan board √ √ √ √

R1FAN Fan board √ √

N1FANA Fan board (large power)

√ √

R1EOW Orderwire board √ √

Q1SEI Extended signal interface board

√ √

Q1SAP System auxiliary processing board

√ √

N1AUX System auxiliary interface board

√ √

R1AUX System auxiliary interface board

√ √

R2AUX System auxiliary interface board

√ √

61COA/62COA

External case-shape optical amplifier

√ √ √ √ √ √

TDA External tone & data access board

√ √ √ √ √ √

UPM External uninterruptible power modules

√ √ √ √

4.2 Board Appearance

Figure 4-1 shows the board appearance of the OptiX OSN products.



4-11

1

2

3

1. Optical interface 2. Ejector lever 3. Printed circuit board

Figure 4-1 Board appearance

Caution: Always wear an ESD wrist strap when holding the board, and make sure the ESD wrist strap is well grounded, thus to prevent the static from damaging the board.

Warning: It is strictly forbidden to stare into the optical interface board and the optical interface, lest the laser beam inside the optical fiber would hurt your eyes.

OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual 5 SDH Boards


5-1

5 SDH Boards

This chapter introduces the SDH boards of the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, and OptiX OSN 1500 in terms of:

Functionality Principle Front panel Parameter configuration Protection configuration Version description Technical parameters

The SDH boards supported by the OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 are listed in Table 4-1.

5.1 SL64

The SL64 is the 1 x STM-64 processing board. Table 5-1 lists the slots for the SL64 board. Table 5-1 Slots for the SL64

Product SL64

OptiX OSN 3500 (80 Gbit/s) Slots 7–8, 11–12

OptiX OSN 3500 (40 Gbit/s) Slots 8, 11

OptiX OSN 2500 Not available

OptiX OSN 2500 REG Slots 5–8, 11–13

OptiX OSN 1500A Not available

OptiX OSN 1500B Not available

5.1.1 Functionality



5-2

Functionality SL64

Basic function Receive/Transmit one STM-64 optical signal.

Optical interface specifications

Support the I-64.2, S-64.2b, L-64.2b, Le-64.2, Ls-64.2 and V-64.2b (used with BA, PA, and DCU) optical module, which complies with ITU-T Recommendation G.691. Support the ITU-T G.692-compliant fixed wavelength output, which can access DWDM equipment directly.

Optical module specifications

Support the detecting and query of the information on optical modules. Laser can be open and close at optical interfaces. Automatic laser shutdown function can be enabled or disabled at optical interfaces.

Service processing

Support VC-12/VC-3/VC-4 services and the concatenated services at levels from VC-4-4c to STM-64-4c.

Overhead processing

Support the processing of the section overheads of STM-64 signals. Support the processing of the path overheads (transparent transmission and termination).Support setting and querying J0/J1/C2 byte. Support tandem connection monitoring (TCM) function.

Alarms and performance events

Provide abundant alarms and performance events.

K byte processing

Be able to process multiple sets of K bytes. One SL64 board can support up to four multiplex section protection (MSP) rings.

REG specifications

Support setting and querying REG working mode.

Protection schemes

Support two-fiber and four-fiber MSP, linear MSP and subnetwork connection protection (SNCP). Support shared optical path protection of MSP ring and SNCP ring, or that of two MSP rings.

Maintenance Support inloop and outloop at optical interfaces. Support inloop and outloop at VC-4 level, locating fault fast. Support warm and cold reset. Warm reset brings no impact to services. Support the query of board information. Support the in-service uploading of FPGA. Support smooth upgrade of board software.

5.1.2 Principle

Figure 5-1 shows the principle block diagram of the SL64.



5-3

O/Econversion

Backplane

+3.3 V

E/Oconversion

MUX/DEMUX

SDHoverhead

processingmodule

STM-64

STM-64

Logic controlmodule

Powermodule

+5 V

+3.3 V (standby) +3.3 V

SCC unit

O/E conversion module

Cross-connectunit

Cross-connectunit

Figure 5-1 The principle block diagram of the SL64

1. In Receive Direction The O/E conversion module includes E/O (O/E) conversion and MUX/DEMUX part. The O/E conversion converts the received 10.71 Gbit/s optical signals into electrical signals. The DEMUX part demultiplexes the high rate electrical signals into multiple parallel low rate electrical signals, and clock signal is recovered at the same time. This module also responsible for detecting R_LOS alarms. The multiple low rate electrical signals demultiplexed are transferred to the SDH overhead processing module. The SDH overhead processing module extracts or inserts overhead byte from/to the received multiple low rate electrical signals, performs pointer processing, and then sends the signals to the cross-connect unit through backplane bus. R_LOF and R_OOF alarms are detected in this module.

2. In Transmit Direction After being inserted with overhead bytes in the SDH overhead processing module, the parallel low rate electrical signals from the cross-connect unit are then sent to the O/E conversion module. The O/E conversion module multiplexes the received parallel low rate electrical signals into high rate electrical signals through the MUX part, converts the signals into OTN optical signals at 10.71 Gbit/s. Signals are then sent to fibers for transmission.

3. Auxiliary Units Logic control module

This unit: − Generates timing clock and frame header information required by the SL64. − implements ALS function. − realizes the pass-through of orderwire and ECC bytes between the two optical processing boards constituting the ADM when the SCC is not online. − control the switching from active cross-connect board to standby one when the



5-4

active one is faulty. Power module

Provide the board with required DC voltages. 5.1.3 Front Panel

Figure 5-2 shows the front panels of the SL64.

STATACTPROGSRV

SL64

SL64

OUT

IN

CLASS 1LASER

PRODUCT

Figure 5-2 The front panel of the SL64

1. Indicators There are four indicators on the SL64 board.

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) – double colors (red, green) Service active status indicator (ACT) – green Board software status indicator (PROG) – double colors (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) – three colors (red, green, yellow)

For detailed description of the indicators, see Appendix A.

2. Interfaces Quantity: single optical interface (one pair) Type: LC connector Security: The optical interfaces incline down.



5-5

5.1.4 Parameter Configuration

The major parameters required by the SL64 are as follows. J1

J1 is the path trace byte. Successive transmission of the higher order access point identifier through J1 at the transmit end helps the receive end learn that its connection with the specified transmit end is in continuous connection status. When J1 mismatch is detected at the receive end, the corresponding VC-4 path will generate the HP_TIM alarm. Value of the J1 is “Huawei SBS” by default.

C2 C2 is the signal label byte, indicating the multiplexing structure of VC-4 frame and the payload property. It is required that the C2 bytes transmitted match those received. Once mismatch is detected, the corresponding VC-4 path will generate the HP_SLM alarm and insert all “1”s into the C4 in downstream stations. Table 5-2 associates the C2 setting to the service type. Table 5-2 Relationship between C2 setting and service type for the SL64

Service type Parameter setting of C2

E1 or T1 TUG structure

E3 or DS3 34/45 Mbit/s into C-3

E4 140 Mbit/s into C-4

No service Unequipped

5.1.5 Version Description

The versions of the SL64 is N2. The SL64 N2 supports tandem connection monitoring (TCM) function.


Table 5-3 list the technical parameters of the SL64. Table 5-4 lists the supported optical interface parameters with fixed wavelength output, complying with ITU-T Recommendation G.692. Table 5-3 Technical parameters of the SL64

Parameter Description

Bit rate 9.95 Gbit/s

Processing capability 1 x STM-64 standard service or concatenated service

Line code pattern Non return to zero (NRZ)

Dimensions (mm)

262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W)

H

WD

Weight (kg) 1.12



5-6


Power consumption (W) 30

Type of optical interfaces I-64.2 S-64.2b

L-64.2b

Le-64.2

Ls-64.2

V-64.2b (BA+PA+DCU) (Note)

Wavelength (nm) 1550 1550 1550 1550 1550 1550.12

Transmission distance (km) 0 to 20

2 to 40 30 to 70

30 to 70

80 70 to 120

Launched power (dBm) –5 to –1

–1 to 2 10 to 14

1 to 4 3 to 5 12 to 15

Receiver sensitivity (dBm) –14 –14 –14 –19.5 –21 –23

Receiver overload (dBm) –1 –1 –3 –9 –9 –7

Minimum extinction ratio (dB)

8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2

Maximum dispersion tolerance (ps/nm)

500 800 1600 1200 1600 800

Long-term operating condition

Temperature: 0°C to 45°C Humidity: 10% to 90%

Short-term operating condition

Temperature: –5°C to 50°C Humidity: 5% to 95%

Environment for storage Temperature: –40°C to 70°C Humidity: 10% to 100%

Environment for transportation


Note: The bracketed part indicates that V-64.2b optical interface specification consists of booster amplifier (BA), preamplifier (PA) , and the dispersion compensation unit (DCU).

Table 5-4 Parameters of the fixed wavelength interfaces complying with ITU-T G.692


Classification code 1 x 29 dB

Dispersion limit (km) 40

Mean launched power (dBm) –4 to –1

Minimum sensitivity (dBm) –17

Min. overload point (dBm) –1

Maximum path allowable dispersion (ps/nm) 800

Minimum extinction ratio (dB) 8.2



5-7

5.2 SF16/SL16

The SL16 is an STM-16 processing board. The SF16 is an STM-16 processing board with FEC function. The two boards are responsible for STM-16 optical signal processing. Table 5-5 lists the slots for the SL16 andSF16. Table 5-5 Slots for the SL16 and SF16

Product SL16 SF16

OptiX OSN 3500 (80 Gbit/s) Slots 5–8, 11–14 Slots 5–8, 11–14


OptiX OSN 2500 Slots 7–8, 11–12 Slots 7–8, 11–12

OptiX OSN 2500 REG Slots 5–8, 11–13 Slots 5–8, 11–13

OptiX OSN 1500A Slots 12–13 Slots 12–13

OptiX OSN 1500B Slots 11–13 Slots 11–13

5.2.1 Functionality

Functionality SL16 SF16

Basic function Receive/Transmit one STM-16 optical signal Receive/Transmit one OTU1 (2.66 Gbit/s, FEC) optical signal. Support enabling or disabling FEC function.


Support the I-16, S-16.1, L-16.1, L-16.2, L-16.2Je, V-16.2Je (used with BA), and U-16.2Je (used with BA and PA) optical interface, which complies with ITU-T Recommendation G.691. Support the ITU-T G.692-compliant fixed wavelength output, which can access DWDM equipment directly.

Support the Ue-16.2c, Ue-16.2d, and Ue-16.2e optical interface. Support long distance transmission, up to 200 km. Support the ITU-T G.692-compliant fixed wavelength output, which can access DWDM equipment directly.


Support detecting and query of the information on optical modules. Laser can be open and close at optical interfaces. Automatic laser shutdown function can be enabled or disabled at optical interfaces.

Support detecting and query of the information on optical modules. Laser can be open and close at optical interfaces. Automatic laser shutdown function can be enabled or disabled at optical interfaces.

Service processing

Support VC-12/VC-3/VC-4 services and the concatenated services at levels from VC-4-4C to STM-16-4C.

Support VC-12/VC-3/VC-4 services and the concatenated services at levels from VC-4-4C to STM-16-4C. The SF16 process overheads and the encapsulation code of FEC in a way complying with ITU-T Recommendation G.709.



5-8

Functionality SL16 SF16

Overhead processing

Support the processing of the section overheads of STM-16 signals. Support the processing of the path overheads (transparent transmission and termination). Support setting and querying J0/J1/C2 byte.

Support the overhead processing, performance monitoring, and alarm detecting of the OTU, ODU, and OPU, complying with ITU-T Recommendation G.709. Support the processing of the section overheads of STM-16 signals. Support the processing of the path overheads (transparent transmission and termination). Support setting and querying J0/J1/C2 byte.


Provide abundant alarms and performance events. The SF16 provides the alarms and performance events related to OUT, ODU, OPU, and FEC.

K byte processing

Be able to process multiple sets of K byte. One SL16/SF16 board can support up to two MSP rings.

REG specifications

Support setting and querying REG working mode.

Protection schemes

Support two-fiber and four-fiber multiplex section protection (MSP), linear MSP and subnetwork connection protection (SNCP). Support shared optical path protection of MSP ring and SNCP ring, or that of two MSP rings.

Maintenance Support inloop and outloop at optical interfaces. Support inloop and outloop at VC-4 level, locating fault fast. Support warm and cold reset. Warm reset brings no impact to services. Support the query of board information. Support the in-service uploading of FPGA. Support smooth upgrade of board software.

5.2.2 Principle

Figure 5-3 shows the principle block diagram of the SF16. The block diagram of the SL16 is the same as that of the SF16 after removing the part surrounded by broken line.



5-9

O/Econv ersion

Backplane

+3.3 V

E/Oconv ersion

MUX/DEMUX

Digital packetencapsulation

and FECprocessing

module

SDHov erhead

processingmodule

STM-16

STM-16

Logic controlmodule

Powermodule

+5 V

+3.3 V (standby ) +3.3 V

SCC unit

O/E conv ersion module

Cross-connectunit

Cross-connectunit

Figure 5-3 The principle block diagram of the SF16

1. In Receive Direction The O/E conversion module includes E/O (O/E) conversion and MUX/DEMUX part. The O/E conversion converts the received 2.66 Gbit/s FEC optical signals into electrical signals. The DEMUX part demultiplexes the high rate electrical signals into multiple parallel low rate electrical signals, and clock signal is recovered at the same time. This module also responsible for detecting R_LOS alarms. The multiple low rate electrical signals demultiplexed are transferred to the digital packet encapsulation and FEC processing module to have FEC packets encapsulated/decapsulated and OTN overheads processed. There are connections with clock and data signals between the digital packet encapsulation and FEC processing module, the O/E conversion module, and the SDH overhead processing module. Alarms related to FEC overhead processing are detected in this module. The SDH overhead processing module extracts or inserts overhead byte from/to the received multiple low rate electrical signals, performs pointer processing, and then sends the signals to the cross-connect unit through backplane bus. R_LOF and R_OOF alarms are detected in this module.

2. In Transmit Direction After being inserted with overhead bytes in the SDH overhead processing module, the parallel low rate electrical signals from the cross-connect unit are then sent to the digital packet encapsulation and FEC processing module. The digital packet encapsulation and FEC processing module performs FEC coding and OTN overhead inserting to the multiple low rate signals, and then sends it to the O/E conversion module. The O/E conversion module multiplexes the received parallel low rate electrical signals into high rate electrical signals through the MUX part, converts the signals into OTN optical signals with FEC at 2.66 Gbit/s. Signals are then sent to fibers for transmission.



5-10


This unit: − generates timing clock and frame header information required by the SF16/SL16. − implements ALS function. − realizes the pass-through of orderwire and ECC bytes between the two optical processing boards constituting the ADM. − control the switching from active cross-connect board to standby one when the active one is faulty.

Power module Provide the board with required DC voltages.

5.2.3 Front Panel

Figure 5-4 shows the front panels of the SL16 and the SF16.

STATACTPROGSRV

SL16

SL16

OUT

IN

CLASS 1LASER

PRODUCT

STATACTPROGSRV

SF16

SF16

OUT

IN

CLASS 1LASER

PRODUCT

Figure 5-4 The front panel of the SL16 and the SF16

1. Indicators There are four indicators on the SL16/SF16.



5-11



2. Interfaces Quantity: single optical interface (one pair) Type: LC connector Security: The optical interfaces incline down. The optical interfaces of the SF16 are not swappable. The SL16 can use swappable optical modules for easy maintenance.


The major parameters required by the SL16/SF16 are as follows. J1


C2 C2 is the signal label byte, indicating the multiplexing structure of VC-4 frame and the payload property. It is required that the C2 bytes transmitted match those received. Once mismatch is detected, the corresponding VC-4 path will generate the HP_SLM alarm and insert all “1”s into the C4. Table 5-6 associates the C2 setting to the service type. Table 5-6 Relationship between C2 setting and service type for the SF16/SL16







The version of the SF16 is N1, which is the only version existed. The board can be used in the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, OptiX OSN 2500 REG, and OptiX OSN 1500. The board can be set to be under ADM mode or REG mode. The versions of the SL16 are N1 and N2. The two versions realize board functions in the same way. The N2SL16 supports tandem connection monitoring (TCM) function, which is not available in version N1. The two versions can be replaced with each other directly. The direct replacement command must be delivered in NM after hardware



5-12

replacing is fulfilled.

Note: If the TCM function is enabled on version N2, the command of replacing the version N2 with version N1 will fail.

The board named SL16A is not hot swappable for optical module, because the optical interfaces are equipped with fixed optical modules.


Table 5-7 and Table 5-8 list the technical parameters of the SL16 and the SF16 respectively. Table 5-9 lists the supported optical interface parameters with fixed wavelength output, complying with ITU-T Recommendation G.692. Table 5-7 Technical parameters of the SL16



Processing capability

1 x STM-16 standard service or concatenated service


Dimensions (mm)

262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W)

H

WD

Weight (kg) 1.10

Power consumption (W)

20

Type of optical modules

I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2 L-16.2Je

V-16.2Je (BA)

U-16.2Je(BA+PA)

Wavelength (nm) 1310 1310 1310 1550 1550 1550 1550.12

Transmission distance (km)

0–2 2–15 15–40 40–80 80–100

80–140

140–170

Launched power (dBm)

–10 to –3

–5 to 0 –2 to 3 –2 to 3 5 to 7 14 14

Receiver sensitivity (dBm)

–18 –18 –27 –28 –28 –28 –33

Receiver overload (dBm)

–3 0 –9 –9 –9 –9 –10

Minimum extinction ratio (dB)

8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2



5-13






Environment for storage




Table 5-8 Technical parameters of the SF16



Processing capability 1 x STM-16 standard service or concatenated service


Dimensions (mm)

262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W)

H

WD

Weight (kg) 1.09


Ue-16.2c Ue-16.2d Ue-16.2e Specification of optical interfaces (Note 1)

FEC+BA(14)+PA

FEC+BA(17)+PA FEC+BA(17)+RA+PA

Wavelength (nm) G.692-compliant wavelength with 100 GHz interval

G.692-compliant wavelength with 100 GHz interval

G.692-compliant wavelength with 100 GHz interval

Transmission distance (km) 178 189 200

Launched power (dBm) (Note 2)

–2 to +3 –2 to +3 –2 to +3

Receiver sensitivity (dBm) (Note 2)

–31 (APD) –31 (APD) –31 (APD)

Receiver overload (dBm) (Note 2)

–9 (APD) –9 (APD) –9 (APD)

Minimum extinction ratio (dB) (Note 2)

10 10 10





5-14




Environment for storage Temperature: –40°C to 70°C Humidity: 10% to 100%



Note 1: The bracketed numbers indicate corresponding parameters. For example, “BA(14)” indicates the optical power is 14 dBm after signals are amplified by BA. “FEC+BA+PA” indicates that the specifications of optical interfaces consist of FEC, BA, and PA. Note 2: Parameters listed in the above table are of the optical module only, but not of amplifiers.

Table 5-9 Parameters of the fixed wavelength interfaces complying with G.692

Bit rate 2488320 kbit/s Classification code 8 x 22 dB 5 x 30 dB 3 x 33 dB

Dispersion limit (km) 170 170 640

Mean launched power (dBm) –2 to 3 5 to 7 –5 to –1

Minimum sensitivity (dBm) –28 –28 –28

Min. overload point (dBm) –9 –9 –9

Maximum path allowable dispersion (ps/nm) 3500 3500 12800

Minimum extinction ratio (dB) 8.2 8.2 8.2



5-15

5.3 SL4/SLD4/SLQ4

The SL4 is the 1 x STM-4 processing board. The SLD4 is the 2 x STM-4 processing board. The SLQ4 is the 4 x STM-4 processing board. The three boards are responsible for:

the receiving/transmitting of STM-4 optical signals the O/E conversion of STM-4 optical signals the extracting/inserting of overhead byte the detecting of alarms in the line

Table 5-10 lists the slots for the SL4, SLD4, and SLQ4. Table 5-10 Slots for the SLQ4, SLD4 and SL4

Product SL4 SLD4 SLQ4

OptiX OSN 3500 (80 Gbit/s)

Slots 1–8, 11–17 Slots 1–8, 11–17 Slots 5–8, 11–14



OptiX OSN 2500 Slots 5–8, 11–13 Slots 7–8, 11–13 Slots 7–8, 11–12

OptiX OSN 2500 REG Not available Not available Not available

OptiX OSN 1500A Slots 12–13 Slots 12–13 Slots 12–13

OptiX OSN 1500B Slots 11–13 Slots 11–13 Slots 11–13

5.3.1 Functionality

Functionality SL4 SLD4 SLQ4

Basic function Receive/Transmit one STM-4 optical signal.

Receive/Transmit two STM-4 optical signals.

Receive/Transmit four STM-4 optical signals.


Support the I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, and Ve-4.2 optical interface, which comply with ITU-T Recommendation G.957.


Support the detecting and query of the information on optical modules. Laser can be open and close at optical interfaces. Automatic laser shutdown function can be enabled or disabled at optical interfaces. Support the use and monitoring of SFP swappable optical module.

Service processing Support VC-12/VC-3/VC-4 services and the VC-4-4C concatenated services.



5-16

Functionality SL4 SLD4 SLQ4

Overhead processing

Support the processing of the section overheads of STM-4 signals.Support the processing of the path overheads (transparent transmission and termination). Support setting and querying J0/J1/C2 byte.


Provide abundant alarms and performance events, which simplify maintenance and administration.

Protection schemes

Support two-fiber and four-fiber multiplex section protection (MSP), linear MSP and subnetwork connection protection (SNCP). Support MSP or SNCP shared optical path protection.

Maintenance Support inloop and outloop at optical interfaces. Support inloop and outloop at VC-4 level, locating fault fast. Support warm and cold reset. Warm reset brings no impact to services. Support the query of board information. Support the in-service uploading of FPGA. Support smooth board software upgrade.

5.3.2 Principle

Figure 5-5 shows the principle block diagram of the SL4/SLD4/SLQ4 (1 x STM-4 optical signal is processed).

Framesynchronous

and scramblermodule

Overheadprocessing

module

Logiccontrolmodule

STM-4

STM-4

Cross-connect unit

Backplane

+3.3 V ( Standby )

+3.3 V

Powermodule+2.7 V

+5 V

SCC

O/Econversion

module

-48 V

+3.3 V

E/Oconversion

moduleCross-connect unit

Figure 5-5 The principle block diagram of the SL4/SLD4/SLQ4



5-17

1. In Receive Direction The O/E conversion module converts the received STM-4 optical signal into STM-4 electrical signal while extracting clock signal simultaneously, then sends the clock signal and STM-4 electrical signal to the frame synchronous and scrambler module, where the R_LOS alarm is checked. The frame synchronous and scrambler module descrambles the received STM-4 electrical signal, converts it into parallel signal, and sends it to the overhead processing module, where the R_LOF and R_OOF alarm signals are checked. The overhead processing module extracts overhead bytes from the received STM-4 signal, and then sent to the cross-connect unit through the backplane bus.

2. In Transmit Direction Signals from the cross-connect unit are inserted with overhead bytes in the overhead processing unit, and then sent to the frame synchronous and scrambler module. The frame synchronous and scrambler module implements parallel/serial conversion for the received STM-4 electrical signal, and then sends it to the E/O conversion module after descrambling. The E/O conversion module converts the received STM-4 electrical signal into STM-4 optical signal, and then sends it to the fiber for transmission.


This unit: − generates timing clock and frame header information required by the SL4/SLD4/SLQ4. − implements ALS function. − realizes the pass-through of orderwire and ECC bytes between the two optical processing boards constituting the ADM. − control the switching from active cross-connect board to standby one when the active one is faulty.


5.3.3 Front Panel

Figure 5-6 shows the front panels of the SL4, SLQ4, and SLD4.



5-18

STATACTPROGSRV

SL4

SL4

OUT

IN

CLASS1LASER

PRODUCT

STATACT

PROGSRV

SLD4

SLD4

OU

T1IN

1O

UT2

IN2

CLASS1LASER

PRODUCT

STATACTPROGSRV

SLQ4

SLQ4

OU

T1IN

1O

UT2

IN2

OU

T3IN

3O

UT4

IN4

CLASS1LASER

PRODUCT

SL4 SLD4 SLQ4

Figure 5-6 The front panel of the SL4, SLQ4, and SLD4

1. Indicators There are four indicators on the SL4, SLQ4, and SLD4.



2. Interfaces Quantity: one pair of optical interface for the SL4, two pairs for the SLD4, and four pairs for the SLQ4 Type: LC connector Security: The optical interfaces incline down. The SL4, SLQ4, and SLD4 support swappable optical modules, which simplifies maintenance.


The major parameters required by the SL4, SLQ4, and SLD4 are as follows. J1



5-19


C2 C2 is the signal label byte, indicating the multiplexing structure of VC-4 frame and the payload property. It is required that the C2 bytes transmitted match those received. Once mismatch is detected, the corresponding VC-4 path will generate the HP_SLM alarm and insert all “1”s into the C4. Set C2 according to the actual service type. Table 5-11 associates the C2 setting to the service type. Table 5-11 Relationship between C2 setting and service type for the SL4/SLD4/SLQ4







The versions of the SL4, SLQ4, and SLD4 are N1 and N2. The boards can be used in the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, and OptiX OSN 1500 (A and B). The two versions realize board functions in the same way. N2SLQ4 supports tandem connection monitoring (TCM) function, which is not available in version N1. The two versions can be replaced with each other directly. The direct replacement command must be delivered in NM after hardware replacing is fulfilled.



Table 5-12 lists the technical parameters of the SL4, SLD4 and SLQ4. Table 5-12 Technical parameters of the SL4, SLD4 and SLQ4

Description Parameter SL4 SLD4 SLQ4

Bit rate 622080 kbit/s



5-20

Description Parameter SL4 SLD4 SLQ4

Processing capability 1 x STM-4 standard or concatenated service

2 x STM-4 standard or concatenated service

4 x STM-4 standard or concatenated service


Connector LC

Dimensions (mm)

262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W)

H

WD

Weight (kg) 1.00 1.01 1.04


15 15 16

Optical module type I-4 S-4.1 L-4.1 L-4.2 Ve-4.2

Wavelength (nm) 1310 1310 1310 1550 1550


0–2 2–15 15–40 40–80 80–100


–15 to –8 –15 to –8 –3 to 2 –3 to 2 –3 to 2


–23 –28 –28 –28 –33


–8 –8 –8 –8 –8

Minimum extinction ration (dB) 8.2 8.2 10 10 10











5-21

5.4 SL1/SLQ1/SLT1

The SLT1 is a 12 x STM-1 optical processing board. The SLQ1 is a 4 x STM-1 optical processing board. The SL1 is a 1 x STM-1 optical processing board. The three boards are responsible for:

the receiving/transmitting of STM-1 optical signals the O/E conversion of STM-1 optical signals the extracting/inserting of overhead byte the detecting of alarms in the line

Table 5-13 shows the slots for the SLT1, SLQ1, and SL1. Table 5-13 Slots for the SLT1, SLQ1, and SL1

Product SLT1 SLQ1 SL1






OptiX OSN 2500 REG

Not available Not available Not available

OptiX OSN 1500A Slots 12–13 Slots 12–13 Slots 12–13


Note: To the OptiX OSN 3500 with 40 Gbit/s cross-connect capacity, the first to fourth optical interfaces are available when the SLT1 seats in any of slots 1–5 or 14–16, and the first to twelfth optical interfaces are available when the SLT1 seats in any of slots 6–8 or 11–13. To the OptiX OSN 3500 with 80 Gbit/s cross-connect capacity, the first to eighth optical interfaces are available when the SLT1 seats in any of slots 1–5 or 14–16, and the first to twelfth optical interfaces are available when the SLT1 seats in any of slots 6–8 or 11–13. To the OptiX OSN 2500, the first to fourth optical interfaces are available when the SLT1 seats in slot 5 or 6, the first to twelfth optical interfaces are available when the SLT1 seats in any of slots 7–8 or 11–12, and the first to eight optical interfaces are available when the SLT1 seats in 13th slot.



5-22

5.4.1 Functionality

Functionality SLT1 SLQ1 SL1

Basic function

Receive/Transmit twelve STM-1 optical signals.

Receive/Transmit four STM-1 optical signals.

Receive/Transmit one STM-1 optical signal.




Support the detecting and query of the information on optical modules.Laser can be open and close at optical interfaces. Automatic laser shutdown function can be enabled or disabled at optical interfaces. Support the use and monitoring of SFP swappable optical module.

Service processing Support VC-12/VC-3/VC-4 services.

Overhead processing




Protection schemes

Support two-fiber unidirectional multiplex section protection (MSP), linear MSP and subnetwork connection protection (SNCP).

Maintenance

Support inloop and outloop at optical interfaces. Support inloop and outloop at VC-4 level, locating fault fast. Support warm and cold reset. Warm reset brings no impact to services.Support the query of board information. Support the in-service uploading of FPGA. Support smooth board software upgrade.

5.4.2 Principle

Figure 5-7 shows the principle block diagram of the SLT1/SLQ1/SL1 (1 x STM-1 signal is processed).



5-23

Framesynchronous

and scramblermodule

Overheadprocessing

module

Logiccontrolmodule

STM-1

STM-1

Cross-connect unit

Backplane

+3.3 V ( Standby )

+3.3 V

Powermodule+2.7 V

+5 V

SCC

O/Econversion

module

-48 V

+3.3 V

E/Oconversion

moduleCross-connect unit

Figure 5-7 The principle block diagram of the SLT1/SLQ1/SL1

1. In Receive Direction The O/E conversion module converts the received STM-1 optical signal into STM-1 electrical signal while extracting clock signal simultaneously, then sends the clock signal and STM-1 electrical signal to the frame synchronous and scrambler module, where the R_LOS alarm is checked. The frame synchronous and scrambler module descrambles the received STM-1 electrical signal, converts it into parallel signal, and sends it to the overhead processing module, where the R_LOF and R_OOF alarm signals are checked. The overhead processing module extracts overhead bytes from the received STM-1 signal, and demultiplexes it into one channel of VC-4 signal. The VC-4 signal is then sent to the cross-connect unit through the backplane.

2. In Transmit Direction The one channel of VC-4 signal from the cross-connect unit are multiplexed into an STM-1 signal and inserted with overhead bytes in the overhead processing unit, and then are sent to the frame synchronous and scrambler module. The frame synchronous and scrambler module implements parallel/serial conversion for the received STM-1 electrical signal, and then sends it to the E/O conversion module after descrambling. The E/O conversion module converts the received STM-1 electrical signal into STM-1 optical signal, and then sends it to the fiber for transmission.


This unit:



5-24

− generates timing clock and frame header information required by the SLT1/SLQ1/SL1. − implements ALS function. − realizes the pass-through of orderwire and ECC bytes between the two optical processing boards constituting the ADM. − control the switching from active cross-connect board to standby one when the active one is faulty.


5.4.3 Front Panel

Figure 5-8 shows the front panels of the SLT1, SLQ1, and SL1.

STATACT

PROGSRV

SLT1

SLT1

OUT2IN2

OUT1IN1

OUT3IN3

OUT4IN4

OUT5IN5

OUT6

IN6

OUT7IN7

OUT8IN8

OUT9IN9

OUT10IN10

OUT11IN11

OUT12IN12

CLASS1LASER

PRODUCT

STATACT

PROGSRV

SLQ1

SLQ1

OU

T1IN

1O

UT2

IN2

OU

T3IN

3O

UT4

IN4

CLASS1LASER

PRODUCT

S TATAC TP R O GS R V

S L 1

S L 1

O U T

IN

CLASS1LASER

PRODUCT

SLT1 SLQ1 SL1

Figure 5-8 The front panel of the SLT1/SLQ1/SL1

1. Indicators There are four indicators on the SLT1, SLQ1, and SL1.




5-25


2. Interfaces Quantity: one pair of optical interface for the SL1, four pairs for the SLQ1, and twelve pairs for the SLT1 Type: LC connector Security: The optical interfaces of the SLQ1 and the SL1 incline down. The optical interfaces of the SLT1 are vertical to the front panel, indenting by 20 mm. The SL1, SLQ1, and SLT1 support swappable optical modules, which simplifies maintenance.


The major parameters required by the SLT1, SLQ1, and SL1 are as follows. J1


C2 C2 is the signal label byte, indicating the multiplexing structure of VC-4 frame and the payload property. It is required that the C2 bytes transmitted match those received. Once mismatch is detected, the corresponding VC-4 path will generate the HP_SLM alarm and insert all “1”s into the C4. Table 5-14 associates the C2 setting to the service type. Table 5-14 Relationship between C2 setting and service type for the SLT1/SLQ1/SL1







The versions of the SLQ1 and SL1 are N1 and N2, which can be used in the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, and OptiX OSN 1500 (A and B). The two versions realize board functions in the same way. N2SLQ1 supports tandem connection monitoring (TCM) function, which is not available in version N1. The two versions can be replaced with each other directly. The direct replacement command must be delivered in NM after hardware replacing is fulfilled. The version of the SLT1 is N1, which is the only version existed. The board can be used in the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, and OptiX OSN 1500 (A and B).



5-26



Table 5-15 lists the technical parameters of the SLT1, SLQ1, and SL1. Table 5-15 Technical parameters of the SLT1, SLQ1, and SL1

Description Parameter SLT1 SLQ1 SL1

Bit rate 155.52 Mbit/s


12 x STM-1 4 x STM-1 1 x STM-1


Dimensions (mm)

262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W)

H

WD

Weight (kg) 1.22 1.04 1.00


15 15 14

Optical interface type

I-1 S-1.1 L-1.1 L-1.2 Ve-1.2

Wavelength (nm) 1310 1310 1310 1550 1550


0 to 2 2 to 15 15 to 40 40 to 80 80 to 100


–15 to –8 –15 to –8 –5 to 0 –5 to 0 –3 to 2


–23 –28 –34 –34 –34


–8 –8 –10 –10 –10

Minimum extinction ration (dB)

8.2 8.2 10 10 10







5-27

Description Parameter SLT1 SLQ1 SL1





5.5 R1SLD4/R1SL4/R1SL1/R1SLQ1

The R1SLD4 is a 2 x STM-4 half-slot optical processing board, used when slots are segmented. The R1SL4 is a 1 x STM-4 half-slot optical processing board, used when slots are segmented. The R1SLQ1 is a 4 x STM-1 half-slot optical processing board, used when slots are segmented. The R1SL1 is a 1 x STM-1 half-slot optical processing board, used when slots are segmented. The R1SLD4 and the R1SL4 are responsible for:

The receiving or transmitting of STM-4 optical signals The O/E conversion of STM-4 optical signals The extracting or inserting of overhead byte The detecting of alarms in the line

The R1SLQ1 and the R1SL1 are responsible for: The receiving or transmitting of STM-1 optical signals The O/E conversion of STM-1 optical signals The extracting/inserting of overhead byte The detecting of alarms in the line

Table 5-16 lists the slots for the R1SLD4/R1SL4/R1SLQ1/R1SL1 in OSN products. Table 5-16 Slots for the R1SLD4/R1SL4/R1SLQ1/R1SL1

Product R1SLQ1 R1SL1 R1SLD4 R1SL4


Not available Not available Not available Not available



OptiX OSN 2500 Slots 5–7, 19–21

Slots 5–7, 19–21

Slots 7, 21 Slots 5–7, 19–21

OptiX OSN 2500 REG


OptiX OSN 1500A Slots 6–9, 12–13

Slots 6–9, 12–13

Slots 6–9, 12–13

Slots 6–9, 12–13



5-28

Product R1SLQ1 R1SL1 R1SLD4 R1SL4

OptiX OSN 1500B Slots 1–3, 6–9, 11–13

Slots 1–3, 6–9, 11–13

Slots 1–3, 11–13

Slots 1–3, 6–9, 11–13

5.5.1 Functionality

Functionality R1SL4 R1SLD4 R1SLQ1 R1SL1

Basic function Receive/Transmit 1 x STM-4 optical signal.

Receive/Transmit 2 x STM-4 optical signals.

Receive/Transmit 4 x STM-1 optical signals.

Receive/Transmit 1 x STM-1 optical signal.




Service processing

Support VC-12/VC-3/VC-4 services and VC-4-4C concatenated services.

Support VC-12/VC-3/VC-4 services.

Overhead processing



Protection schemes

Support two-fiber and four-fiber multiplex section protection (MSP), linear MSP and SNCP. Support MSP or SNCP shared optical path protection.

Support linear MSP and SNCP.





Maintenance Support inloop and outloop at optical interfaces. Support inloop and outloop at VC-4 level, locating fault fast. Support warm and cold reset. Warm reset brings no impact to services. Support the query of board information. Support the in-service uploading of FPGA. Support smooth board software upgrade.



5-29

5.5.2 Principle

The principle of the R1SLD4/R1SL4 is the same as that of the SL4. Refer to Figure 5-5 for details. The principle of the R1SLQ1/R1SL1 is the same as that of the SL1. Refer to Figure 5-7 for details.

5.5.3 Front Panel

Figure 5-9 shows the front panels of the R1SLD4 and R1SL4. Figure 5-10 shows the front panels of the R1SLQ1 and R1SL1.

R1SL4 R1SLD4

Figure 5-9 The front panel of the R1SL4 and R1SLD4

R1SLQ1 R1SL1

Figure 5-10 The front panel of the R1SL1 and R1SLQ1



5-30

The R1SL4, R1SLD4, R1SLQ1, and R1SL1 are half-slot optical processing boards whose height is half of the SL4’s. They are used when the slots of the OptiX OSN 2500 and OptiX OSN 1500 are segmented.

1. Indicators There are four indicators on the R1SL4, R1SLD4, R1SLQ1, and R1SL1.



2. Interfaces Quantity: one pair of optical interface for the R1SL4, two pairs for the R1SLD4, four pairs for the R1SLQ1, and one pair for the R1SL1 Type: LC connector Security: The optical interfaces are vertical to the front panel, indenting by 20 mm. The R1SL4, R1SLD4, R1SLQ1, and R1SL1 support swappable optical modules, which simplifies maintenance.


The major parameters required by the half-slot optical processing boards are as follows.

J1 J1 is the path trace byte. Successive transmission of the higher order access point identifier through J1 at the transmit end helps the receive end learn that its connection with the specified transmit end is in continuous connection status. When J1 mismatch is detected at the receive end, the corresponding VC-4 path will generate the HP_TIM alarm. Value of the J1 is “Huawei SBS” by default.

C2 C2 is the signal label byte, indicating the multiplexing structure of VC-4 frame and the payload property. It is required that the C2 bytes transmitted match those received. Once mismatch is detected, the corresponding VC-4 path will generate the HP_SLM alarm and insert all “1”s into the C4. Set C2 according to the actual service type. Table 5-17 associates the C2 setting to the service type. Table 5-17 Relationship between C2 setting and service type for half-slot optical processing boards








5-31


The version of the R1SL4, R1SLD4, R1SLQ1, and R1SL1 is N1, which is the only version existed. The boards can be used in the OptiX OSN 2500, OptiX OSN 1500A, and OptiX OSN 1500B after slot segmentation.


The optical interface parameters of the R1SL4, R1SLD4, R1SLQ1, and R1SL are the same as that of the SL4 and SL1. Refer to Table 5-12 and Table 5-15 for details. Table 5-18 lists other technical parameters. Table 5-18 Technical parameters of the R1SL4, R1SLD4, R1SLQ1, and R1SL1

Description Parameter R1SL4 R1SLD4 R1SLQ1 R1SL1

Bit rate 622.080 Mbit/s 155.520 Mbit/s


1 x STM-4 standard or concatenated services

2 x STM-4 standard or concatenated services

4 x STM-1 standard services

1 x STM-1 standard services


Dimensions (mm)

111.8 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W)

H

WD

Weight (kg) 0.34 0.36 0.4 0.34


10 11 12 10











5-32

5.6 SEP1/EU08/OU08/TSB8

The SEP1 is an 8 x STM-1 electrical signal processing board, with two STM-1 electrical interfaces on the front panel. The EU08 and OU08are interface boards of the SEP1. The TSB8 is an electrical interface switching & bridging board. Table 5-19 lists the slots for the SEP1, EU08, OU08, and TSB8 in OSN products. Table 5-19 Slot for the SEP1, EU08, OU08, and TSB8

Product SEP1 (Led out from front panel)

SEP (Work with interface boards)

EU08/OU08 TSB8


Slots 19, 21, 23, 25, 29, 31, 33, 35

Slots 19, 35

OptiX OSN 3500 (40 Gbit/s) Slots 1–6, 13–16 Slots 2–5, 13–16 Not available Slots 19,

35

OptiX OSN 2500 Slots 5–8, 11–13 Slots 6–7, 12–13 Slots 3, 15, 17 Slots 1, 17

OptiX OSN 2500 REG Not available Not available Not available Not

available

OptiX OSN 1500A Slots 12–13 Not available Not available Not

available

OptiX OSN 1500B Slots 11–13 Slots 12–13 Slots 14, 16 Slots 14

When used with different interface boards and electrical interface switching & bridging boards, the SEP1 has different access ability, as listed in Table 5-20. Table 5-20 Different access abilities of the SEP1

When worked with Access ability None Access and process 2 x STM-1 electrical signals.

EU08 Access and process 8 x STM-1 electrical signals.

OU08 Access and process 8 x STM-1 optical signals.

EU08 and TSB8 Access and process 8 x STM-1 electrical signals, and achieve 1:N (N≤3) TPS protection.

Caution: The two interfaces on the front panel of the SEP1 are unavailable when used with interface boards.



5-33

Caution: The EU08 and OU08 can only be used when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s in OptiX OSN 3500. When the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s, the EU04 can be used to work with the SEP1.

5.6.1 Functionality

Functionality SEP1 EU08/OU08 TSB8

Basic function

8 x STM-1 processing board

EU08: 8 x STM-1 electrical interface board OU08: 8 x STM-1 optical interface board

8-channel electrical interface switching & bridging board


_

The OU08 supports the I-1 and S-1.1 optical interface, which complies with ITU-T Recommendation G.957.

_



Service processing Support VC-12/VC-3/VC-4 services.

Overhead processing




Protection scheme

Realize TPS protection when the SEP1 works with interface boards and switching & bridging boards. Support two-fiber unidirectional multiplex section protection (MSP), linear MSP and SNCP.

Maintenance

Support inloop and outloop at optical interfaces. Support inloop and outloop at VC-4 level, locating fault fast. Support warm and cold reset. Warm reset brings no impact to services.Support the query of board information. Support the in-service uploading of FPGA. Support smooth board software upgrade.



5-34

5.6.2 Principle

Figure 5-11 shows the principle block diagram of the SEP1 (1 x STM-1 signal is processed).

Framesynchronous

and scramblermodule

Overheadprocessing

module

Logiccontrolmodule

STM-1 O/E signal Cross-connect unit

Backplane

SCC

Interfacemodule

Datarecoverymodule

-48 V

+3.3 V

Powermodule+2.7 V

+5 V

+3.3 V（Standby）

STM-1 O/E signal Cross-connect unit

+3.3 V（Standby）

Figure 5-11 The principle block diagram of the SEP1

1. In Receive Direction The interface module accesses STM-1 electrical signals (for optical signals, O/E conversion is needed), and the data recovery module recovers clock signals. Then, the cock signal and E4/STM-1 electrical signals are sent to the frame synchronous and scrambler module. The frame synchronous and scrambler module descrambles the received STM-1 electrical signals, converts it into parallel signals, and then sends them to the overhead processing module. The overhead processing module extracts the overhead bytes from the STM-1 signals, and demultiplexes the signals into one channel of VC-4 signal. The VC-4 signal is then sent to the cross-connect unit through the backplane.

2. In Transmit Direction The one channel of VC-4 signal from the cross-connect unit are multiplexed into STM-1 signals in the overhead processing unit, and sent to the frame synchronous and scrambler module after being inserted with overhead bytes. The frame synchronous and scrambler module implements parallel/serial conversion for the received STM-1 electrical signals, and then sends them to the interface module after scrambling. The interface module sends the STM-1 electrical signals to the cable for transmission. When optical signals are required, the interface module adopts the OU08, where the signals are sent to fiber after E/O conversion.



5-35


This unit: − communicates with the SCC and other boards through Ethernet ports. − collects and reports alarms and performance events. − process the configuration command from NM.


5.6.3 Front Panel

Figure 5-12 shows the front panels of the SEP1, EU08, OU08, and TSB8.

STATACTPROGSRV

SEP1

SEP1

OU

T1IN

1O

UT2

IN2

OU

T1IN

1O

UT2

IN2

OU

T3IN

3O

UT4

IN4

OU

T5IN

5O

UT6

IN6

OU

T7IN

7O

UT8

IN8

EU08

EU08

OU08

OU08

OU

T4IN4

OU

T3IN3

OU

T2IN2

OU

T1IN1

OU

T8IN

8O

UT7IN

7O

UT6IN

6O

UT5IN

5

TSB8

TSB8

SEP1 EU08 OU08 (LC) TSB8

Figure 5-12 The front panel of the SEP1, EU08, OU08, and TSB8

1. Indicators There are four indicators on the SEP1.

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) – double colors (red, green) Service active status indicator (ACT) – green



5-36

Board software status indicator (PROG) – double colors (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) – three colors (red, green, yellow)

For detailed description of the indicators, see Appendix A. There are no indicators on the EU08, OU08, or TSB8.

2. Interfaces Quantity: The SEP1 has two pair of 75-ohm SMB interface, with which the SEP1 can access two channels of STM-1 electrical signal by itself. Type: SMB connector Table 5-21 lists the quantity and type of the interfaces of the EU08 and OU08. Table 5-21 Interfaces of the EU08 and OU08

Interface EU08 N1OU08 N2OU08 Quantity 8 8 8

Access ability 8 x STM-1(e) 8 x STM-1(o) 8 x STM-1(o)

Type 8-pair SMB electrical interface

8-pair LC optical interface

8-pair SC optical interface

Swappable optical module — Supported Not supported

The N1OU08 supports swappable optical modules, which simplifies the maintenance to optical modules. There is no service interfaces on the TSB8.

5.6.4 Protection Configuration

When used with the EU08 and TSB8, the SEP1 can achieve 1:N TPS protection for 8 x STM-1 electrical signals. Table 5-22 lists the TPS protection of the SEP1 in OSN products. Table 5-22 TPS protection of the SEP1

Product TPS protection TPS configuration



Support two groups of 1:N (N≤3) TPS protection

The board in slot 2 protects the boards in slots 3, 4, and 5. The board in slot 16 protects the boards in slots 13, 14, and 15.

OptiX OSN 2500 Support two groups of 1:1 TPS protection

The board in slot 6 protects the one in slot 7. The board in slot 13 protects the one in slot 12.

OptiX OSN 2500 REG

Not supported —

OptiX OSN 1500A

Not supported —



5-37


OptiX OSN 1500B

Support one group of 1:1 TPS protection

The board in slot 12 protects the one in slot 13.

As an equipment level protection, the TPS protection switches signals to the protection board upon the failure of the working board. This avoids complicated network-level protections effectively, and enhances the reliability of the equipment.

1. Protection Principle Figure 5-13 shows the 1:3 TPS protection when the SEP1 is used with the EU08 and TSB8 in the OptiX OSN 3500.

Protection

SEP1

Working

SEP1

Working

SEP1

Working

SEP1

TSB8 EU08 EU08 EU08

SLOT 2 SLOT 3 SLOT 4 SLOT 5

Fail

SLOT 9/10

1 2 3 1 21 2 1 2

8 STM-1(e) 8 STM-1(e)8 x STM-1(e)Switch control

signal

Crossconnectboard

x x

Figure 5-13 1:3 TPS protection of the SEP1 in the OptiX OSN 3500

Normal status When each working board is working normally, the service signal is accessed to the SEP1 directly through position 1 of the control switch on the EU08. Switching status When a working SEP1 fails, the working board in each slot is protected in the following manners.

When the working board in slot 3 fails, the control switch of the corresponding EU08 switches from position 1 to position 2. At the same time, the control switch of the TSB8 switches from position 1 to position 3. Slot 2 is now protecting slot 3.

When the working board in slot 4 fails, the control switch of the corresponding EU08 switches from position 1 to position 2. At the same time, the control switch of the TSB8 switches from position 1 to position 2. Slot 2 is now protecting slot 4.

When the working board in slot 5 fails, the control switch of the corresponding EU08 switches from position 1 to position 2, while the control switch of the TSB8 does not act. Slot 2 is now protecting slot 5.



5-38

2. Board Configuration of the OptiX OSN 3500 When the equipment is configured as two-group 1:3 TPS protection for the SEP1, the relation between the working board and protection board is shown in Figure 5-14.

SLOT1

SLOT2

SLOT3

SLOT4

SLOT5

SLOT6

SLOT7

SLOT8

SLOT9

SLOT10

SLOT11

SLOT12

SLOT13

SLOT14

SLOT15

SLOT16

SLOT17

SLOT18

SLOT19

SLOT20

SLOT21

SLOT22

SLOT23

SLOT24

SLOT25

SLOT26

SLOT27

SLOT28

SLOT29

SLOT30

SLOT31

SLOT32

SLOT33

SLOT34

SLOT35

SLOT36

SLOT37

FAN FANFAN

Fiber routing

XCS

XCS

Working 2

Working 2

Working 2

Protection 2

Protection 1

Working 1

Working 1

Working 1

TSB

8

TSB

8

EU

08

EU

08

EU

08

EU

08

EU

08

EU

08

SC

CA

UX

PIU

PIU

Figure 5-14 Board distribution upon two-group 1:3 TPS for the SEP1 in the OptiX OSN 3500

In the Figure 5-14, the board in slot 2 protects the boards in slots 3, 4, and 5, and the board in slot 16 protects the ones in slots 13, 14, and 15. The slot assignment of the SEP1, EU08, and TSB8 is shown in Table 5-23. Table 5-23 Slot assignment of the SEP1, EU08, and TSB8 in the OptiX OSN 3500

Board Protection group 1 Protection group 2

Protection SEP1 Slot 2 Slot 16

TSB8 Slot 19 Slot 35

Working SEP1 Slots 3, 4, 5 Slots 13, 14, 15

EU08 Slots 21, 23, 25 Slots 29, 31, 33

3. Board Configuration of the OptiX OSN 2500 When the equipment is configured as two-group 1:1 TPS protection for the SEP1, the relation between the working board and protection board is shown in Figure 5-15.



5-39

Fiber Routing

SLOT9

SLOT10

SLOT13

SLOT14

SLOT12

SLOT8

SLOT11

PIU(SLOT22)

PIU(SLOT23)

FAN(SLOT25)

FAN(SLOT24)

SLOT5

SLOT6

SLOT7

SLOT15

SLOT16

SLOT17

SLOT18

SLOT4

SLOT3

SLOT2

SLOT1

CXL

16

CXL

16

Wor

king

1Pr

otec

tion

1

SAP

Wor

king

2

Prot

ectio

n 2

Figure 5-15 Board distribution upon two-group 1:1 TPS for the SEP1 in the OptiX OSN 2500

In the above figure, the board in slot 6 protects the one in slot 7, and the board in slot 13 protects the one in slot 12. The slot assignment of the SEP1, EU08, and TSB8 is shown in Table 5-24. Table 5-24 Slot assignment of the SEP1, EU08, and TSB8 in the OptiX OSN 2500


Protection SEP1 Slot 6 Slot 13

TSB8 Slot 1 Slot 17

Working SEP1 Slot 7 Slot 12

EU08 Slot 3 Slot 15

4. Board Configuration of the OptiX OSN 1500B When the equipment is configured as 1:1 TPS protection for the SEP1, the relation between the working board and protection board is shown in Figure 5-16.

Slot 14 Slot 18 PIU

Slot 15

Slot 16

Slot 17

Slot 20

FAN

Slot 1

Slot 2

Slot 3

Slot 4

Slot 19 PIU

Slot 6

Slot 7

Slot 8

Slot 9

Slot 10 AUX Slot 5

TSB8

EU08

ProtectionWorking

CXL16/4/1

CXL16/4/1

EOW

Slot 11

Slot 12

Slot 13

Figure 5-16 Board distribution upon 1:1 TPS for the SEP1 in the OptiX OSN 1500B

In the above figure, the board in slot 12 protects the one in slot 13.



5-40

The slot assignment of the SEP1, EU08, and TSB8 is shown in Table 5-25. Table 5-25 Slot assignment of the SEP1, EU08, and TSB8 in the OptiX OSN 1500B

Board Protection group

Protection SEP1 Slot 12

TSB8 Slot 14

Working SEP1 Slot 13

EU08 Slot 16


The following parameters should be set through the NM for the SEP1. J1


C2 C2 is the signal label byte, indicating the multiplexing structure of VC-4 frame and the payload property. It is required that the C2 bytes transmitted match those received. Once mismatch is detected, the corresponding VC-4 path will generate the HP_SLM alarm and insert all “1”s into the C4. Table 5-26 associates the C2 setting to the service type. Table 5-26 Relationship between C2 setting and service type for the SEP1

Service type C2 setting


E3 or DS3 34 Mbit/s or 45 Mbit/s into C-3




The version of the SEP1, EU08, and TSB8 is N1, which is the only version existed. The boards can be used in the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, and OptiX OSN 1500B. The OU08 has version N1 and version N2. The optical interface of version N1 is of LC connector, and that of version N2 is of SC connector. The two versions provide the same functions.


Table 5-27 lists the technical parameters of the SEP1, EU08, OU08, and TSB8.



5-41

Table 5-27 Technical parameters of the SEP1, EU08, OU08, and TSB8

Description Parameter SEP1 EU08 OU08 TSB8


Access capability

2 channels of electrical signals

8 channels of electrical signals

8 channels of optical signals

-


8 x STM-1 - - -

Line code pattern

CMI NRZ

Connector SMB SMB LC or SC -

Dimensions (mm)

262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W)

262.05 (H) x 110 (D) x 22 (W)

H

WD

Weight (kg) 0.95 0.41 0.41 0.28


17 11 6 5

Optical module type

- I-1, S-1.1 -

Wavelength (nm)

- 1310 -


- 0–15 -


- –15 to –8 -


- –38 -


Temperature: 0°C to 45°C Humidity: 10%–90%


Temperature: –5°C to 50°C Humidity: 5%–95%





OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual 6 PDH Boards


6-1

6 PDH Boards

This chapter introduces the PDH boards of the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, and OptiX OSN 1500 in terms of:

Functionality Principle Front panel Protection configuration Parameter configuration Version description Technical parameters

The PDH boards supported by the OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 are listed in Table 4-2.

6.1 SPQ4/MU04/TSB8

The SPQ4 is a 4 x E4/STM-1(e) processing board. The MU04 is a 4 x E4/STM-1 interface board. The SPQ4 works with the MU04 to access and process 4 x E4/STM-1 electrical signals. The SPQ4 and MU04 work with the TSB8 to provide 1:N TPS protection. Table 6-1 lists the slots for the SPQ4, MU04, and TSB8. Table 6-1 Slots for the SPQ4, MU04, and TSB8

Product SPQ4 MU04 TSB8


Slots 2–5, 13–16 Slots 19, 21, 23, 25, 29, 31, 33, 35

Slots 19, 35


Slots 2–5, 13–16 Slots 19, 21, 23, 25, 29, 31, 33, 35

Slots 19, 35

OptiX OSN 2500 Slots 6–7, 12–13 Slots 1, 3, 15, 17 Slots 1, 17

OptiX OSN 2500 REG Not available Not available Not available

OptiX OSN 1500A Not available Not available Not available



6-2

Product SPQ4 MU04 TSB8

OptiX OSN 1500B Slots 12–13 Slots 14, 16 Slot 14

6.1.2 Functionality

Functionality SPQ4 MU04 TSB8

Basic function

4 x E4/STM-1(e) processing board

4 x E4/STM-1(e) interface board


Service processing

Access and process 4 x E4/STM-1(e) signals. Each path can carry both E4 and STM-1 electrical signals. Support VC-12/VC-3/VC-4 services

Overhead processing

Support the processing of the section overheads of STM-1 signals, including B1, B2, K1, K2, M1, F1, and D1–D12. Support the processing of the path overheads (transparent transmission and termination), including J1, B3, C2, G1, and H4. Support setting and querying J0/J1/C2 byte.



Protection schemes

The SPQ4 supports TPS protection when working with interface boards and switching & bridging boards. Supports two-fiber unidirectional multiplex section protection (MSP), linear MSP, and SNCP.

Maintenance Support inloop and outloop at optical interfaces. Support inloop and outloop at VC-4 level, locating fault fast. Support warm and cold reset. Warm reset brings no impact to services.Support the query of board information. Support the in-service uploading of FPGA. Support smooth board software upgrade.

6.1.3 Principle

Figure 6-1 shows the functional block diagram of the SPQ4.



6-3

Framesynchronous

and scramblermodule

Overheadprocessing

module

Logiccontrolmodule

E4/STM-1electrical signal Cross-connect unit

Backplane

SCC

Interfacemodule(MU04)

Datarecoverymodule

-48 V

+3.3 V

Powermodule+2.7 V

+5 V

Cross-connect unit

+3.3 V（Standby）

E4/STM-1electrical signal

Figure 6-1 The functional block diagram of the SPQ4

1. In Receive Direction The interface unit (MU04) accesses E4/STM-1 electrical signals, and then the data recovery module recovers the clock signal. Then, the clock signal and E4/STM-1 electrical signals are sent to the frame synchronous and scrambler module. The frame synchronous and scrambler module descrambles the received E4/STM-1 electrical signals, converts it into parallel signals, and sends them to the overhead processing module. The overhead processing module extracts overhead bytes from the received E4/STM-1 signals, and demultiplexes them into one channel of VC-4 signal. The VC-4 signal is then sent to the cross-connect unit through the backplane.

2. In Transmit Direction The one channel of VC-4 signal from the cross-connect unit is multiplexed into E4/STM-1 signals in the overhead processing unit, and then sent to the frame synchronous and scrambler module after being inserted with overhead bytes. The frame synchronous and scrambler module implements parallel/serial conversion for the received E4/STM-1 electrical signals, and then sends them to the interface unit after scrambling. The interface unit sends the received E4/STM-1 electrical signals into the cable for transmission.


This unit: − communicates with the SCC and other boards through Ethernet ports. − collects and reports alarms and performance events. − process the configuration command from NM.



6-4


6.1.4 Front Panel

Figure 6-2 shows the front panel of the SPQ4 and the MU04.

STATACTPROGSRV

SPQ4

SPQ4

OU

T1IN

1O

UT2

IN2

OU

T3IN

3O

UT4

IN4

MU04

MU04

SPQ4 MU04

Figure 6-2 The front panel of the SPQ4 and MU04

1. Indicators There are four indicators on the SEP1.


For detailed description of the indicators, see Appendix A. There are no indicators on the MU04 or TSB8.

2. Interfaces There are no interfaces on the SPQ4, the SPQ4 should work with the MU04 to input/output E4/STM-1 signals. Table 6-2 describes interfaces on the MU04.



6-5

Table 6-2 Interfaces on the MU04

Interface MU04

Access service 4 x E4/STM-1

Interface 75 ohm unbalanced interface

Interface type SMB


When used with the MU04 and TSB8, the SPQ4 can achieve 1:N TPS protection for 4 x E4/STM-1 electrical signals. Table 6-3 lists the TPS protection of the SPQ4 in the OptiX OSN products. Table 6-3 The TPS protection of the SPQ4




Support two groups of 1:N (N≤3) TPS protection


OptiX OSN 2500 Support two groups of 1:1 TPS protection


OptiX OSN 2500 REG

Not supported —

OptiX OSN 1500A

Not supported —

OptiX OSN 1500B



As an equipment level protection, the TPS protection switches signals to the protection board upon the failure of the working board. This avoids complicated network-level protections effectively, and enhances the reliability of the equipment.

1. Protection Principle Figure 6-3 shows the 1:3 TPS protection when the SPQ4 is used with the MU04 and TSB8 in the OptiX OSN 3500.



6-6

Protection

SPQ4

Working

SPQ4 SPQ4 SPQ4

TSB8 MU04 MU04 MU04

Slot 2 Slot 3 Slot 4 Slot 5

Fail

Cross-connect

and timingboard

Switchcontrolsignal

Slot 9/10

4× E4/STM-1

1 2 3 1 2

4× E4/STM-1 4× E4/STM-1

1 2 1 2

Working Working

Figure 6-3 The 1:3 TPS protection of the SPQ4 in the OptiX OSN 3500

Normal status When each working board is working normally, the service signal is accessed to the SPQ4 directly through position 1 of the control switch on the MU04. Switching status When a working SPQ4 fails, the working board in each slot is protected in the following manners.

When the working board in slot 3 fails, the control switch of the corresponding MU04 switches from position 1 to position 2. At the same time, the control switch of the TSB8 switches from position 1 to position 3. Slot 2 is now protecting slot 3.

When the working board in slot 4 fails, the control switch of the corresponding MU04 switches from position 1 to position 2. At the same time, the control switch of the TSB8 switches from position 1 to position 2. Slot 2 is now protecting slot 4.

When the working board in slot 5 fails, the control switch of the corresponding MU04 switches from position 1 to position 2, while the control switch of the TSB8 does not act. Slot 2 is now protecting slot 5.

2. Board Configuration of the OptiX OSN 3500 When the equipment is configured as two-group 1:3 TPS protection for the SPQ4, the relation between the working board and protection board is shown in Figure 6-4.



6-7

SLOT1

SLOT2

SLOT3

SLOT4

SLOT5

SLOT6

SLOT7

SLOT8

SLOT9

SLOT10

SLOT11

SLOT12

SLOT13

SLOT14

SLOT15

SLOT16

SLOT17

SLOT18

SLOT19

SLOT20

SLOT21

SLOT22

SLOT23

SLOT24

SLOT25

SLOT26

SLOT27

SLOT28

SLOT29

SLOT30

SLOT31

SLOT32

SLOT33

SLOT34

SLOT35

SLOT36

SLOT37

FAN FANFAN

Fiber routing

XCS

XCS

Working 2

Working 2

Working 2

Protection 2

Protection 1

Working 1

Working 1

Working 1

TSB

8

TSB

8

EU

08

EU

08

EU

08

EU

08

EU

08

EU

08

SC

CA

UX

PIU

PIU

Figure 6-4 Board distribution upon two-group 1:3 TPS for the SPQ4 in the OptiX OSN 3500

In Figure 6-4, the board in slot 2 protects the boards in slots 3, 4, and 5, and the board in slot 16 protects the ones in slots 13, 14, and 15. The slot assignment of the SPQ4, MU04, and TSB8 is shown in Table 6-4. Table 6-4 Slot assignment of the SPQ4, MU04, and TSB8 in the OptiX OSN 3500


Protection SPQ4 Slot 2 Slot 16


Working SPQ4 Slots 3, 4, 5 Slots 13, 14, 15

EU04 Slots 21, 23, 25 Slots 29, 31, 33

3. Board Configuration of the OptiX OSN 2500 When the equipment is configured as two-group 1:1 TPS protection for the SPQ4, the relation between the working board and protection board is shown in Figure 6-5.



6-8

Fiber Routing

SLOT9

SLOT10

SLOT13

SLOT14

SLOT12

SLOT8

SLOT11

PIU(SLOT22)

PIU(SLOT23)

FAN(SLOT25)

FAN(SLOT24)

SLOT5

SLOT6

SLOT7

SLOT15

SLOT16

SLOT17

SLOT18

SLOT4

SLOT3

SLOT2

SLOT1

CXL

16

CXL

16

Wor

king

1Pr

otec

tion

1

SAP

Wor

king

2

Prot

ectio

n 2

Figure 6-5 Board distribution upon two-group 1:1 TPS for the SPQ4 in the OptiX OSN 2500

In Figure 6-5, the board in slot 6 protects the one in slot 7, and the board in slot 13 protects the one in slot 12. The slot assignment of the SPQ4, MU04, and TSB8 is shown in Table 6-5. Table 6-5 Slot assignment of the SPQ4, MU04, and TSB8 in the OptiX OSN 2500


Protection SPQ4 Slot 6 Slot 13

TSB8 Slot 1 Slot 17

Working SPQ4 Slot 7 Slot 12

MU04 Slot 3 Slot 15

4. Board Configuration of the OptiX OSN 1500B When the equipment is configured as 1:1 TPS protection for the SPQ4, the relation between the working board and protection board is shown in Figure 6-6.

Slot 14 Slot 18 PIU

Slot 15

Slot 16

Slot 17

Slot 20

FAN

Slot 1

Slot 2

Slot 3

Slot 4

Slot 19 PIU

Slot 6

Slot 7

Slot 8

Slot 9

Slot 10 AUX Slot 5

TSB8

EU08

ProtectionWorking

CXL16/4/1

CXL16/4/1

EOW

Slot 11

Slot 12

Slot 13

Figure 6-6 Board distribution upon 1:1 TPS for the SPQ4 in the OptiX OSN 1500B

In the above figure, the board in slot 12 protects the one in slot 13.



6-9

The slot assignment of the SPQ4, MU04, and TSB8 is shown in Table 6-6. Table 6-6 Slot assignment of the SPQ4, MU04, and TSB8 in the OptiX OSN 1500B


Protection SPQ4 Slot 12

TSB8 Slot 14

Working SPQ4 Slot 13

MU04 Slot 16


The following parameters should be set through the NM for the SPQ4. J1


C2 C2 is the signal label byte, indicating the multiplexing structure of VC-4 frames and the payload property. It is required that the C2 bytes transmitted match those received. Once mismatch is detected, the corresponding VC-4 path will generate the HP_SLM alarm and insert all “1”s into the C4. Table 6-7 associates the C2 setting to the service type. Table 6-7 Relationship between C2 setting and service type for the SPQ4

Service type C2 setting


E3 or DS3 34 Mbit/s or 45 Mbit/s into C-3




The SPQ4 has version N1 and version N2. The two versions are different in the internal modules used, but realize functions in the same way. The two versions can be used in the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, and OptiX OSN 1500B. The two versions can be replaced by each other in products of version V100R003. The version of the MU04 and TSB8 is N1, which is the only version existed. The boards can be used in the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, and OptiX OSN 1500B.


Table 6-8 lists the technical parameters of the SPQ4 and MU04.



6-10

Table 6-8 Technical parameters of the SPQ4 and MU04

Description Parameter SPQ4 MU04

Bit rate 139264 kbit/s, 155520 kbit/s

Process capability

Process 4 x E4/STM-1(e) signals

Access 4 x E4/STM-1(e) signals

Line code pattern CMI

Connector None SMB

Dimensions (mm) 262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W) 262.05 (H) x 110 (D) x 22 (W) H

WD

Weight (kg) 0.91 0.41


24 2











6-11

6.2 PL3/PD3/PL3A/C34S/D34S

The PL3 is a 3 x E3/DS3 processing board. The PD3 is a 6 x E3/DS3 processing board. The PL3A is a 3 x E3/DS3 processing board with cables led out from the front

panel. The C34S is a 3 x E3/DS3 PDH interface switching board. The D34S is a 6 x E3/DS3 PDH interface switching board.

The PL3/PD3 works with the D34S to access and process 3/6 x E3 electrical signals. The PL3 works with the C34S to access and process 3 x E3 electrical signals .The PL3/PD3 and C34S/D34S work with the TSB8 to provide 1:N TPS protection. Table 6-9 lists the slots for the PL3, PL3A, PD3, C34S, D34S, and TSB8 on the OptiX OSN products.

Table 6-9 Slots for the PL3, PL3A, PD3, C34S, D34S, and TSB8

Product PL3/PD3 PL3A C34S D34S TSB8


Slots 2–5, 13–16

Slots 1–8, 11–17

Slots 19, 21, 23, 25, 29, 31, 33, 35

Slots 19, 21, 23, 25, 29, 31, 33, 35

Slots 19, 35


Slots 2–5, 13–16

Slots 1–8, 11–16

Slots 19, 21, 23, 25, 29, 31, 33, 35

Slots 19, 21, 23, 25, 29, 31, 33, 35

Slots 19, 35

OptiX OSN 2500

Slots 6–7, 12–13

Slots 5–8, 11–13

Slots 1, 3, 15, 17

Slots 1, 3, 15, 17

Slots 1, 17

OptiX OSN 2500 REG

Not available Not available Not available Not available Not available

OptiX OSN 1500A

Not available Slots 12–13 Not available Not available Not available

OptiX OSN 1500B

Slots 12–13 Slots 11–13 Slots 14, 16 Slots 14, 16 Slot 14

6.2.1 Functionality

Functionality PL3 PD3 PL3A C34S D34S TSB8

Basic function 3 x E3 processing board

6 x E3 processing board

3 x E3 processing board (led out from front panel)

3x E3/DS3 PDH interface switching board

6 x E3/DS3 PDH interface switching board


Service processing

Access and process E3/DS3 signals.



6-12

Overhead processing

Support the setting and querying of all path overheads at VC-3 level.



Protection schemes

The PL3/PD3 supports TPS protection when working with interface boards and switching & bridging boards.

Maintenance Support inloop and outloop at electrical interfaces. Support inloop and outloop at VC-3 level and locate faults quickly. Support warm and cold reset. Warm reset does not affect services. Support the query of board information. Support the in-service uploading of FPGA. Support smooth board software upgrade.

6.2.2 Principle

Figure 6-7 shows the functional block diagram of the PD3, PL3, and PL3A (one channel of E3/DS3 signal is processed).

Backplane

Decoder

Encoder

Interfacemodule

Logiccontrolmodule

D34S/D34S Cross-connect unit

+3.3 V（Standby）

+3.3 V

E3/DS3Mapping

De-mapping

SCC

D34S/D34S E3/DS3

Powermodule+2.7 V

+5 V

-48 V

Cross-connect unit

Figure 6-7 The functional block diagram of the PD3, PL3, and PL3A

1. In Receive Direction The E3/DS3 signal is accessed, through the interface module, into the decoder, where



6-13

NRZ data signal and clock signal are recovered after decoding. Then, the signal is sent to the mapping module. In the mapping module, the E3/DS3 signal is mapped asynchronously to C-3, and formed as VC-3 after path overhead processing, as TU-3 after pointer processing, and finally as VC-4 after multiplexing. Then, the signal is sent to the cross-connect unit. Figure 6-8 shows the mapping process.

VC-4 TUG-3 TU-3

VC-3

C-3

x 3

44736 kbit/sor

34368 kbit/s

Figure 6-8 The mapping and multiplexing process of E3/DS3 signals

2. In Transmit Direction The demapping module extracts binary data and clock signals from the VC-4 signal from the cross-connect unit, and then sends them to the encoder, where E3 or DS3 signals are output.

3. Auxiliary Units Logic control module This unit:

− Enables the communication between the boards and the SCC. − Collects and reports alarms and performance events to the SCC. − Processes the configuration command from the SCC.


6.2.3 Front Panel

Figure 6-9 shows the front panel of the PL3, PD3, PL3A, C34S and D34S.



6-14

STATACTPROGSRV

PL3

PL3

STATACTPROGSRV

PD3

PD3

STATACTPROGSRV

PL3A

PL3A

OU

T1IN

1O

UT2

IN2

OU

T3IN

3

OU

T4IN

4O

UT5

IN5

OU

T6IN

6

D34S

D34S

OU

T1IN

1O

UT2

IN2

OU

T3IN

3

PL3 PD3 PL3A C34S D34S

Figure 6-9 The front panel of the PD3, PL3, PL3A, C34S and D34S



6-15

1. Indicators There are four indicators on the PL3, PD3, and PL3A.

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) – double colours (red, green) Service active status indicator (ACT) – green Board software status indicator (PROG) – double colours (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) – triple colours (red, green, and yellow)

For detailed description of the indicators, see Appendix A. There are no indicators on the C34S, D34S or TSB8.

2. Interfaces There are no interfaces on the PL3 or PD3. The board should work with the D34S to input or output E3/DS3 signals. There are three pairs of 75-ohm SMB unbalanced interfaces on the front panel of the PL3A. Table 6-10 describes interfaces on the D34S.

Table 6-10 Interfaces on the D34S

Interface C34S D34S

Access service 3 x E3/DS3 6 x E3/DS3


Interface type SMB

Corresponding processing board PL3, PD3


The PL3/PD3 works with the C34S/D34S and TSB8 to achieve 1:N protection for 3/6 x E3/DS3 signals. Table 6-11 lists the TPS protection of the PL3/PD3 in the OptiX OSN products.

Table 6-11 The TPS protection of the PL3/PD3




Support two groups of 1:N (N≤3) TPS protection.


OptiX OSN 2500 Support two groups of 1:1 TPS protection.


OptiX OSN 2500 REG

Not supported. —

OptiX OSN Not supported. —



6-16

1500A

OptiX OSN 1500B

Support one group of 1:1 TPS protection.


As equipment-level protection, the TPS protection switches signals to the protection board upon the failure of the working board. This avoids complicated network-level protections effectively, and enhances the reliability of the equipment.

1. Protection Principle The protection principle of the PL3 is the same as that of the PD3. Figure 6-10 shows the principle of 1:3 TPS for the PD3 in the OptiX OSN 3500.

PD3Working

TSB8 D34S D34S D34S

Slot 2 Slot 3 Slot 4 Slot 5

Fail

Cross-connect

unit

Switchcontrolsignal

SLOT 9/10

1 2 3 1 21 2 1 2

WorkingWorkingProtection

6 x E3/DS3 6 x E3/DS3 6 x E3/DS3

PD3 PD3 PD3

Figure 6-10 The 1:3 TPS protection of the PD3 in the OptiX OSN 3500



6-17

Normal status When each working board works normally, the service signal is accessed to the corresponding PD3 directly through position 1 of the control switch on the D34S. Switching status When a working PD3 failure is detected, the working board in each slot is protected in the following manners. When the working board in slot 3 fails, the control switch of the corresponding D34S

switches from position 1 to position 2. At the same time, the control switch of the TSB8 switches from position 1 to position 3. Slot 2 is now protecting slot 3.

When the working board in slot 4 fails, the control switch of the corresponding D34S switches from position 1 to position 2. At the same time, the control switch of the TSB8 switches from position 1 to position 2. Slot 2 is now protecting slot 4.

When the working board in slot 5 fails, the control switch of the corresponding D34S switches from position 1 to position 2, while the control switch of the TSB8 does not act. Slot 2 is now protecting slot 5.

2. Board Configuration of the OptiX OSN 3500 Table 6-12 shows the relation between the working board and protection board when the equipment is configured as 1:3 TPS protection for the PL3 or PD3.

Table 6-12 Relation between working and protection boards upon 1:3 TPS in the OptiX OSN 3500

Working board Protection board Slot configuration

PL3 (E3) PL3 (E3)

PL3 (DS3) PL3 (DS3)

PD3 (E3) PD3 (E3)

PD3 (DS3) PD3 (DS3)

As shown in Figure 6-11.



6-18

SLOT1

SLOT2

SLOT3

SLOT4

SLOT5

SLOT6

SLOT7

SLOT8

SLOT9

SLOT10

SLOT11

SLOT12

SLOT13

SLOT14

SLOT15

SLOT16

SLOT17

SLOT18

SLOT19

SLOT20

SLOT21

SLOT22

SLOT23

SLOT24

SLOT25

SLOT26

SLOT27

SLOT28

SLOT29

SLOT30

SLOT31

SLOT32

SLOT33

SLOT34

SLOT35

SLOT36

SLOT37

FAN FANFAN

Fiber routing

XCS

XCS

Working 2

Working 2

Working 2

Protection 2

Protection 1

Working 1

Working 1

Working 1

TSB

8

TSB

8

EU

08

EU

08

EU

08

EU

08

EU

08

EU

08

SC

CA

UX

PIU

PIU

Figure 6-11 Board layout upon 1:3 TPS protection for the PL3/PD3 in the OptiX OSN 3500

In the figure, slot 2 protects slots 3, 4, and 5, and slot 16 protects slots 13, 14, and 15. Table 6-13 shows the slot assignment of the PL3/PD3, D34S, and TSB8.

Table 6-13 Slot assignment of the PL3/PD3, D34S and TSB8 in the OptiX OSN 3500


PL3/PD3 (protection board) Slot 2 Slot 16

PL3/PD3 (working board) Slots 3, 4, 5 Slots 13, 14, 15


D34S Slots 21, 23, 25 Slots 29, 31, 33

3. Board Configuration of the OptiX OSN 2500 Table 6-14 shows the relation between the working board and protection board when the equipment is configured as 1:1 TPS protection for the PL3 or PD3.

Table 6-14 Relation between working and protection boards upon 1:1 TPS in the OptiX OSN 2500


PL3 (E3) PL3 (E3)

PL3 (DS3) PL3 (DS3)

PD3 (E3) PD3 (E3)

PD3 (DS3) PD3 (DS3)




6-19

Fiber routing

SLOT9

SLOT10

SLOT13

SLOT14

SLOT12

SLOT8

SLOT11

PIU(Slot 22)

PIU(Slot 23)

FAN(Slot 25)

FAN(Slot 24)

SLOT5

SLOT6

SLOT7

SLOT15

SLOT16

SLOT17

SLOT18

SLOT4

SLOT3

SLOT2

SLOT1

CXL

16

CXL

16

Wor

king

1Pr

otec

tion

1

SAP

Wor

king

2

Prot

ectio

n 2

Figure 6-12 Board layout upon 1:1 TPS protection for the PL3/PD3 n the OptiX OSN 2500

In the figure, slot 6 protects slot7, and slot 13 protects slots 12. Table 6-15 shows the slot assignment of the PL3/PD3, D34S, and TSB8.

Table 6-15 Slot assignment of the PL3/PD3, D34S and TSB8 in the OptiX OSN 2500


PL3/PD3 (protection board) Slot 6 Slot 13

PL3/PD3 (working board) Slot 7 Slot 12

TSB8 Slot 1 Slot 17

D34S Slot 3 Slot 15

4. Board Configuration of the OptiX OSN 1500B Table 6-16 shows the relation between the working board and protection board when the equipment is configured as 1:1 TPS protection for the PL3 or PD3.

Table 6-16 Relation between working and protection boards upon 1:1 TPS in the OptiX OSN 1500B


PL3 (E3) PL3 (E3)

PL3 (DS3) PL3 (DS3)

PD3 (E3) PD3 (E3)

PD3 (DS3) PD3 (DS3)




6-20

Slot 14 Slot 18 PIU

Slot 15

Slot 16

Slot 17

Slot 20

FAN

Slot 1

Slot 2

Slot 3

Slot 4

Slot 19 PIU

Slot 6

Slot 7

Slot 8

Slot 9

Slot 10 AUX Slot 5

TSB8

EU08

ProtectionWorking

CXL16/4/1

CXL16/4/1

EOW

Slot 11

Slot 12

Slot 13

Figure 6-13 Board layout upon 1:1 TPS protection for the PL3/PD3 in the OptiX OSN 1500B

In the figure, slot 12 protects slot 13. Table 6-17 shows the slot assignment of the PL3/PD3, D34S, and TSB8.

Table 6-17 Slot assignment of the PL3/PD3, D34S, and TSB8 in the OptiX OSN 1500B in the OptiX OSN 1500B


PL3/PD3 (protection board) Slot 12

PL3/PD3 (working board) Slot 13

TSB8 Slot 14

D34S Slot 16


The following parameters should be set on the T2000 for the PL3/PD3. Load indication When the service channel does not process the services it carries, select “Do not load”. Otherwise, select “Load”. Tributary loopback The tributary loopback function is generally used to locate faults for each service channel. The tributary loopback is a diagnosis function, which may interrupt services on relevant channels. Channel service type E3 or DS3 can be selected on the T2000 according to the input service type.


Version N1 is the only version for the PL3, PD3, PL3A, C34S, D34S, and TSB8. The boards can be used in the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, OptiX OSN 1500A, and OptiX OSN 1500B.


Table 6-18 lists the technical parameters of the PL3, PD3, PL3A, C34S, and D34S.



6-21

Table 6-18 Technical parameters of the PL3, PD3, PL3A, C34S and D34S

Description Parameter PL3 PD3 PL3A C34S D34S

Bit rate 34368 kbit/s or 44736 kbit/s

Processing capability 3 x E3/DS3

6 x E3/DS3

3 x E3/DS3

None None

Access capability 0 0 3 x E3/DS3

3 x E3/DS3

6 x E3/DS3

Line code pattern E3:HDB3, DS3:B3ZS

Connector None None SMB SMB

Dimensions (mm) 262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W) H

WD

262.05 (H) x 110 (D) x 22 (W)

262.05 (H) x 110 (D) x 22 (W)

Weight (kg) 1.00 1.12 1.00 0.31 0.38

Power consumption (W) 15 19 15 2 2





Environment for storage Temperature: –40°C to 70°C Humidity: 10%–100%





6-22

6.3 PQ1/PQM/D75S/D12S/D12B

The PQ1 is a 63 x E1 processing board. The PQM is a 63 x E1/T1 processing board. The D75S is a 32 x 75 ohm E1 PDH interface switching board. The D12S is a 32 x 120 ohm E1/T1 PDH interface switching board. The D12B is a 32 x 120 ohm E1/T1 PDH interface board.

Table 6-19 lists slots for the PQ1, PQM, D75S, D12S, and D12B in the OptiX OSN products. Table 6-19 Slots for the PQ1, PQM, D75S, D12S, and D12B

Product PQ1/PQM D75S/D12S/D12B



OptiX OSN 2500 Slots 5–7,12–13 Slots 1–4,15–18

OptiX OSN 2500 REG Not available Not available

OptiX OSN 1500A Not available Not available


Table 6-20 shows the difference between the PQ1 and PQM. Table 6-20 Comparison between the PQ1 and PQM

BoardComparison

PQ1 PQM

Processing capability 63 x E1 63 x E1/T1

Interface board (providing TPS)

2 x D75S or 2 x D12S 2 x D12S

Interface board (NOT providing TPS)

2 x D12B, 2 x D75S or 2 x D12S

2 x D12B or 2 x D12S

6.3.1 Functionality

Functionality PQ1 PQM D75S/D12S/D12B


63 x E1/T1 processing board

E1/T1 interface board Refer to Table 6-21 for details.

Service processing

When working with interface boards, the PQ1 can access and process 63 x E1 signals. When working with interface boards, the PQM can access and process 63 x E1/T1 signals.



6-23

Functionality PQ1 PQM D75S/D12S/D12B

Overhead processing

Support the processing of the path overheads (transparent transmission and termination) at VC-12 level, such as J2.



Protection schemes

The PQ1/PQM supports TPS protection when working with interface boards and switching & bridging boards. Support multiple protection schemes, such as SNCP protection, with switching time less than 50ms.

Maintenance Support inloop and outloop at electrical interfaces. Support inloop and outloop at VC-12 level, locating fault fast. Support warm and cold reset. Warm reset brings no impact to services.Support the query of board information. Support the in-service uploading of FPGA. Support smooth board software upgrade.

6.3.2 Principle

Figure 6-14 shows the functional block diagram of the PQ1/PQM (one channel of E1/T1 signal is processed).

Backplane

Decoder

Encoder

Interfacemodule

Logiccontrolmodule

D75S/D12S/D12B

Cross-connect unit

+3.3 V（Standby）

+3.3 V

E1/T1Mapping

De-mapping

SCC

Powermodule+2.7 V

+5 V-48 V

Cross-connect unitE1/T1D75S/D12S/

D12B

Figure 6-14 The functional block diagram of the PQ1/PQM



6-24

1. In Receive Direction The input E3/DS3 signal enters, through the interface module, the decoder, where HDB3 or B8ZS data signal and clock signal are recovered. Then, the signal is sent to the mapping module. In the mapping module, the E1/T1 signal is mapped asynchronously to C-12, and formed as VC-12 after channel overhead processing, as TU-12 after pointer processing, and finally as VC-4 through multiplexing. Then, the signal is sent to the cross-connect unit. The mapping process is shown in Figure 6-15.

TUG-3 TUG-2 TU-12

VC-12

C 122048 kbit/sor

1544 kbit/s

VC-4x 3x 7

-12

x 3

Figure 6-15 The mapping and multiplexing process of E1/T1 signals

2. In Transmit Direction The demapping module extracts binary data and clock signal from the VC-4 signal from the cross-connect unit, and sends the signal to the encoder, where E1 or T1 signals are output.


This unit: − communicates the board with the SCC. − collects and reports alarms and performance events to the SCC. − process the configuration command from the SCC.


6.3.3 Front Panel

Figure 6-16 shows the front panel of the PQ1, PQM, D75S, D12S, and D12B.



6-25

STATACTPROGSRV

PQ1

PQ1

STATACTPROGSRV

PQM

PQM

D75S

D75S

1～

89～

1617

～24

25～

32

D12S

D12S

1～

89～

1617

～24

25～

32

D12B

D12B

1～

89～

1617

～24

25～

32

PQ1 PQM D75S D12S D12B

Figure 6-16 The front panel of the PQ1, PQM, D75S, D12S, and D12B

1. Indicators There are four indicators on the PQ1 and PQM.


For detailed description of the indicators, see Appendix A. There are no indicators on the D75S, D12S, or D12B.

2. Interfaces There are no interfaces on the PQ1 or PQM. The board should work with the D75S, D12S, or D12B to input/output E1/T1 signals. Table 6-21 shows the difference between the D75S, D12S, and D12B. Table 6-21 Comparison between the D75S, D12S, and D12B

BoardComparison

D75S D12S D12B

Access capability 32 x E1 32 x E1/T1 32 x E1/T1



6-26

BoardComparison

D75S D12S D12B


120 ohm balanced interface


Interface type DB44 DB44 DB44


The PQ1 and PQM work with the D75S or D12S to achieve 1:N TPS protection for 63 x E1/T1 signals. Table 6-22 shows the TPS protection of the PQ1 and PQM in the OptiX OSN products. Table 6-22 The TPS protection of the PQ1 and PQM




Support one group of 1:N (N≤8) TPS protection

The board in slot 1 protects the ones in slots 2, 3, 4, 5, 13, 14, 15, and 16.

OptiX OSN 2500 Support one group of 1:N (N≤4) TPS protection

The board in slot 5 protects the ones in slots 6, 7, 12, and 13.

OptiX OSN 2500 REG

Not supported —

OptiX OSN 1500A

Not supported —

OptiX OSN 1500B

Support one group of 1:N (N≤2) TPS protection

The board in slot 11 protects the ones in slots 12 and 13.

1. Protection Principle The protection principle of the PQ1 is the same with that of the PQM. Figure 6-17 shows the protection principle of the PQ1 in the OptiX OSN 3500.



6-27

SLOT1

SLOT2

SLOT3

SLOT4

SLOT5

SLOT13

SLOT14

SLOT15

SLOT16

SLOT19

SLOT20

SLOT21

SLOT22

SLOT23

SLOT24

SLOT25

SLOT26

SLOT30

SLOT31

SLOT32

SLOT33

SLOT34

SLOT35

SLOT36

SLOT29

Protection

PQ1Working

PQ1Working

PQ1Working

PQ1Working

PQ1Working

PQ1Working

PQ1Working

PQ1Working

PQ1

D75S

D75S

D75S

D75S

D75S

D75S

D75S

D75S

D75S

D75S

D75S

D75S

D75S

D75S

D75S

D75S

E1 protection bus

Cross-connect and timing board

E1service bus

Detect board fault

TPS switchingcontrol bus

Fail

Figure 6-17 The 1:8 TPS protection of the PQ1 in the OptiX OSN 3500

When detecting a working PQ1 is faulty, the cross-connect board delivers the service switching command to control the interface board to switch the faulty board to protection board, thus achieving the protection of services.

2. Board Configuration of the OptiX OSN 3500 When the equipment is configured as with 1:8 TPS for the PQ1 or PQM, the relation between the working board and protection board is shown in Table 6-23. Table 6-23 Relation between working and protection boards upon 1:8 TPS in the OptiX OSN 3500


PQ1 (75 ohm) PQ1 (75 ohm)

PQ1 (120 ohm) PQ1 (120 ohm) or PQM

PQM PQM

The board in slot 1 is a protection board, protecting the boards in slots 2, 3, 4, 5, 13, 14, 15, and 16.Figure 6-18 shows the slots for the working and the protection boards.



6-28

SLOT1

SLOT2

SLOT3

SLOT4

SLOT5

SLOT6

SLOT7

SLOT8

SLOT9

SLOT10

SLOT11

SLOT12

SLOT13

SLOT14

SLOT15

SLOT16

SLOT17

SLOT18

SLOT19

SLOT20

SLOT21

SLOT22

SLOT23

SLOT24

SLOT25

SLOT26

SLOT27

SLOT28

SLOT29

SLOT30

SLOT31

SLOT32

SLOT33

SLOT34

SLOT35

SLOT36

SLOT37

FAN FANFAN

Fiber routing

XCS

XCS

Working

Working

Working

Protection

Working

Working

Working

D75S

D75S

D75S

D75S

D75S

D75S

D75S

D75S

SC

CA

UX

PIU

PIU

Working

Working

D75S

D75S

D75S

D75S

D75S

D75S

D75S

Figure 6-18 Slot assignment upon 1:8 protection for the PQ1/PQM in the OptiX OSN 3500

3. Board Configuration of the OptiX OSN 2500 When the equipment is configured as with 1:4 TPS for the PQ1 or PQM, the relation between the working and the protection board is shown in Table 6-24. Table 6-24 Relation between working and protection boards upon 1:4 TPS in the OptiX OSN 2500

Working board Protection board Slot

PQ1 (75 ohm) PQ1 (75 ohm)

PQ1 (120 ohm) PQ1 (120 ohm) or PQM

PQM PQM

The board in slot 5 is a protection board, protecting the boards in slots 6, 7, 12, and 13. Figure 6-19 shows the slots for the working and the protection boards.



6-29

Fiber routing

SLOT9

SLOT10

SLOT13

SLOT14

SLOT12

SLOT8

SLOT11

PIU(Slot 22)

PIU(Slot 23)

FAN(Slot 25)

FAN(Slot 24)

SLOT5

SLOT6

SLOT7

SLOT15

SLOT16

SLOT17

SLOT18

SLOT4

SLOT3

SLOT2

SLOT1

CXL

16

CXL

16

Wor

king

Prot

ectio

n

SAP

Wor

king

Wor

king

Wor

king

Figure 6-19 Slot assignment upon 1:4 protection for the PQ1/PQM in the OptiX OSN 2500

4. Board Configuration of the OptiX OSN 1500B When the equipment is configured as with 1:2 TPS for the PQ1 or PQM, the relation between the working board and protection board is shown in Table 6-25. Table 6-25 Board distribution upon 1:2 TPS for the PQ1 or PQM in the OptiX OSN 1500B


PQ1/PQM (protection) Slot 11

PQ1/PQM (working) Slots 12, 13

D75S/D12S Slots 14, 15, 16, 17


The following parameter should be set through the NM for the PQ1 or PQM. J2

It is the VC-12 path trace byte. Successive transmission of the lower order access point identifier through J2 helps the receive end learn that its connection with the transmit end in this path is in continuous connection status.


Version N1 is the only version of the PQ1, PQM, D75S, D12S, and D12B. The boards can be used in the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, and OptiX OSN 1500B.


Table 6-26 lists the technical parameters of the PQ1, PQM, D75S, D12S, and D12B. Table 6-26 Technical parameters of the PQ1, PQM, D75S, D12S, and D12B

Description Parameter PQ1 PQM D75S D12S D12B


1544 kbit/s or 2048 kbit/s



6-30

Description Parameter PQ1 PQM D75S D12S D12B


63 x E1 63 x E1/T1

Support TPS

Support TPS

Not support TPS

Accessing capability

0 0 32 x E1 32 x E1/T1

32 x E1/T1

Line code pattern E1: HDB3, T1: B8ZS, AMI (Alternate Mark Inversion)

Connector None None DB44 DB44 DB44

Dimensions (mm) 262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W)

262.05 (H) x 110 (D) x 22 (W)

H

WD

Weight (kg) 1.01 1.01 0.35 0.35 0.31


19 22 5.5 9 1











6-31

6.4 PD1/PL1/L75S/L12S

The PD1 is a 32 x E1 half-slot processing board. It is used with the L75S or L12S in the OptiX OSN 1500A and used with D75S or D12S in the OptiX OSN 2500 and 1500B.

The PL1A is a 16 x E1(75-ohm) half-slot processing board, with signals led out from the front panel.

The PL1B is a 16 x E1 (120-ohm) half-slot processing board, with signals led out from the front panel.

The L75S is a 16 x E1 interface switching board (75-ohm). It is only used in the OptiX OSN 1500A.

The L12S is a 16 x E1/T1 interface switching board (120-ohm). It is only used in the OptiX OSN 1500A.

Note: When the impedance of interfaces is ignored, the PL1A and PL1B are called PL1 hereinafter.

Table 6-27 lists slots for the PD1, PL1, L75S, and L12S in the OptiX OSN products. Table 6-27 Slots for the PD1, PL1, L75S, and L12S

Product PD1 PL1 L75S/L12S

OptiX OSN 3500 (80Gbit/s)


OptiX OSN 3500 (40Gbit/s)


OptiX OSN 2500 Slots 5–7, 19–21 Not available Not available

OptiX OSN 2500 REG


OptiX OSN 1500A Slots 2, 12 (after slot segmentation)

Slots 6–9 Slots 6–7

OptiX OSN 1500B Slots 1–3, 6–8, 11–13 (after slot segmentation)

Slots 6–9 Not available

6.4.1 Functionality

Functionality PD1 PL1 L75S/L12S


16 x E1 processing board

E1/T1 interface board



6-32

Functionality PD1 PL1 L75S/L12S

Service processing When working with interface boards, the PD1 can access and process 32 x E1 signals. The PL1 accesses and processes 16 x E1 signals directly.

Overhead processing

Support the processing of the path overheads (transparent transmission and termination) at VC-12 level, such as J2.



Protection schemes

The PD1 supports TPS protection when working with interface switching boards. Support multiple protection schemes, such as SNCP protection, with switching time less than 50ms.

Maintenance Support inloop and outloop at electrical interfaces. Support inloop and outloop at VC-12 level, locating fault fast. Support warm and cold reset. Warm reset brings no impact to services. Support the query of board information. Support the in-service uploading of FPGA. Support smooth board software upgrade.

6.4.2 Principle

The working principle of the PD1 and PL1 is the same as that of the PQ1. Refer to section 6.3.2 “Principle” for details.

6.4.3 Front Panel

Figure 6-20 shows the front panel of the PD1, PL1, L75S, and L12S.

PD1

STATACTPROGSRV

PL1

STATACTPROGSRV

1-16

L12S

1-16

L75S

1-16

PD1 PL1 L12S L75S

Figure 6-20 The front panel of the PD1, PL1, L12S and L75S



6-33

1. Indicators There are four indicators on the PD1 and PL1.


For detailed description of the indicators, see Appendix A. There are no indicators on the L75S and L12S.

2. Interfaces In the OptiX OSN 1500A, the PD1 works with the L75S or L12S to input/output E1 signals. In the OptiX OSN 2500 and OptiX OSN 1500B, the PD1 working with the D75S or D12S to input/output E1 signals. Refer to section 6.3.3 for details on the D75S and D12S. Table 6-28 compares the PL1, L75S, and L12S. Table 6-28 Comparison between the PL1, L75S, and L12S

BoardComparison

L75S L12S PL1

Access capability 16 x E1 16 x E1 16 x E1



75/120 ohm unbalanced/balanced interface

Interface type 2mmHM 2mmHM 2mmHM


The PD1 and PL1 can only be used in the OptiX OSN 2500 and OptiX OSN 1500. The PD1 works with L75S/D75S or L12S/D12S to achieve 1:N protection to E1 signals. Table 6-29 shows the TPS protection of the PD1. Table 6-29 The TPS protection of the PD1




Not supported —

OptiX OSN 2500 Support two groups of 1:N (N≤2) TPS protection

The board in slot 5 protects the ones in slots 6 and 7. The board in slot 19 protects the ones in slots 20 and 21.

OptiX OSN 2500 REG

Not supported —



6-34


OptiX OSN 1500A



OptiX OSN 1500B

Support two groups of 1:N (N≤2) TPS protection at most

The board in slot 1 protects the ones in slots 2 and 3. The board in slot 11 protects the ones in slots 12 and 13. The board in slot 6 protects the ones in slots 7 and 8. The latter two groups in the above groups cannot coexist.

1. Protection Principle The TPS protection principle of the PD1 is the same as that of the PQ1.

2. Board Configuration of the OptiX OSN 2500 The 1:2 TPS protection of the PD1 can be achieved after the OptiX OSN 2500 performs slot segmentation. Figure 6-21 shows the board distribution.

Fiber Routing

SLOT9

SLOT10

SLOT13

SLOT14

SLOT12

SLOT8

SLOT11

PIU(SLOT22)

PIU(SLOT23)

FAN(SLOT25)

FAN(SLOT24)

SLOT

19

SLOT

SLOT

SLOT15

SLOT16

SLOT17

SLOT18

SLOT4

SLOT3

SLOT2

SLOT1

CXL

16

CXL

16

W1P1

SAP

20 21

SLOT5

SLOT6

SLOT7

W1

W2P2 W2

D75

S

D75

S

D75

SD

75S

Figure 6-21 Board distribution upon 1:2 TPS protection of the PD1 in the OptiX OSN 2500

Table 6-30 lists slots for the working, protection, and interface switching board of the PD1. Table 6-30 Relation between working and protection boards upon 1:2 TPS of the PD1 in the OptiX OSN 2500


PD1 (protection) Slots 5 Slot 19

PD1 (working) Slots 6, 7 Slots 20, 21

D75S/D12S Slots 2, 4 Slots 1, 3



6-35

3. Board Configuration of the OptiX OSN 1500A The 1:1 TPS protection of the PD1 can be achieved after the OptiX OSN 1500A performs slot segmentation. Figure 6-22 shows the board distribution.

Slot 20

FAN

Slot 1

Slot 2

Slot 3

Slot 4

Slot 6

Slot 7

Slot 8

Slot 9

Slot 10 AUX Slot 5

CXL16/4/1

CXL16/4/1

EOW

Slot 12

Slot 11

Slot 13

PD1(P) PD1(W) L75S(1~16)

L75S(17~32)

Figure 6-22 Board distribution upon 1:1 TPS protection of the PD1

4. Board Configuration of the OptiX OSN 1500B Table 6-31 shows the slot assignment of the working and the protection board of the PD1 in the OptiX OSN 1500B. Table 6-31 Slot assignment upon 1:1 TPS protection of the PD1 in the OptiX OSN 1500B

Board Before slot segmentation After slot segmentation

PD1 (protection)

Slot 11 Slot 6 Slot 1 Slot 11 Slot 6

PD1 (working) Slots 12, 13 Slots 7, 8 Slots 2, 3 Slots 12, 13 Slots 7, 8

D75S/D12S Slots 15, 17 Slots 15, 17 Slots 14, 16 Slots 15, 17 Slots 15, 17

Note: The protection group with slot 6 and that with slot 11 cannot coexist, because the two groups share protection bus. The OptiX OSN 1500B supports one group of TPS protection to E1 signals before slot segmentation, and supports two groups after slot segmentation.


The following parameter should be set through the NM for the PD1 or PL1. J2

It is the VC-12 path trace byte. Successive transmission of the lower order access point identifier through J2 helps the receive end learn that its connection with the transmit end in this path is in continuous connection status.


Version N1 is the only version of the PD1, PL1, L75S, and L12S. The boards can be used in the OptiX OSN 2500, OptiX OSN 1500A, and OptiX OSN 1500B after slot segmentation. The PL1 has PL1A and PL1B. A indicates the interface impedance is 75 ohm, and B indicates the interface impedance is 120 ohm.


Table 6-32 lists the technical parameters of the PD1, PL1, L75S, and L12S.



6-36

Table 6-32 Technical parameters of the PD1, PL1, L75S, and L12S

Description Parameter PD1 PL1 L75S L12S

Bit rate 2048 kbit/s 2048 kbit/s


32 x E1 16 x E1 TPS TPS

Accessing capability

0 0 16 x E1 (75-ohm)

16 x E1 (120-ohm)

Line code pattern

E1: HDB3

Connector None 2mmHM 2mmHM 2mmHM

Dimensions (mm)

111.8 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W)

H

WD

Weight (kg) 0.50 0.45 0.24 0.27


15 6.7 2.7 4.5









OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual 7 Data Processing Boards


7-1

7 Data Processing Boards

This chapter introduces data processing boards of the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500 and OptiX OSN 1500, including Ethernet data processing boards, ATM data processing boards and Ethernet data interface boards as follows.

Ethernet transparent transmission board – EFT4/EFT8/EGT2 Ethernet switching processing board – EFS4/EFS0/EGS2 Ethernet board with RPR function – EMR0/EGR2 ATM service processing board – ADL4/ADQ1 ATM service processing board with IMA function – IDL4/IDQ1 Multi-service transparent transmission processing board – MST4 Ethernet data interface board – EFF8/ETF8/ETS8

The technical details cover: Functionality Principle Front panel Parameter configuration Protection configuration Version description Technical parameters

Refer to Table 4-3 for the name and descriptions of the data processing boards supported by the OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500.



7-2

7.1 EGT2/EFT8/EFT4/EFF8/ETF8

The EGT2 is a 2-port Gigabit Ethernet transparent transmission board. The EFT8 is an 8/16-port 100 Mbit/s Fast Ethernet transparent transmission board. The EFT4 (seated in the half-height slot) is a 4-port 100 Mbit/s Fast Ethernet

transparent transmission board. The EFF8 is an 8-port 10/100M Ethernet optical interface board. The ETF8 is an 8-port 10/100M Ethernet electrical interface board.

Table 7-1 shows the slots for the EGT2, EFT8, EFT4, EFF8, and ETF8 boards. Table 7-1 Slots for the EGT2/EFT8/EFT4/EFF8/ETF8

Product EGT2 (Note 1)

EFT8 (led out from front panel) (Note 1)

EFT8 (used with interface boards) (Note 1)

EFT4 EFF8/ETF8


Slots 1–8, 11–16

Slots 1–6, 13–16

Slots 2–5, 13–16 Not supported

Slots 19, 21, 23, 25, 29, 31, 33, 35


Slots 1–8, 11–16

Slots 1–6, 13–16 Slots 13 Not supported

Slots 19, 21, 23, 25, 29, 31, 33, 35

OptiX OSN 2500

Slots 5–8, 11–13

Slots 5–8, 11–13 Slots 7, 12–13 Slots 5–7,

19–212 Slots 1, 3, 15, 17

OptiX OSN 2500 REG Not supported Not supported Not supported Not supported Not

supported

OptiX OSN 1500A Slots 12–13 Slots 12–13 Not supported

Slots 2–3, slots 12–13, slots 6–92

Not supported


Slots 1–3, slots 11–13, slots 6–92

Slots 14, 16

Note 1: The EGT2 and the EFT8 support bandwidth auto-sensing, adjusting uplink bandwidth automatically according to the capacity of the slots they are seated in. Note 2: These slots are half-height slots.



7-3

7.1.1 Functionality

Board Function EGT2 EFT8 EFT4

Basic function Transparent transmission of 2 GE signals

Transparent transmission of 8/16 FE signals

Transparent transmission of 4 FE signals

Used with an interface board -

The EFT8 can access 8 electrical Ethernet signals itself. Used with the ETF8, the EFT8 can access 16 electrical Ethernet signals. Used with the EFF8, the EFT8 can access 8 optical Ethernet signals and 8 electrical Ethernet signals.

-

Interface specifications

1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX Ethernet optical interface, supporting auto-negotiation function and compliant with IEEE802.3z. Adopt hot-swappable SFP optical interface to support a transmission distance of 550 m for multimode fiber and 10 km for single-mode fiber (or use 40 km and 70 km optical modules according to the actual condition).

Used with the ETF8, the EFT8 supports 10Base-T/100Base-TX. Used with EFF8 to support 100Base-FX, compliant with IEEE802.3u.

Support 10Base-T/100Base-TX, and comply with IEEE802.3u.

Service frame format Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, supporting 64-byte–9600-byte frames and 9600-byte Jumbo frame.

Maximum uplink bandwidth 2.5 Gbit/s

1.25 Gbit/s; Access up to 24 VC-3s or 126 VC-12s + 18 VC-3s or 63 VC-12s + 21 VC-3s

622 Mbit/s

Number of VCTRUNKs 2 16 4

Encapsulation format High level data link control (HDLC) Link access procedure-SDH (LAPS) Generic Framing Procedure-Frame Mapped (GFP-F)



7-4

Board Function EGT2 EFT8 EFT4

Mapping mode VC-3, VC-4, VC-3-Xv, and VC-4-Xv

VC-3, VC-12, VC-12-Xv (X ≤63) and VC-3-Xv (X ≤3)

VC-3, VC-12, VC-12-Xv (X ≤63) and VC-3-Xv (X ≤3)

CAR Not supported Not supported Not supported

Flow control GE port based IEEE 802.3X complaint flow control

FE port based IEEE 802.3X complaint flow control

FE port based IEEE 802.3X complaint flow control

Link capacity adjustment scheme (LCAS)

ITU-T G.7042, supporting dynamic bandwidth increase/decrease and bandwidth protection.

Link stat pass through (LPT) Support LPT, which can be enabled or disabled.

Testing frame Support receiving and transmitting Ethernet testing frame.

Ethernet performance monitoring

Support port level Ethernet performance monitoring.

Alarm and performance

Provide abundant alarms and performance events for convenient equipment management and maintenance.

7.1.2 Principle

The working principle of the EGT2, EFT8 and EFT4 is the same, except that GE signal or FE signal is processed respectively. Figure 7-1 takes a GE signal as an example to introduce the working principle of the EGT2.



7-5

Backplane

Serviceprocessing

module

Encapsulationmodule

Mappingmodule

Control andcommunication

module

Cross-connect

unit

1000 MInterfacemodule

SCC unit

+3.3 V (standby)

-48 V

1000 M

Powermodule+2.5 V

+1.5 V

+3.3 V

+1.8 V

Figure 7-1 Functional block diagram of the EGT2

1. In Receive Direction The interface module accesses 1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX signals from external Ethernet equipment (such as LAN switch and router) and performs decoding and serial/parallel conversion to the signals. Then it sends signals to the service processing module for frame delimitation, preamble field code stripping, cyclic redundancy code (CRC) termination and Ethernet performance statistics. At the encapsulation module, HDLC, LAPS or GFP-F encapsulation is done to the Ethernet frame. After that, the services are mapped into VC-3 or VC-4 at the mapping module and then sent to the cross-connect unit.

2. In Transmit Direction Demap the VC-3 or VC-4 signals from the cross-connect unit and send them to the encapsulation module for decapsulation. The service processing module determines the route according to the level of the equipment; it also provides frame delimitation, adding preamble field code, CRC calculation and performance statistics. Finally, the interface module performs parallel/serial conversion and encoding to the signals and then sends them out from the Ethernet interface.

3. Auxiliary Units Control and communication module

Implement communication, control and service configuration functions. Power module

Provide DC power supply of various voltages for the board. 7.1.3 Front Panel

The front panel of the EGT2/EFT8/EFT4/EFF8/ETF8 is shown in Figure 7-2.



7-6

STATACT

PROGSRV

CLASS 1LASER

PRODUCT

OU

T1IN

1

EGT2

EGT2

OU

T2IN

2

LINK1ACT1

ACT2LINK2

FE1

FE2

FE3

FE4

FE5

FE6

FE7

FE8

EFT8

EFT8

STATACT

PROGSRV

ETF8

ETF8

FE1FE2

FE3FE4

FE5FE6

FE7FE8

LINK ACT

12345678

EFF8

EFF8

OU

T1IN

1O

UT2

IN2

OU

T3IN

3O

UT4

IN4

OU

T5IN

5O

UT6

IN6

OU

T7IN

7O

UT8

IN8

EFT4

STATACTPROGSRV

FE1FE2

FE3FE4

EGT2 EFT8 ETF8 EFF8 EFT4

Figure 7-2 Front panel of the EGT2/EFT8/EFT4/EFF8/ETF8

1. Indicators There are four indicators on the EGT2, EFT8 and EFT4.


For detailed description of the indicators, see Appendix A. Except the above common indicators, the EGT2 has other four indicators to show port connection status. Table 7-2 shows the indicators description.



7-7

Table 7-2 Indicators of the EGT2


On GE port 1 connects with remote equipment successfully

Connection indicator–LINK1 (green) Off GE port 1 fails to connects with remote equipment

Flashing GE port 1 and remote equipment are receiving/sending data

Data receiving/sending indicator–ACT1 (orange) Off GE port 1 and remote equipment do not

receive/send data

On GE port 2 connects with remote equipment successfully

Connection indicator–LINK2 (green) Off GE port 2 fails to connects with remote equipment

Flashing GE port 2 and remote equipment are receiving/sending data


receive/send data

Each Ethernet port of the EFT8, EFT4 and ETF8 has “LINK” and “ACT” indicators near the port. The meanings of the indicators are the same as those in Table 7-2. Each Ethernet port on the front panel of the EFF8 has “LINK” and “ACT” indicators. Table 7-3 shows the indicator description. Table 7-3 Indicators of the EFF8

Indicator Status Description On Fiber-port connection succeeded. Connection indicator–LINK

(green) Off Fiber-port connection failed

Flashing Receiving/Sending data Data receiving/sending indicator–ACT (orange) Off No data received/sent

2. Interfaces Table 7-4 shows the interface description of the EGT2/EFT8/EFT4/EFF8/ETF8. Table 7-4 Interfaces of the EGT2/EFT8/EFT4/EFF8/ETF8

Board Item EGT2 EFT8 EFT4 EFF8 ETF8

Number of interfaces 2 pairs 8 4 8 8

Access capacity 2 x GE 8 x FE 4 x FE Interface board

Interface board

Connector LC RJ-45 RJ-45 LC RJ-45



7-8

Board Item EGT2 EFT8 EFT4 EFF8 ETF8

Swappable optical module Supported Not

supported Not supported

Not supported

Not supported


The parameters required by the EGT2/EFT8/EFT4 are as follows: J1

It is the path trace byte. This byte is used to transmit repetitively a Path Access Point Identifier so that a path receiving terminal can verify its continued connection to the intended transmitter. When J1 mismatch is detected at the receive end, the corresponding VC-4 path will generate the HP_TIM alarm. The J1 byte is set to “HuaWei SBS” by default.

C2 It is the signal label byte, indicating the multiplexing structure of VC-4 frame and the payload property. It is required that the C2 bytes transmitted match those received. If mismatch is detected, the corresponding VC-4 path will generate the HP_SLM alarm and insert all “1”s into the C4.

Ethernet interface setting Table 7-5 lists the major parameters to be set for the Ethernet interface of the EGT2/EFT8/EFT4. Table 7-5 Parameters for the Ethernet interface of EGT2/EFT8/EFT4


Working mode The EGT2 can be set to auto-negotiation or 1000 Mbit/s full-duplex. The EFT8/EFT4 can be set to auto-negotiation or 10/100 Mbit/s half-duplex or 10/100 Mbit/s full-duplex. Ethernet interfaces of the interconnected equipment should work under the same fixed working mode. Otherwise, the packet may be lost or the bit rate may decrease, or the service may be completely interrupted upon large volume of traffic.

LCAS enable Enable LCAS or not.

Maximum packet length

Set this item for the external port, 1522 bytes by default.

Mapping protocol Available protocols: HDLC, LAPS and GFP-F. It is preferable to select the default – GFP-F.


The EGT2 and EFT8 have N1 version only. The EGT2 and EFT8 are applicable to the OptiX the OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, or OptiX OSN1500 (A and B). The EFT4, seated in the half-height slot, has R1 version only. The EFT4 is applicable to the OptiX OSN 2500 or OptiX OSN1500 (A and B). The EFF8 and ETF8 interface boards have N1 version only. The EFF8 and ETF8 are



7-9

applicable to the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, or OptiX OSN1500 (B). 7.1.6 Technical Parameters

The technical parameters of the EGT2/EFT8/EFT4/EFF8/ETF8 are shown in Table 7-6. Table 7-6 Technical parameters of the EGT2/EFT8/EFT4/EFF8/ETF8

Description Parameter EGT2 EFT8 EFT4 ETF8/EFF8 Bit rate 1000 Mbit/s 10/100 Mbit/s 10/100 Mbit/s 10/100 Mbit/s

Processing capacity 2 x GE 16 x FE 4 x FE

8 x FE E/O interface board

Line code pattern NRZ Manchester (10 Mbit/s) or MLT-3 (100 Mbit/s)

Connector LC (SFP) RJ-45 RJ-45 E: RJ-45 O: LC


IEEE 802.3z compliant

IEEE 802.3u compliant



Dimensions (mm)

262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W)

262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W)

111.8 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W)

262.05 (H) x 110 (D) x 22 (W)

Weight (kg) 0.9 1.01 0.53 EFT8: 0.37 EFF8: 0.44


23 26 14 EFT8: 2 EFF8: 6

Optical module type

1000Base-SX

1000Base-LX

1000Base-ZX

1000Base-ZX

100Base-FX

100Base-FX

Central wavelength (nm)

850 1310 1270–1355

1480–1580

1270–1380

1261–1360

Transmission distance (km) 0–0.55 0–10 40 70 2 15

Mean launched power (dBm) –9.5 to –4 –11.5 to

–3 –2 to –5 –23 –19 to –14

–15 to –8

Optical receiver sensitivity (dBm) –17 –19 –4 to –2 –22 –30 –32





7-10

Description Parameter EGT2 EFT8 EFT4 ETF8/EFF8 Short-term operating condition






Note: The EFT8 has no optical interface. The 100 Mbit/s optical interface in this table is that of the EFF8. The 1000 Mbit/s optical interface in this table is that of the EGT2.



7-11

7.2 EGS2/EFS4/EFS0/ETF8/EFF8/ETS8

The EGS2 is a 2-port Gigabit Ethernet processing board with L2 switching. The EFS4 is a 4-port FE processing board with L2 switching. The EFS0 is a FE processing board with L2 switching. The ETF8 is an 8-port 10/100M Ethernet electrical interface board. The EFF8 is an 8-port 10/100M Ethernet optical interface board. The ETS8 is an 8-port 10/100M BaseT Ethernet interface switching board.

The Ethernet switching boards are responsible for transparent transmission, convergence and Layer 2 switching of GE/FE services. Table 7-7 shows the slots for the EGS2/EFS4/EFS0/EFF8/ETF8/ETS8 in OptiX OSN products. Table 7-7 Slots for the EGS2/EFS4/EFS0/EFF8/ETF8/ETS8

OptiX OSN product

EGS2 (Note 1)

EFS4 (Note 1)

EFS0 (Note 1) ETS8 EFF8/ETF8


Slots 1–8, 11–16

Slots 1–8, 11–16

Slots 2–5, 13–16 Slots 21, 33

Slots 19, 21, 23, 25, 29, 31, 33, 35


Slots 1–8, 11–16

Slots 1–8, 11–16

Slots 2–5, 13–16 Slots 21, 33

Slots 19, 21, 23, 25, 29, 31, 33, 35


Slots 5–8, 11–13

Slots 6–7, 12–13

Slots 1, 3, 15, 17

Slots 1, 3, 15, 17

OptiX OSN 2500 REG

Not supported

Not supported

Not supported

Not supported

Not supported

OptiX OSN 1500A Slots 12–13 Slots 12–13 Not supported

Not supported

Not supported

OptiX OSN 1500B Slots 11–13 Slots 11–13 Slots 12–13 Slots 14 Slots 14, 16

Note 1: The EGS2/EFS4/EFS0 supports bandwidth auto-sensing, adjusting uplink bandwidth automatically according to the capacity of the slot they are seated in.



7-12

7.2.1 Functionality

Board Function

EFS4 EFS0 EGS2 (Note 1)

Basic function Access and process 4 FE signals

Process 8 FE signals Access and process 2 GE signals

Used with an interface board

- Used with ETF8, the EFS0 can access 8 electrical FE signals; Used with EFF8, the EFS0 can access 8 optical FE signals; Used with ETS8, the EFS0 can provide TPS protection for 8 electrical FE signals

-


10Base-T/100Base-TX, compliant with IEEE802.3u

Used with ETF8, the EFS0 supports 10Base-T/100Base-TX; Used with EFF8 to support 100Base-FX; compliant with IEEE802.3u

1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX Ethernet optical interface; supporting auto-negotiation function and compliant with IEEE802.3z; Adopt hot-swappable SFP optical interface to support a transmission distance of 550 m for multimode fiber and 10 km for single-mode fiber (or use 40 km and 70 km optical modules according to the actual condition).

Service frame format

Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.1qTAG, supporting 64Byte–9600Byte frame, supporting 9600Byte Jumbo frame.

Maximum uplink bandwidth

622 Mbit/s 1.25 Gbit/s 2.5 Gbit/s

Number of VCTRUNKs

24 24 48

Mapping mode VC-12, VC-3, VC-4, VC-12-Xv, VC-3-Xv

VC-12, VC-3, VC-4, VC-12-Xv, VC-3-Xv

VC-12, VC-3, VC-4, VC-12-Xv, VC-3-Xv

Encapsulation format

GFP-F GFP-F GFP-F

Ethernet Private Line (EPL)

Support Port based transparent transmission and Port+VLAN based virtual private line service.



7-13

Board Function


Ethernet Virtual Private Line (EVPL)

Support EVPL, with service frame format being Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.1q TAG or Multi-protocol Label Switch (MPLS) MartiniOE. Support port or port+ VLAN based MPLS encapsulation and forward.

Ethernet Private LAN (EPLAN)

Support Layer 2 based convergence and point-to-multipoint convergence; Support Layer 2 switching, including local switching and SDH-side switching; Support self-learning of source medium access control (MAC) address. The MAC address table is 16 k and the MAC address aging time can be set and queried through T2000; support configuration of static MAC route; Support virtual bridge (VB)+VLAN based data isolation; Support creating, deleting and querying a VB. The maximum number of VBs is 32 and that of logic ports is 16 for each VB

Ethernet virtual private LAN (EVPLAN)

Support EVPLAN, in MPLS Martini OE, MPLS MartiniOP and stack VLAN frame encapsulation format.

MPLS Supported Supported Supported

Virtual local area network (VLAN)

IEEE 802.1q/p IEEE 802.1q/p IEEE 802.1q/p

VLAN convergence 4000 VLANs 4000 VLANs 4000 VLANs

Rapid spanning tree protocol (RSTP)

Support broadcast packet suppression function and RSTP, compliant with IEEE 802.1w.

IGMP Snooping Supported Supported Supported

CAR Port based or port+VLAN based, with the granularity being 64 kbit/s.

Board protection Support 1+1 backup

Traffic classification Support port based or port+VLAN based traffic classification.

LCAS (Note 1) ITU-T G.7042, achieving dynamic bandwidth increase/decrease and bandwidth protection

LPT Support LPT, which can be enabled or disabled.

Flow control Port based IEEE 802.3X compliant flow control

Testing frame Support receiving and transmitting Ethernet testing frame.

Loopback Support inloop at Ethernet port (PHY layer or MAC layer). Support inloop and outloop at VC3 level.





7-14

Board Function


Alarm and performance event


Note 1: N1EGS2 does not support LCAS function, N2EGS2 supports LCAS function.

7.2.2 Principle

The working principle of the EGS2, EFS4 and EFS0 is the same, except that GE signal or FE signal is processed respectively. Figure 7-3 shows the functional block diagram of the EGS2 (one GE signal is taken as an example).

Backplane

Serviceprocessing

module

Encapsula-tion module

Mappingmodule


module

Cross-connect unit1000 MInterface

processingmodule

SCC

+3.3 V（Standby）

-48 V

1000 M

Powermodule+2.7 V

+5 V

+3.3 V

Cross-connect unit

Figure 7-3 Functional block diagram of the EGS2

1. In Receive Direction The interface processing module accesses 1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX signals from external Ethernet equipments (such as Ethernet switch and router) and performs decoding and serial/parallel conversion to the signals. Then, the signals are sent to the service processing module for frame delimitation, preamble field code stripping, cyclic redundancy code (CRC) termination and Ethernet performance statistics. In addition, traffic classification is performed according to the service type and configuration requirement (message formats MPLS, Layer 2 MPLS VPN and Ethernet/VLAN are supported), and Tunnel and VC double labels are added according to the service for mapping and transfer. At the encapsulation module, the GFP-F encapsulation is performed to the Ethernet frame. After that, the services are mapped into VC-4, VC-3 or VC-12 at the mapping module and then sent to the cross-connect unit.

2. In Transmit Direction The VC-4, VC-3 or VC-12 signals from the cross-connect unit are demapped and sent



7-15

to the encapsulation module for decapsulation. The service processing module determines the route according to the level of the equipment, and performs traffic classification according to the service type and configuration requirement. Also, frame delimitation, adding preamble field code, CRC calculation and performance statistics are performed by the service processing module. Finally, the signals are sent out from the Ethernet interface after parallel/serial conversion and encoding at interface processing module.




The front panel of the EGS2/EFS4/EFS0/ETS8 is shown in Figure 7-4.

STATACT

PROGSRV

CLASS 1LASER

PRODUCT

OU

T1IN

1

EGS2

EGS2

OU

T2IN2

LINK1ACT1

ACT2LINK2

STATACTPROGSRV

EFS0

EFS0

STATACTPROGSRV

EFS4

EFS4

FE1

FE2

FE3

FE4

ETS8

ETS8

FE1FE2

FE3FE4

FE5FE6

FE7FE8

EGS2 EFS0 EFS4 ETS8

Figure 7-4 Front panel of the EGS2/EFS4/EFS0/ETS8



7-16

1. Indicators There are four indicators on the EGS2, EFS4 and EFS0.


For detailed description of the indicators, see Appendix A. Except the above common indicators, the EGS2 has other four indicators to show port connection. Table 7-8 shows the description of the indicators on the EGS2. Table 7-8 Indicators of the EGS2


On GE port 1 connects with remote equipment successfully.

Connection indicator–LINK1 (green) Off GE port 1 fails to connect with remote equipment.

Flashing GE port 1 and remote equipment are receiving/sending data.


receive/send data.





receive/send data.

Each Ethernet port of the EFS4, EFS0 and ETS8 has “LINK” and “ACT” indicators. The meanings of the indicators are the same as those of the EGS2. For indicator description of the interface board, see section 7.1.3.

2. Interfaces Table 7-9 shows the interface description of EGS2, EFS4, EFS0, and ETS8. Table 7-9 Interfaces of EGS2/EFS4/EFS0/ETS8

Board Item

EGS2 EFS4 EFS0 ETS8

Number of interfaces

2 pairs 4 pairs 0 8 pairs

Processing capacity

2 x GE 4 x FE 8 x FE Ethernet interface switching board

Connector LC RJ-45 None RJ-45



7-17

Board Item

EGS2 EFS4 EFS0 ETS8

Swappable optical module

Supported Not supported Not supported

Not supported


The EFS0 is used with the ETS8 and TSB8 to implement 1:1 TPS protection for FE electrical services. Table 7-10 shows the TPS protection of the EFS0. Table 7-10 TPS protection of the EFS0

OptiX OSN product TPS protection Configuration



Support two groups of 1:1 TPS.

The board in slot 2 protects the board in slot 3. The board in slot 16 protects the board in slot 15.

OptiX OSN 2500 Support one group of 1:1 TPS.

The board in slot 13 protects the board in slot 12.

OptiX OSN 2500 REG Not supported -

OptiX OSN 1500A Not supported -

OptiX OSN 1500B Support one group of 1:1 TPS.

The board in slot 12 protects the board in slot 13.

1. Board Configuration of the OptiX OSN 3500 The slot configuration of the working board and protect board in the OptiX OSN 3500 is shown in Figure 7-5.



7-18

SLOT1

SLOT2

SLOT3

SLOT4

SLOT5

SLOT6

SLOT7

SLOT8

SLOT9

SLOT10

SLOT11

SLOT12

SLOT13

SLOT14

SLOT15

SLOT16

SLOT17

SLOT18

SLOT19

SLOT20

SLOT21

SLOT22

SLOT23

SLOT24

SLOT25

SLOT26

SLOT27

SLOT28

SLOT29

SLOT30

SLOT31

SLOT32

SLOT33

SLOT34

SLOT35

SLOT36

SLOT37

FAN FANFAN

Fiber routing

XCS

XCS

Working 2

Protection 2

Protection 1

Working 1

TSB

8

TSB

8

ETS

8

ETS

8

SC

CA

UX

PIU

PIU

Figure 7-5 Board distribution upon 1:1 TPS protection of the OptiX OSN 3500

In Figure 7-5, slot 2 protects slot 3, and slot 16 protects slot 15. The slot assignment of the EFS0, ETS8 and TSB8 is shown in Table 7-11. Table 7-11 Slot assignment of the EFS0, ETS8 and TSB8 in the OptiX OSN 3500


EFS0 (protect board) Slot 2 Slot 16

EFS0 (working board) Slot 3 Slot 15


ETS8 Slot 21 Slot 33

2. Board Configuration of the OptiX OSN 2500 The slot configuration of the working board and protect board in the OptiX OSN 2500 is shown in Figure 7-6.



7-19

Fiber routing

SLOT9

SLOT10

SLOT13

SLOT14

SLOT12

SLOT8

SLOT11

PIU(Slot 22)

PIU(Slot 23)

FAN(Slot 25)

FAN(Slot 24)

SLOT5

SLOT6

SLOT7

SLOT15

SLOT16

SLOT17

SLOT18

SLOT4

SLOT3

SLOT2

SLOT1

CXL

16

CXL

16

SAP

EFS0

(W)

EFS0

(P)

ETS8

TSB

8

Figure 7-6 Board configuration upon 1:1 TPS protection of the OptiX OSN 2500

Slot 13 protects slot 12. The ETS8 seated in slot 15 is used with the working EFS0 and the TSB8 seated in slot 17 is used with the protect EFS0.

3. Board Configuration of the OptiX OSN 1500 B The slot configuration of the working board and protect board in the OptiX OSN 1500B is shown in Figure 7-7.

Slot 14 Slot 18 PIU

Slot 15

Slot 16

Slot 17

Slot 20

FAN

Slot 1

Slot 2

Slot 3

Slot 4

Slot 19 PIU

Slot 6

Slot 7

Slot 8

Slot 9

Slot 10 AUX Slot 5

TSB8

ETS8

EFS0 (P)

EFS0 (W)

CXL16/4/1

CXL16/4/1

EOW

Slot 11

Slot 12

Slot 13

Figure 7-7 Board distribution upon 1:1 TPS protection of the OSN 1500

Slot 12 protects slot 13. The ETS8 seated in slot 16 is used with the working EFS0 and the TSB8 seated in slot 14 is used with the protect EFS0.


The major parameters required by the EGS2, EFS4 and EFS0 are as follows: J1


C2



7-20

It is the signal label byte, indicating the multiplexing structure of VC-4 frame and the payload property. It is required that the C2 bytes transmitted match those received. If mismatch is detected, the corresponding VC-4 path will generate the HP_SLM alarm and insert all “1”s into the C4.

Ethernet interface setting Table 7-12 lists the major parameters to be set for the Ethernet interface on the EGS2, EFS4 and EFS0. Table 7-12 Parameters for the Ethernet interface on the EGS2/EFS4/EFS0


Tag flag Tag flag is used to identify the type of packets. Three types of TAG flags are available: tag aware, access, and hybrid. (1) When the port is set to be tag aware, the port transmits packets with the Tag flag transparently and discards those without the Tag flag. (2) When the port is set to be access, the port attaches a Tag flag to the packets without Tag flag according to its VLAN ID and discards those with the Tag flag. (3) When the port is set to be hybrid, the port can process packets regardless of the Tag flag, and attach a Tag flag to the packets without the Tag flag according to its VLAN ID.

VLAN ID VLAN ID of the port.

Working mode The EGS2 can be set to auto-negotiation or 1000 Mbit/s full-duplex. The EFS4 and EFS0 can be set to auto-negotiation, 10 Mbit/s half-duplex, 10 Mbit/s full duplex, 100 Mbit/s half duplex or 100 Mbit/s full-duplex. The Ethernet interfaces of the interconnected equipment should work under the same fixed working mode. Otherwise, the packet may be lost and the bit rate may decrease, or the service may be completely interrupted upon large volume of traffic.

Port type There are two types: P and PE. Provider edge (PE) is the marginal port of the service provider. Provider (P) is the core network port of the service provider. Port type is needed when configuring EVPL and EVPLAN services.

LCAS enable Enable LCAS or not.



Mapping protocol It is preferable to select the default – GFP-F mapping protocol.


The EGS2, EFS4 and EFS0 have two versions: N1 and N2. N1 is the basic one. In this version, the uplink bandwidth at the SDH side is half that in N2 version. The functions and parameters of N2 version are listed in this section. Table 7-13 shows the version description of the EGS2, EFS4 and EFS0.



7-21

Table 7-13 N1 and N2 EGS2/EFS4/EFS0 boards

Item Description Similarity The working principle and functions of N1 and N2 boards are the same.

Difference

In N1 version, the uplink bandwidth at the SDH side is half that in N2 version. The N1EFSO and the N2EFSO boards are the same in hardware and are different in software. The hardware of the N1EGS2 is different from that of the N2EGS2. The N1EGS2 board does not support LCAS, LPT, RSTP, IGMP Snooping, MPLS (including QinQ), link aggregation (802.3ad), and port rate query function.

NM support The T2000 differentiates N1 from N2.

V100R001 products only support N1 Ethernet processing boards. If N2 boards are inserted, the T2000 takes the board as N1 version by default and uses the boards as N1 boards.

V100R002 products support N1 and N2 Ethernet processing boards. When the T2000 uploads board configuration, all Ethernet processing boards (N1 or N2) are displayed as N1 boards by default. At this time, the boards are used as N1 boards. If you need to use N2 boards, select and configure N2 boards manually. The T2000 can upgrade N1 software to N2 software.

Product support


For any product version, the board software can be upgraded from N1 to N2.

Replacement

The N1 boards are only used as N1 boards. For V100R002 and V100R003 products, N2 boards can be used as either N1 boards (displayed as N1 boards on the T2000) or N2 boards (displayed as N2 boards on the T2000). When N2 boards are used as N1 boards, the boards can be upgraded to N2 boards by deleting the original board and adding an N2 board. During the upgrade, services will be interrupted.

The EGS2, EFS4 and EFS0 are applicable to the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, and OptiX OSN1500 (A and B). The ETS8 has only one version. It is applicable to the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, and OptiX OSN1500B.


The technical parameters of the EGS2/EFS4/EFS0/ETS8 are shown in Table 7-14.



7-22

Table 7-14 Technical parameters of EGS2/EFS4/EFS0/ETS8

Description Parameter EGS2 EFS4 EFS0 ETS8

Bit rate 1000 Mbit/s 100 Mbit/s

Access capacity

2 x GE 4 x FE 0 8 x FE Ethernet interface switching board

Processing capacity

2 x GE 4 x FE 8 x FE 0

Line code pattern

NRZ Manchester (10 Mbit/s) or MLT-3 (100 Mbit/s)

Connector LC (SFP) RJ-45 None RJ-45

Interface impedance

- 100 ohm - 100 ohm


IEEE 802.3z compliant


Optical module type

1000Base-SX 1000Base-LX 1000Base-ZX 1000Base-ZX

Central wavelength (nm)

850 1310 1270–1355 1480–1580


0–0.55 0–10 40 70

Mean launched power (dBm)

–9.5 to –4 –11.5 to –3 –2 to 5 –23


–17 –19 –4 to 2 –22

Dimensions (mm)

262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W)

262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W)

262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W)

262.05 (H) x 110 (D) x 22 (W)

Weight (kg) 1.04 0.98 0.98 0.37


40/43.2 30 35 2.5







7-23

Description Parameter EGS2 EFS4 EFS0 ETS8





Note: The 1000 Mbit/s optical interface in this table is that of the EGS2.



7-24

7.3 EMR0/EGR2

The EMR0 is a 12 FE + 1 GE Ethernet board with RPR function. The EGR2 is a 2-port GE processing board with RPR function.

The EMR0 and EGR2 are responsible for accessing and processing Ethernet signals, and constructing resilient packet ring (RPR). Table 7-15 shows the slots for the EMR0 and EGR2 in OptiX OSN products. Table 7-15 Slots for the EMR0 and EGR2

Product EMR0 (led out from front panel)

EMR0 (used with interface board) EGR2

OptiX OSN 3500 (80 Gbit/s) Slots 1–6, 13–16 Slots 2–3, 13–16 Slots 1–8, 11–16

OptiX OSN 3500 (40 Gbit/s) Slots 1–6, 13–16 Slots 2–3, 13–16 Slots 1–8, 11–16


OptiX OSN 2500 REG Not supported Not supported Not supported

OptiX OSN 1500A Slots 12–13 Not supported Slots 12–13


Note: The EMR0 and EGR2 support bandwidth auto-sensing, adjusting uplink bandwidth automatically according to the capacity of the slot they are seated in.

Note: For the OptiX OSN 3500, if SDH cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s, the maximum uplink bandwidth of slots 6–8 and slots 11–13 is 2.5 Gbit/s and that of other slots is 622 Mbit/s. If the SDH cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s, the maximum uplink bandwidth of slots 5–8 and slots 11–14 is 2.5 Gbit/s and that of other slots is 1.25 Gbit/s. For the OptiX OSN 2500, the maximum uplink bandwidth of slots 5–6 is 622 Mbit/s, that of slots 7, 8, 11, 12 is 2.5 Gbit/s, and that of slot 13 is 1.25 Gbit/s.

7.3.1 Functionality

Board Function

EMR0 EGR2

Basic function Process 12 FE signals and 1 GE signals. Support RPR.

Access and process 2 GE signals. Support RPR.



7-25

Board Function

EMR0 EGR2

Used with interface board

Provide 4 FE ports and 1 GE port. Used with the ETF8, the EMR0 can access 12 electrical FE signals. Used with the EFF8, the EMR0 can access 8 optical FE signals.

-


Used with the ETF8, the EMR0 supports 10Base-T/100Base-TX over a transmission distance of up to 100 m. Used with the EFF8, the EMR0 supports 100Base-FX. Comply with IEEE802.3u.

1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX Ethernet optical interface, supporting auto-negotiation and compliant with IEEE802.3z. Adopt hot-swappable SFP optical interface to support a transmission distance of 550 m for multimode fiber and 10 km for single-mode fiber (or use 40 km and 70 km optical modules according to the actual condition).

Service frame format

MPLS, supporting 64Byte–9600Byte frame and 9600Byte Jumbo frame


2.5 Gbit/s 2.5 Gbit/s

Mapping mode VC-3, VC-3-2v, VC-4, VC-4-Xv (X≤8)


GFP-F: compliant with ITU-T G.7041 LAPS: compliant with ITU-T X.86

Ethernet private line (EPL)

Support port-base transparent transmission and port+VLAN virtual private line service.

Ethernet virtual private line (EVPL)

Support EVPL with service frame format being Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.1q TAG or Multi-protocol label switch (MPLS) Martini frame. Support port-based or port+VLAN-based MPLS encapsulation and forward; Support five types of label switch path (LSP): ingress LSP, egress LSP, transit LSP, RPR ingress LSP, and RPR transit LSP. Support 2000 LSPs.



7-26

Board Function

EMR0 EGR2

Ethernet virtual private LAN (EVPLAN)

Support EVPLAN service in stack VLAN or Martini frame encapsulation format. Support self-learning of MAC address. The MAC address table has 64,000 entries k and the MAC address aging time can be set and queried through T2000. Support configuration of up to 4000 static MAC routes. Support virtual bridge (VB)+VLAN based data isolation. Support creating, deleting and querying a VB. The maximum number of VBs is 16 and that of logic ports is 32 for each VB.

MPLS Support MPLS frame format to construct EVPL and EVPLAN services. Support 4000 MPLS labels.

Virtual local area network (VLAN)

IEEE 802.1q/p IEEE 802.1q/p

VLAN convergence Support 4000 VLANs. Support 4000 VLANs.

VLAN switching Support VLAN tag switching. Support VLAN tag switching.

Port aggregation Support the aggregation of up to 12 FE ports.

-

RPR feature Supported and compliant with IEEE 802.17.

Supported and compliant with IEEE 802.17.

RPR function Support up to 255 nodes and destination node stripping. Support weighted fair algorithm. Support fiver priority levels: A0, A1, B_EIR, B_CIR and C. Provide auto discovery of topology to show the network status in real time. Support protection modes of steering, wrapping and wrapping + steering. The signal fail time is less than 50ms. Support configuring service route on RPRs manually. Support self-learning function, that is, learning the correspondence between MAC address and node number.

Rapid spanning tree protocol (RSTP)

Support broadcast packet suppression function and RSTP, compliant with IEEE 802.1w.

IGMP snooping Supported

CAR Port based or port+VLAN based, with the granularity being 64 kbit/s, ranging from 64 kbit/s to 100 Mbit/s. 2000 CARs are supported.

Traffic classification Support port-based ,port+VLAN and port + VLAN + PRI based traffic classification.



7-27

Board Function

EMR0 EGR2

LCAS ITU-T G.7042, supporting dynamic bandwidth increase/decrease and bandwidth protection.

Flow control Port based IEEE 802.3X compliant flow control.

Echo test frame Support the Echo function in RPR OAM which tests the link status.

Loopback Support inloop at Ethernet port (at PHY layer or MAC layer). Support inloop and outloop at VC-3 level.





7.3.2 Principle

The working principle of the EMR0 is the same as that of the EGR2, except that GE signal or FE signal is processed respectively. Figure 7-8 shows the functional block diagram (one 10 Mbit/s/100 Mbit/s signal is taken as an example).

Backplane

Ethernetprocessing

module

RPRprocessing

module

Encapsu-lationand

mappingmodule

Communicationand control

module

Cross-connectunit

10/100Mbit/s

Interfacemodule

SCCunit

+3.3 V (standby)

-48 V

10/100Mbit/s

Powermodule+2.7 V

+5 V

+3.3 V

Cross-connectunit

Figure 7-8 Functional block diagram of the EMR0

1. In Receive Direction The interface processing module accesses a 10/100Base-TX/100Base-FX signal from external Ethernet equipment (such as the Ethernet switch and router) and performs decoding and serial/parallel conversion to the signal. Then, the signal is sent to the service processing module for frame delimitation, preamble field code stripping, cyclic redundancy check (CRC) termination and Ethernet performance statistics. In



7-28

addition, traffic classification, Layer 2 switching, convergence, MPLS frame processing, RPR inner ring and outer ring mapping are performed according to service type and configuration requirement. The RPR processing module performs IEEE 802.17 based ring network control function. In the encapsulation module, LAPS or GFP-F encapsulation of Ethernet frame is completed. Finally, the signal is mapped into VC-3-Xv or VC-4-Xv at the mapping module and then sent to the cross-connect unit.

2. In Transmit Direction The VC-3-Xv or VC-4-Xv signal from the cross-connect unit is demapped and sent to the encapsulation module for decapsulation. In the RPR processing module, IEEE 802.17 based ring network control function is performed. The service processing module determines the route according to the level of the equipment, and performs traffic classification according to the service type and configuration requirement. Also, frame delimitation, adding preamble field code, CRC calculation and performance statistics are performed by the service processing module. Finally, the signal is sent out from the Ethernet interface after parallel/serial conversion and encoding at the interface processing module.




Figure 7-9 shows the front panel of the EMR0 and EGR2.



7-29

STATACTPROGSRV

CLASS 1LASER

PRODUCT

OU

T1IN

1

FE1

FE2

FE3

FE4

EMR0

EMR0

LINKACT

STATACT

PROGSRV

CLASS 1LASER

PRODUCT

OU

T1IN

1

EGR2

EGR2

OU

T2IN

2

LINK1ACT1

ACT2LINK2

EMR0 EGR2

Figure 7-9 Front panel of the EMR0 and EGR2

1. Indicators The EGR2 has six board indicators and the EMR0 has eight board indicators as follows:

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) – double colors (red, green) Service active status indicator (ACT) – green Board software status indicator (PROG) – double colors (red, green) Service alarm indicator (SRV) – three colors (red, green, yellow) Connection indicator (LINK1/2) – green Data receiving/sending indicator (ACT1/2) – orange

For detailed description of the indicators, see Appendix A. The four indicators of the EGR2 indicating port connection are described in Table 7-16. The LINK and ACT indicators on the EMR0 indicating GE optical interface connection status, as described in Table 7-16.



7-30

Table 7-16 Indicators of the EGR2






receive/send data.





receive/send data.

Each FE port on the front panel of the EMR0 also has “LINK” and “ACT” indicators. The meanings of the indicators are the same as those of the EGR2.

2. Interfaces Table 7-17 shows the interface description of the EMR0 and EGR2. Table 7-17 Interfaces of EMR0 and EGR2

BoardItem EMR0 EGR2

Number of interfaces 1 pair of GE optical interfaces + 4 FE electrical interfaces

2 pairs of GE optical interfaces

Connector GE: LC (SFP) FE: R-J45

GE: LC (SFP)

Swappable optical module Supported Supported


The parameters required by the EMR0 and EGR2 are as follows: J1




7-31


Ethernet interface setting Table 7-18 lists the major parameters to be set for the Ethernet interface on the EMR0 and EGR2. Table 7-18 Parameters for the Ethernet interface on the EMR0 and EGR2


Tag flag Tag flag is used to identify the type of packets. Three types of TAG flags are available: tag aware, access, and hybrid. (1) When the port is set to be tag aware, the port transmits packets with the Tag flag transparently and discards those without the Tag flag. (2) When the port is set to be access, the port attaches a Tag flag to the packets without Tag flag according to its VLAN ID and discards those with the Tag flag. (3) When the port is set to be hybrid, the port can process packets regardless of the Tag flag, and attach a Tag flag to the packets without the Tag flag according to its VLAN ID.

VLAN ID Set VLAN ID for external port only.

Working mode

The GE interface can be set to auto-negotiation or 1000 Mbit/s full-duplex. The FE interface can be set to auto-negotiation, 10 Mbit/s half-duplex, 10 Mbit/s full duplex, 100 Mbit/s half duplex or 100 Mbit/s full-duplex. The Ethernet interfaces of the interconnected equipment should work in the same fixed working mode. Otherwise, the packet may be lost, or the bit rate may decrease, or the service may be completely interrupted upon large volume of traffic.

Port type There are two types: P and PE. Provider edge (PE) is the marginal port of the service provider. Provider (P) is the core network port of the service provider. Set the external port to PE and internal port to P.


Multiple encapsulation formats are available: MartinioE, CCCoE, stack VLAN, and MartinioP. This attribute takes effective for a P port. MartinioE is applicable for point-to-multipoint Ethernet connection, MartinioP for point-to-point Ethernet connection and stack VLAN for EVPLAN service.

Enable LCAS Enable LCAS or not



Mapping protocol

LAPS and GFP-F are available. GFP-F is recommended.



7-32


The EMR0 and EGR2 boards have N1 version and N2 version. N1 version is the basic version. N2 version is the enhanced version, having some new functions compared with N1 version. The functions and parameters listed in this section are applicable to the boards of N2 version. Table 7-19 gives the version description of the two versions. Table 7-19 Version description of the EMR0 and the EGR2

Item Description

Similarity The two versions are similar in the working principle and basic function. N2 version provides some new functions besides all functions of N1 version.

N1 version N2 version

– Support the aggregation of up to 12 FE ports.

– Support the replacement of the VLAN tag in Ethernet data.

Support EVPLAN services, using stack VLAN encapsulation format.

Support EVPLAN services, using MPLS Martini encapsulation format.

Support the MAC address with 16,000 entries.

Support the MAC address with 64,000 entries.

Support the creating, deleting and query of VB. There can be 32 VBs and 16 logic ports for each VB at most.

Support the creating, deleting and query of VB. There can be 16 VBs and 32 logic ports for each VB at most.

– Support configuring service routes on RPR manually.

Difference

– Support the Echo function in RPR OAM which tests the link status.

NM support The T2000 distinguish the boards of N1 version and that of N2 version directly.

The V100R001 product only supports the RPR board of N1 version.

The V100R002 product supports the RPR board of N1 or N2 version.

Product support

The V100R003 product supports the Ethernet board of N1 or N2 version.

Replacement Boards of N1 version can only be used as boards of N1 version. To the V100R002 or V100R003 product, boards of N2 version can replace the ones of N1 version.

The EMR0 and the EGR2 are applicable to the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, and OptiX OSN1500 (A and B).



7-33


Table 7-20 shows the technical parameters of the EMR0 and EGR2. For the parameters of GE and FE optical interface, refer to Table 7-14. Table 7-20 Technical Parameters of the EMR0 and EGR2

BoardParameter EMR0 EGR2

Bit rate 10/100 Mbit/s, 1000 Mbit/s 1000 Mbit/s

Access capacity

4 x 10 Mbit/s/100 Mbit/s and 1 x 1000 Mbit/s; 12 x 10 Mbit/s/100 Mbit/s and 1 x 1000 Mbit/s when used with ETF8 or EFF8

2 x 1000 Mbit/s

Processing capacity 12 x 10 Mbit/s/100 Mbit/s and 1 x 1000 Mbit/s 2 x 1000 Mbit/s

Line code pattern Manchester (10 Mbit/s) or MLT-3 (100 Mbit/s), NRZ NRZ

Connector RJ-45, LC (SFP) LC (SFP)

Interface impedance 100 ohm –

Interface specificationsFE interface comply with IEEE802.3u and GE interface comply with IEEE802.3z

IEEE802.3z compliant

Dimensions (mm) 262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W) 262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W)

Weight (kg) 1.20 1.10

Power consumption (W) 50 54






Temperature: –5°C to 50°CHumidity: 5%–95%









7-34

7.4 ADL4/ADQ1

The ADL4 is a 1 x STM-4 ATM service processing board. The ADQ1 is a 4 x STM-1 ATM service processing board. The ADL4 and ADQ1 are responsible for accessing and processing ATM service. Table 7-21 shows the slots for the ADL4 and ADQ1 in OptiX OSN products. Table 7-21 Slots for the ADL4 and ADQ1

Product ADL4 ADQ1




OptiX OSN 2500 REG Not supported Not supported



7.4.1 Functionality

Board Function

ADL4 ADQ1

Basic function Access and process 1 STM-4 ATM signal.

Access and process 4 STM-1 ATM signal.

Optical Interface specifications

Support S-4.1, L-4.1. Support I-1, S-1.1, and L-1.1.

Connector Hot-swappable LC (SFP) Hot-swappable LC (SFP)

E3 ATM interface 12 × E3, inserted through PD3/PL3

12 × E3, inserted through PD3/PL3


8 VC4, or 12 VC3 + 4 VC4 8 VC4, or 12 VC3 + 4 VC4

ATM switching capacity


Mapping mode VC3, VC4 or VC4-Xv (X=1–4) VC3, VC4 or VC4-Xv (X=1–4)

Service type CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR, or UBR CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR, or UBR

ATM connection 8000 8000

Statistics multiplexing Supported Supported

Traffic type and QoS IETF RFC2514 IETF RFC2514

ATM multicast connection

Spacial multicast, logic multicast Spacial multicast, logic multicast



7-35

Board Function

ADL4 ADQ1

ATM protection (ITU-T I.630)

Unidirectional/bidirectional 1+1 and 1:1, VP-Ring, VC-Ring


Board protection Support 1+1 backup Support 1+1 backup

OAM function (ITU-T I.610)

AIS, RDI, LB (Loopback), CC (continuity check)

AIS, RDI, LB, CC

Maintenance Support inloop and outloop at optical interface level and ATM layer level for maintenance and fault localization.

Alarm and performance

Provide abundant alarms and performance events for maintenance and fault location.

7.4.2 Principle

Figure 7-10 shows the functional block diagram of the ADL4 and ADQ1 (one STM-1/STM-4 signal is taken as an example).

Backplane

Physicallayer

processingmodule

ATMservice

processingmodule

Mappingmodule


module

Cross-connectunit

Cross-connectunit

STM-1/STM-4

SCC

+3.3 V(Standby)

-48 VPowermodule

+5 V

+3.3 V

STM-1/STM-4

Figure 7-10 Functional block diagram of the ADL4 and ADQ1

1. In Receive Direction The STM-1/STM-4 signal accessed from the optical interface is sent to the physical layer processing module after O/E conversion. After recovering data and clock, the physical layer processing module performs SDH functions such as framing, descrambling, overhead processing and pointer processing. In addition, it performs the functions of ATM cell delimitation, descrambling and filtering. The ATM service processing module establishes or disconnects connection for ATM service, and sends ATM service to the mapping module after parameter configuration. The mapping



7-36

module maps ATM service to VC3, VC4 and VC4-Xv, and finally sends the service to the cross-connect unit.

2. In Transmit Direction The VC-3 (E3), VC-4 or VC4-Xv signal from the cross-connect unit is sent to the mapping module for demapping, and then to the ATM service processing module for establishing or disconnecting connection as well as configuring parameters. The uplink service is sent to the mapping module after being processed by the ATM service processing module, and then sent to the cross-connect unit. The downlink service is directly sent to the physical layer processing module for service rate matching, insertion of idle cell, and cell descrambling, and then for SDH mapping, overhead insertion, multiplexing and scrambling. Finally, the signal is sent out after E/O conversion.




Figure 7-11 shows the front panel of the ADL4 and ADQ1.l



7-37

ADL4

ADL4

OU

T1IN

1

STATACTPROGSRV

CLASS 1LASER

PRODUCT

ADQ1

ADQ1

OU

T1IN

1O

UT2

IN2

OU

T3IN

3O

UT4

IN4

STATACTPROGSRV

CLASS 1LASER

PRODUCT

ADL4 ADQ1

Figure 7-11 Front panel of the ADL4 and ADQ1

1. Indicators There are four indicators on the ADL4 and ADQ1.



2. Interfaces Number of optical interfaces: The ADL4 has one pair and the ADQ1 has four pairs of optical interfaces. Optical interface type: LC Security: The optical interfaces incline down. The ADL4 and ADQ1 use swappable optical module for convenient maintenance.



7-38


The ADL4 and ADQ1 support 1+1 board level protection. The 1+1 board level protection for the ADL4 and the ADQ1 requires the working and protection ADL4/ADQ1 boards. The working and protection boards do not require seating in paired slots.


The parameters required by the ADL4 and ADQ1 are as follows: J1



ATM interface setting Table 7-22 lists the major parameters to be set for the ATM port of the ADL4/ADQ1. Table 7-22 Parameters for the ATM port of the ADL4/ADQ1


Port type NNI and UNI. UNI is the default value.

Traffic type Set according to the port.

Service type CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR, UBR

Peak cell rate (PCR) Set the parameter for all types of services.

Sustainable cell rate (SCR)

Set the parameter when the service type is rt-VBR or nrt-VBR.

Maximum cell burst size


Cell delay variation tolerance (CDVT)

Set the parameter when the service type is CBR, rt-VBR or UBR.



7-39


The ADL4 and ADQ1 have one version: N1. They are applicable to the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500 and OptiX OSN1500 (A and B).


Table 7-23 shows the technical parameters of the ADL4 and ADQ1. Table 7-23 Technical parameters of the ADL4 and ADQ1

Description Parameter ADL4 ADQ1


Access capacity 1 x STM-4 4 x STM-1

ATM processing capacity

1.2 Gbit/s

Line code pattern NRZ

Connector LC (SFP)

Dimensions (nm)

262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W)

H

WD

Weight (kg) 0.9 0.95


35 37

Optical module type S-4.1 L-4.1 I-1 S-1.1 L-1.1

Wavelength (nm) 1310 1310 1310 1310 1310

Transmission distance

2–15 15–40 2–15 2–15 15–40


–15 to –8 –3 to 2 –15 to –8 –15 to –8 –5 to 0


–28 –28 –23 –28 –34


–8 –8 –8 –8 –10









7-40

Description Parameter ADL4 ADQ1



7.5 IDL4/IDQ1

The IDL4 is a 1 x STM-4 ATM service processing board with IMA. The IDQ1 is a 4 x STM-1 ATM service processing board with IMA. The IDL4 and IDQ1 can access and process 63×E1 inverse multiplexing ATM (IMA) services if used with the E1 service processing board. Table 7-24 shows the slots for the IDL4 and IDQ1. Table 7-24 Slots for the IDL4 and IDQ1

Product IDL4 IDQ1







7.5.1 Functionality

Board Function

IDL4 IDQ1

Basic function Access and process 1 STM-4 ATM signal.

Access and process 4 STM-1 ATM signal.


Support S-4.1, L-4.1. Support I-1, S-1.1, and L-1.1.

Connector Hot-swappable LC (SFP) Hot-swappable LC (SFP)

E3 ATM interface 12 x E3, inserted through PD3/PL3

12 x E3, inserted through PD3/PL3


8 VC4, or 12 VC3 + 4 VC4 8 VC4, or 12 VC3 + 4 VC4

ATM switching capacity


Mapping mode VC3, VC4 or VC4-Xv (X=1–4)

VC3, VC4 or VC4-Xv (X=1–4)



7-41

Board Function

IDL4 IDQ1

IMA feature Access and process IMA service when used with the E1 service processing board. Process 63 x E1 IMA services. Support up to 32 IMA groups, 1–32 E1 for each group. The maximum multipath delay is 226ms.

Service type CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR, or UBR

ATM connection 8000

Statistics multiplexing

Supported

Traffic type and QoS

IETF RFC2514

ATM multicast connection

Spacial multicast, logic multicast

ATM protection (ITU-T I.630)


Board protection Support 1+1 backup

OAM function (ITU-T I.610)

AIS, RDI,loopback (LB),continuity check (CC)

Maintenance Support inloop and outloop at optical interface level and ATM layer level for maintenance and fault localization



7.5.2 Principle

The working principle of the IDL4 and IDQ1 is similar to that of the ADL4 and ADQ1, except that IMA processing is added to the ATM processing module. For the workings of the IDL4 and IDQ1, refer to Figure 7-10.

7.5.3 Front Panel

Figure 7-11 shows the front panel of the IDL4 and IDQ1.l



7-42

IDL4

IDL4O

UT1

IN1

STATACTPROGSRV

CLASS 1LASER

PRODUCT

IDQ1

IDQ1

OU

T1IN

1O

UT2

IN2

OU

T3IN

3O

UT4

IN4

STATACTPROGSRV

CLASS 1LASER

PRODUCT

IDL4 IDQ1

Figure 7-12 Front panel of the IDL4 and IDQ1

1. Indicators There are four indicators on the IDL4 and IDQ1.



2. Interfaces Number of optical interfaces: The IDL4 has one pair and the IDQ1 has four pairs of optical interfaces. Optical interface type: LC Security: The optical interfaces incline down. The IDL4 and IDQ1 use swappable optical module for convenient maintenance.



7-43


The IDL4 and IDQ1 support 1+1 board level protection. The working and protection IDL4/IDQ1 boards should seat in paired slots. Table 7-25 lists the paired slots for the IDL4 and the IDQ1. Table 7-25 Paired slots for the IDL4 and the IDQ1

Product Paired slots

OptiX OSN 3500 (80Gbit/s) (8&11), (7&12), (6&13), (5&14), (4&15), (3&16), (2&17)

OptiX OSN 3500 (40Gbit/s) (8&11), (7&12), (6&13), (5&14), (4&15), (3&16)

OptiX OSN 2500 (8&11), (7&12)

OptiX OSN 1500A (13&12)

OptiX OSN 1500B (13&12)


The parameters required by the IDL4 and IDQ1 are as follows: J1



ATM interface setting Table 7-26 lists the major parameters to be set for the ATM interface on the IDL4/IDQ1. Table 7-26 Parameters for the ATM interface on the IDL4/IDQ1


Port type NNI and UNI. UNI is the default value.

Traffic type Set according to the port.

Service type CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR, UBR

Peak cell rate (PCR) Set the parameter for all types of services.

Sustainable cell rate (SCR)


Maximum cell burst size




7-44


Cell delay variation tolerance (CDVT)

Set the parameter when the service type is CBR, rt-VBR or UBR.


The IDL4 and IDQ1 have one version: N1. They are applicable to the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, and OptiX OSN1500 (A and B).


Table 7-27 shows the technical parameters of the IDL4 and IDQ1. Table 7-27 Technical parameters of the IDL4 and IDQ1

Description Parameter IDL4 IDQ1


Access capacity 1 x STM-4 4 x STM-1

ATM processing capacity

1.2 Gbit/s

IMA processing capacity

Process 63 E1s (provide 63 PHY addresses), and support 32 IMA groups. Number of E1s within an IMA group is configurable, which can be 1–32. Support configurable IMA frame length. Support IMA1.1 protocol. The maximum multipath delay is 226ms.


Connector LC (SFP)

Dimensions (nm)

262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W)

H

WD

Weight (kg) 1.01 1.01


36.6 36.6

Optical module type

S-4.1 L-4.1 I-1 S-1.1 L-1.1

Wavelength (nm) 1310 1310 1310 1310 1310

Transmission distance

2–15 15–40 2–15 2–15 15–40


–15 to –8 –3 to 2 –15 to –8 –15 to –8 –5 to 0


–28 –28 –23 –28 –34



7-45

Description Parameter IDL4 IDQ1


–8 –8 –8 –8 –10









7.6 MST4

The MST4 is a 4 x multi-service transparent transmission processing board, responsible for accessing and transmitting transparently fiber channel (FC), fiber connection (FICON), enterprise systems connection (ESCON), and digital video broadcast - asynchronous serial interface (DVB-ASI) services. Table 7-28 shows the slots for the MST4. Table 7-28 Slots for the MST4

Product MST4 OptiX OSN 3500 (80 Gbit/s) Slots 1–8, 11–16



OptiX OSN 2500 REG Not supported

OptiX OSN 1500A Slots 12–13

OptiX OSN 1500B Slots 11–13

7.6.1 Functionality

Board Function MST4

Basic function Provide four independent multi-service access interfaces and support transparent transmission of 4 storage area network (SAN)/video signals.



7-46

Board Function MST4

Service type

Support FC50, FC100/FICON, FC200, ESCON, DVB-ASI signal. The service types and rates are shown in Table 7-29. Support four-port FC service (FC50, FC100/FICON and FC200), with the total bandwidth not exceeding 2.5 Gbit/s. Support transmission of FC service at full rate, that is, transmission of one FC200 or two FC100, or four FC50 services. Support four-port ESCON or DVB-ASI service.

Connector Hot-swappable LC (SFP)

Distance extension function

The first and second interfaces support SDH side distance extension function: FC100 supports 3000 km, and FC200 supports 1500 km. The first and second interfaces support client side distance extension function: FC100 supports 40 km, and FC200 supports 20 km.


The backplane supports the connection of four 622 Mbit/s buses to the cross-connect unit. The total uplink bandwidth is 2.5 Gbit/s.


Support GFP-T encapsulation format in compliance with ITU-T G.7041.

Mapping mode VC-4-Xc(X=1, 4, 8, 16)

Maintenance Support inloop and outloop at optical interface level for maintenance and fault localization



Table 7-29 The service types and rates provided by the MST4

Service type Bit rate Remarks

FC50 531.25 Mbit/s Storage area network (SAN)

FC100/FICON 1062.5 Mbit/s SAN service

FC200 2125 Mbit/s SAN service

ESCON 200 Mbit/s SAN service

DVB-ASI 270 Mbit/s Video service

7.6.2 Principle

Figure 7-13 shows the working principle of the MST4.



7-47

Backplane

Interfacemodule

ATMservice

processingmodule

Mappingmodule


module

Cross-connectunit

SCC

+3.3 V(Standby)

-48 VPowermodule

+3.3 V

+5 V+2.5 V

ESCON

FC

DVB-ASI

FEprotocol

processing module

Figure 7-13 The functional block diagram of the MST4

1. In Receive Direction The interface processing module accesses the optical signal from external equipment (such as Ethernet switch, router, SAN equipment, or multi-media equipment), decodes the signal after O/E conversion and sends the signal to the encapsulation module for GFP-T encapsulation. The encapsulated signal is sent to the mapping module for mapping to VC-4-Xc or VC-4. And finally sent to the SDH cross-connect unit. If port 1 and port 2 need to implement distance extension function for FC100 and FC200 services, the first and second signal from the interface processing module is sent to the FC protocol processing module, then sent to the encapsulation module and mapping module, and finally sent to the cross-connect unit or DWDM equipment.

2. In Transmit Direction The VC-4-Xc signal from the cross-connect unit or DWDM equipment is demapped and then sent to the encapsulation module for de-encapsulation. The FC service needing distance extension is sent to the FC protocol processing module. Other services are sent to the interface processing module and then sent out after E/O conversion.


It achieves control, communication and service configuration for the board. Power module

Provide various voltages required by the boards.



7-48

7.6.3 Front Panel

Figure 7-14 shows the front panel of the MST4.

STATACTPROGSRV

MST4

MST4

OU

T1IN

1O

UT2

IN2

OU

T3IN

3O

UT4

IN4

Figure 7-14 The front panel of the MST4

1. Indicator There are four indicators on the MST4.



2. Interface Number of optical interfaces: The MSTE has four pairs of optical interfaces. Optical interface type: LC



7-49

Security: The optical interfaces incline down. The MST4 uses swappable optical module for convenient maintenance.


Parameters to be configured for the MST4: J1

J1 is the path trace byte. The transmit end sends the byte (higher order access point identifier) successively to inform the receive end that the connection between the two ends is normal. Once the receive end detects J1 mismatch, the involved VC-4 path will generate the HP TIM alarm. J1 byte is set as “Huawei SBS” by default.

C2 C2 is the signal label byte, indicating the multiplexing structure of VC-4 frame and the payload property. The C2 bytes transmitted should match with those received, once mismatch is detected, the involved VC-4 path will generate the HP_SLM alarm and insert all “1”s into the C4.


The MST4 have one version: N1. They are applicable to the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, and OptiX OSN1500 (A and B).


Table 7-30 shows the technical parameters of the MST4. Table 7-30 Technical parameters of the MST4



Optical interface type LC (SFP)

Dimensions (mm) 262.05 x 220 x 25.4

Weight (kg) 0.9







Environment for Temperature: –40°C to 70°C Humidity: 10%–100%

OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual 8 Cross-Connect and System Control Boards


8-1

8 Cross-Connect and System Control Boards

This chapter introduces cross-connect and system control boards of the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500 and OptiX OSN 1500. The technical details cover:

Functionality Principle Front panel Protection configuration Parameter configuration Version description Technical parameters

Refer to Table 4-4 for the name and descriptions of the cross-connect and system control boards supported by the OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500.



8-2

8.1 GXCS/EXCS/UXCS/XCE

The GXCS/EXCS/UXCS is the cross-connect and synchronous timing board of the OptiX OSN 3500. The XCE is a lower-order cross-connect and synchronous timing board used for extended subracks. The GXCS, EXCS, UXCS and XCE, seated in slot 9 or 10 on the subrack, implement the functions of cross-connection and system timing. The GXCS is an ordinary cross-connect and synchronous timing board, but the EXCS is an enhanced one, and the UXCS is a super one. The UXCS can also be classified into UXCSA and UXCSB. Table 8-1 shows their differences. Table 8-1 Comparison among GXCS, EXCS, UXCS and XCE.

Cross-connect and timing board

Higher order cross-connect capability

Lower order cross-connect capacity

Usage

GXCSA 40 Gbit/s 5 Gbit/s Used for the main subrack, not supporting the extended subrack.

EXCSA 80 Gbit/s 5 Gbit/s Used for the main subrack, not supporting the extended subrack.

UXCSA 80 Gbit/s 20 Gbit/s Used for the main subrack, not supporting the extended subrack.

UXCSB 80 Gbit/s 20 Gbit/s Used for the main subrack, not supporting the 1.25 Gbit/s extended subrack.

XCE 0 Gbit/s 1.25 Gbit/s Used for the extended subrack.(Note)

Note: The OptiX OSN 3500 subrack is adopted.

8.1.1 Functionality

Support VC-4 unblocked higher order full cross-connect and VC-3 or VC-12 unblocked lower order full cross-connect. For the cross-connect capacity of different boards, see Table 8-1.

Provide flexible service grooming capability, and support loopback, cross-connect, multicast and broadcast services.

Support SNCP protection at VC-3 or VC-12. The XCE provides 1.25 Gbit/s lower order cross-connect capability and is capable

of adding/dropping up to 504 E1s/T1s. Support such concatenation services as AU4-4C, AU4-8C, AU4-16C, and

AU4-64C. Support 1+1 hot backup, with the protection mode being revertive switching and

non-revertive switching. Support smooth upgrade from GXCS to EXCS or UXCS, with signal failure time

less than 50ms. Support smooth upgrade from EXCS to UXCS, with signal failure time less than

50ms.



8-3

Process S1 byte to realize clock protection switching. Input and output two channels of synchronization clock, with clock signal set to 2

MHz or 2 Mbit/s. Communicate with other boards.

8.1.2 Principle

Here takes the GXCS/EXCS/UXCS board as an example to introduce their working principle, as shown in Figure 8-1. The working principle of the XCE board is little different from that of the GXCS/EXCS/UXCS board, only supporting lower order cross-connect.

Communicationand control unit

Timingunit VC-4

Lower order cross-connect matrix

5 Gbit/s or20 Gbit/s

Higher order cross-connect matrix40 Gbit/s or

80 Gbit/s

Board and system

Clock source

Powermodule-48 V

+3.3 V+5 V+2.7 V

Figure 8-1 Functional block diagram of the GXCS/EXCS/UXCS

1. Higher Order Cross-Connect Matrix The GXCS performs 40 Gbit/s space division higher order cross-connect, and the EXCS or UXCS performs 80 Gbit/s space division higher order cross-connect.

2. Lower Order Cross-Connect Matrix GXCS or EXCS implement 5 Gbit/s lower order cross-connect and realize unblocked full cross-connect. UXCS implement 20 Gbit/s lower order cross-connect and realize unblocked full cross-connect. They are providing the system with powerful service grooming capability.

3. Timing Unit Trace the external clock source or internal clock source, providing itself and the system with the synchronization clock source. At the same time, it provides various nodes in the data flow of the system with clock signals appropriate to the frequency and phase, so that the devices at each node can meet the requirements for data setup time and hold time, and provide the system with framing signals for identifying the position of the frame head in the data.

4. Control and Communication Unit Communicate with the SCC and other boards, and ensure communication with other boards when the SCC is not in position. It also generates various other control signals



8-4

for the GXCS/EXCS and system.

5. Power Module Provides power supply of various voltages for the board.

8.1.3 Front Panel

Figure 8-2 shows the front panel of the GXCS, EXCS, UXCS, and XCE.

GXCSA/EXCSA/UXCSA UXCSB XCE

Figure 8-2 Front panel of the GXCS, EXCS, UXCS and XCE

1. Indicators There are indicators on the front panel of the GXCS, EXCS, UXCS and XCE to indicate their working status. The description of the indicators is shown in Table 8-2



8-5

Table 8-2 Indicators of the GXCS, EXCS, UXCS and XCE

Indicator Color and status Description

On, green The board works normally.

On, red The board hardware fails.

STAT (red or green)

Off The board is not powered on, or no service is configured.

On The service is activated. ACT (green)

Off The service is not activated.

On, green The board software or software for FPGA is uploaded successfully, or the board software is initialized successfully.

On for 100ms and off for 100ms alternatively, green

The board software or software for FPGA is being uploaded.


The board software is being initialized, and is in BIOS boot stage.

On, red The board software or software for FPGA is lost, or failed in uploading or in initializing.

PROG (red or green)

Off No power supply.

On, green Service is normal, and no service alarm occurs.

On, red A critical or major alarm occurs to service.

On, yellow A minor or remote alarm occurs to service.

SRV (red, yellow or green)

Off No service is configured.

On, green The clock works in synchronous status. SYNC (red or green)

On, red The clock works in hold-over or free-run mode.

2. Interfaces There are interfaces on the front panel of UXCSB/XCE for connecting extended subrack cables. “EXA” and “EXB” backup each other. Through these two interfaces, the main subrack and the extended subrack can be connected, as shown in Figure 8-3.



8-6

S1

S2

S3

S4

S5

S6

S7

S8

S9

S10

S11

S12

S13

S14

FAN FAN FAN

S15

S16

S17

S18

PIU

PIU

XCE

XCE

PQ1/

PQM

(W)

PQ1/

PQM

(P)

AU

X

PQ1/

PQM

(W)

PQ1/

PQM

(W)

PQ1/

PQM

(W)

PQ1/

PQM

(W)

PQ1/

PQM

(W)

PQ1/

PQM

(W)

PQ1/

PQM

(W)

D75

S/D

12S

D75

S/D

12S

D75

S/D

12S

D75

S/D

12S

D75

S/D

12S

D75

S/D

12S

D75

S/D

12S

D75

S/D

12S

D75

S/D

12S

D75

S/D

12S

D75

S/D

12S

D75

S/D

12S

D75

S/D

12S

D75

S/D

12S

D75

S/D

12S

D75

S/D

12S

EXB

EXA

EXB

EXA

(1)(2)(3) (4) Figure 8-3 Configuration of extended subracks

(1) The “EXB” interface of the XCE (in slot 9) is connected to the “EXB” of the UXCSB (in slot 9) on the main subrack. (2) The “EXA” interface of the XCE (in slot 9) is connected to the “EXA” of the UXCSB (in slot 9) on the main subrack. (3) The “EXB” interface of the XCE (in slot 10) is connected to the “EXB” of the UXCSB (in slot 10) on the main subrack. (4) The “EXA” interface of the XCE (in slot 10) is connected to the “EXA” of the UXCSB (in slot 10) on the main subrack.

The input/output interface for external clock of the cross-connect and synchronous timing board is on the AUX board. Here only the interface names are given, as shown in Table 8-3. For a detailed description of relevant interfaces, refer to the interface description of the AUX board. Table 8-3 External clock interface of the GXCS, EXCS and UXCS

Interface name Description Interface type

CLKO1 75-ohm clock output interface 1 SMB

CLKO2 75-ohm clock output interface 2 SMB

CLKI1 75-ohm clock input interface 1 SMB

CLKI2 75-ohm clock input interface 2 SMB

CLK1 120- ohm clock interface 1 RJ-45

CLK2 120-ohm clock interface 2 RJ-45


The GXCS/EXCS/UXCS/XCE supports 1+1 protection.



8-7


The parameters of the GXCS, EXCS, UXCS and XCE to be set through NM are as follows.

1. When There is No External Clock and Synchronization Status Message (SSM) is not Started

Primary reference clock Trace level of clock source

2. When External Clock is Configured and SSM is Started Primary reference clock Trace level of clock source Type of external building integrated timing supply (BITS) S1 byte Threshold for clock switching protection


The GXCSA of the OptiX OSN 3500 has two versions: N1 and N2, as described in Table 8-4. Table 8-4 N1 and N2 GXCSA boards

Item Description Similarity Board functions and board software are the same.

Difference Different FPGA program is uploaded due to different hardware.

NM support The T2000 does not distinguish N1 from N2.

Product support

Each product version (including V100R001, V100R002 and V100R003) supports N1 GXCSA and N2 GXCSA.

Version replacement

The N1 GXCSA and N2 GXCSA can be replaced by each other. Because the N1 GXCSA and N2 GXCSA use different FPGA program, select corresponding FPGA program in upgrading. Otherwise, the upgrading will fail.

The EXCSA, UXCSA, UXCSB and XCE have only one version: N1. They are only applicable to the OptiX OSN 3500 subrack and extended subrack. Technical Parameters Table 8-5 shows the technical parameters of the GXCS, EXCS, UXCS and XCE. Table 8-5 Technical parameters of the GXCS, EXCS, UXCS and XCE

Description Parameter GXCSA EXCSA UXCSA UXCSB XCE

Higher order cross-connect capability

40 Gbit/s 80 Gbit/s 80 Gbit/s 80 Gbit/s 0 Gbit/s

Lower order cross-connect capacity

5 Gbit/s 5 Gbit/s 20 Gbit/s 20 Gbit/s 1.25 Gbit/s



8-8

Description Parameter GXCSA EXCSA UXCSA UXCSB XCE

External clock 2 channels, 2048 kbit/s or 2048 kHz

Dimensions (mm)

262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 40 (W)

H

WD

Weight (kg) 1.81 2.00 2.00 2.00 1.50

Power consumption (W) 27 62 65 65 25

Long-term working condition


Short-term working condition







8-9

8.2 CXL1/CXL4/CXL16

The CXL1, CXL4 and CXL16 are boards integrating the functions of the SDH processing unit, system control & communication unit, cross-connect unit and timing unit. They are only applicable to the OptiX OSN 2500 and the OptiX OSN 1500. The CXL1/CXL4/CXL16 is seated in slots 9–10 in the OptiX OSN 2500 subrack. The CXL1/CXL4/CXL16 is seated in slots 4–5 in the OptiX OSN 1500 subrack. Table 8-6 shows a comparison among them. Table 8-6 Comparison among CXL1, CXL4 and CXL16

Board name CXL1 CXL4 CXL16

Line processing capacity 1 x STM-1 1 x STM-4 1 x STM-16

Cross-connect capacity (higher order)

20 Gbit/s 20 Gbit/s 20 Gbit/s

Cross-connect capacity (lower order) (Note)

5 Gbit/s/20 Gbit/s

5 Gbit/s/20 Gbit/s

5 Gbit/s/20 Gbit/s

Clock function Same

System control function Same

Note: The CXL series boards have two versions: Q1 and Q2. The lower order cross-connect capacity of Q1 version is 5 Gbit/s and that of Q2 version is 20 Gbit/s.

8.2.1 Functionality

1. SDH Processing Unit The CXL1, CXL4 and CXL16 boards are responsible for receiving and transmitting

one optical signal at STM-1, STM-4 and STM-16 level respectively. Their optical interfaces are compliant with ITU-T Recommendation G.957, frame structures compliant with ITU-T Recommendation G.707, and the jitter specifications compliant with ITU-T G.825 and ITU-T G.958.

The CXL1 supports S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2 and Ve-1.2 optical modules for different transmission distances.

The CXL4 supports S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2 and Ve-4.2 optical modules for different transmission distances.

The CXL16 supports I-16, S-16.1, L-16.1 and L-16.2 optical modules for different transmission distances.

The CXL16 supports VC-4-4C, VC-4-8C and VC-4-16C concatenated services. Support various protection schemes such as two-fiber and four-fiber bidirectional

MS ring protection, linear MSP and SNCP. Provide abundant alarm and performance events for convenient equipment

management and maintenance. Support inloop and outloop at optical interfaces for fast fault location. Support ALS function, avoiding laser injury to human body during maintenance. Support on-line query of the board information and the optical power.



8-10

Support smooth software upgrade and capacity expansion.

2. System Control & Communication Unit Configure and groom service, monitor service performance, and collect

performance events and alarm information. Provide 10 Mbit/s and 100 Mbit/s compatible Ethernet interface for NM connection. Provide F&f interface through the SEI board for COA management. Provide one 10/100 Mbit/s Ethernet interface for communication between various

boards. Provide one 10 Mbit/s Ethernet interface for communication between the active

and standby CXL. Provide the OAM interface through SEI, supporting remote maintenance of the

Modem of RS232 DCE. Process 40 DCCs to provide the transmit link for network management. Support management of fan, such as fan alarm and speed control. Provide PIU with lightening protection and in-position detection function.

3. Cross-Connect Unit Implement 20 Gbit/s VC-4 full cross-connection and 5 Gbit/s20/Gbit/s VC-12/VC-3

full cross-connection respectively. Provide two 4 Mbit/s HDLC emergency paths for MSP and SNCP. Support flexible service grooming, including loopback, cross-connection, multicast,

and broadcasting. Provisioning/removing service does not affect other services. Support SNCP at VC-3 and VC-12 levels. Support AU4-4C, AU4-8C and AU4-16C concatenated services. Support 1+1 hot backup protection, both revertive and non-revertive mode. The

default is non-revertive.

4. Timing Unit Provide standard system synchronization clock. Input two 2048 kHz or 2048 kbit/s timing signals, and is capable of selecting the

external timing source. Output two 2048 kHz or 2048 kbit/s timing signals. Provide SSM, extract, insert and process clock ID.

8.2.2 Principle

The CXL16 is taken as an example in the following description. Figure 8-4 shows the functional block diagram of the CXL16. The CXL16 integrates the STM-16 SDH processing unit, cross-connect unit, system control & communication unit and timing unit.



8-11

STM-16 SDHprocessing unit

Cross connect unit

System control andcommunication unit

Timing unit

Front panel Backplane

Figure 8-4 Functional block diagram of the CXL16

8.2.3 Front Panel

The front panel of the CXL1, CXL4 and CXL16 is shown in Figure 8-5.

CXL1

ALM CUT

CXL1

RESET

OU

TIN

CLASS 1LASER

PRODUCT

STATACTXACTCPROGSRVXSRVLSYNCALMC

CXL4

ALM CUT

CXL4

RESET

OU

TIN

CLASS 1LASER

PRODUCT


CXL16

ALM CUT

CXL16

RESET

OU

TIN

CLASS 1LASER

PRODUCT


CXL1 CXL4 CXL16

Figure 8-5 Front panel of the CXL1, CXL4 and CXL16

1. Indicators The indicator description of the CXL1, CXL4 and CXL16 is shown in Table 8-7.



8-12

Table 8-7 Indicators of the CXL1, CXL4 and CXL16




STAT

Off The board is not powered on, or service is not configured.

On, green The cross-connect unit is in active status. ACTX

Off The cross-connect unit is in standby status.

On, green The system control & communication unit is in active status.

ACTC

Off The system control & communication unit is in standby status.







PROG


On, green Service operates normally on the cross-connect unit.

SRVX

On, red Switching (for example, TPS) occurs to the service on the cross-connect unit.

On, green Service operates normally on the line unit, and no service alarm occurs.

On, red A critical or major alarm occurs to the line service.

On, yellow A minor or remote alarm occurs to the line service.

SRVL

Off The line service is not configured or no power supply.

On, yellow Alarm is cut off permanently. ALMC

Off Alarm is normally provided.



8-13


On, green The clock works in synchronous status. SYNC (red or green)

On, red The clock works in a hold-over or free-run mode.

2. Interfaces The interfaces on the front panel of the CXL1, CXL4 and CXL16 boards are shown in Table 8-8. Table 8-8 Interfaces of CXL

Name Description Function

Line optical interface LC Receive and transmit optical signal. Use swappable optical module for convenient maintenance.

RESET Reset button Press the button to warm reset the SCC unit.

ALM CUT Alarm cut switch Press the ALM CUT to cut off audible alarms for once. Press and hold the ALM CUT for three seconds to cut off audible alarms permanently. Press and hold the ALM CUT again to enable audible alarms.


The CXL1, CXL4 and CXL16 support 1+1 protection. 8.2.5 Parameter Configuration

The parameters required by the CXL1, CXL4 and CXL16 are as follows.

1. J1 J1 is the path trace byte. It is used to transmit repetitively a higher order access point identifier so that the receive end can verify its continued connection to the intended transmit end. When J1 mismatch is detected at receive end, the corresponding VC-4 path will generate an HP_TIM alarm. Value of the J1 is “Huawei SBS” by default.

2. C2 C2 is the signal label byte, indicating the multiplexing structure of VC-4 frame and the payload property. It is required that the C2 bytes transmitted match those received. If mismatch is detected, the corresponding VC-4 path will generate an HP_SLM alarm and insert all “1”s into the C4. Table 8-9 associates C2 byte setting to service type.



8-14

Table 8-9 Correspondence between C2 byte setting and service type

service type C2 byte setting E1 or T1 TUG structure

E3 or DS3 34 Mbit/s/45 Mbit/s asynchronously mapped into C-3

E4 140 Mbit/s asynchronously mapped into C-4

Null Unloaded

3. When There is No External Clock and Synchronization Status Message (SSM) is not Started

Primary reference clock Trace level of clock source

4. When External Clock is Configured and SSM is Started Primary reference clock Trace level of clock source Type of external building integrated timing supply (BITS) S1 byte

Threshold for clock switching protection 8.2.6 Version Description

The CXL1, CXL4 and CXL16 have two versions: Q1 and Q2. Except that cross-connect capacity and software features, the two versions support the same functions. Q1CXL1/Q1CXL4/Q1CXL16: Higher order cross-connect capacity is 20 Gbit/s and lower order cross-connect capacity is 5 Gbit/s. On the T2000, the Q1CXL board is displayed as three logic boards: CXL, SCC and Q1SL1/4/16. Q2CXL1/Q2CXL4/Q2CXL16: Higher order cross-connect capacity is 20 Gbit/s and lower order cross-connect capacity is 20 Gbit/s. Support intelligent features. On the T2000, the Q2CXL is displayed as three logic boards: ECXL, GSCC and Q1SL1/4/16.


The technical parameters of the CXL1, CXL4 and CXL16 are shown in Table 8-10. Table 8-10 Technical parameters of the CXL1, CXL4 and CXL16

Description Parameter CXL1 CXL4 CXL16

Bit rate 155520 kbit/s 622080 kbit/s 2488320 kbit/s

Connector LC

Dimensions (mm)

262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W)

H

WD

Weight (kg) 1.12 1.12 1.12



8-15



40 40 40

CXL1

Optical module type

S-1.1 L-1.1 L-1.2 Le-1.2

Wavelength (nm) 1310 1310 1550 1550


2–15 15–40 40–80 80–100


–15 to –8 –5 to 0 –5 to 0 –3 to 2


–28 –34 –34 –34


–8 –10 –10 –10

CXL4

Optical module type

S-4.1 L-4.1 L-4.2 Le-4.2

Wavelength (nm) 1310 1310 1550 1550


2–15 15–40 40–80 80–100


–15 to –8 –3 to 2 –3 to 2 –3 to 2


–28 –28 –28 –33


–8 –8 –8 –8

CXL16

Optical module type

I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2

Wavelength (nm) 1310 1310 1310 1550


0–2 2–15 15–40 40–80


–10 to 3 –5 to 0 –2 to 3 –2 to 3


–18 –18 –27 –28


–3 0 –9 –9



8-16


Long-term working condition


Short-term working condition






8.3 SCC/GSCC

The SCC is the system control and communication board, seated in slot 17 or 18. It functions main control, orderwire, communication and system power monitoring. The OptiX OSN 3500 also provides the GSCC that supports intelligent features and extended subrack.

8.3.1 Functionality

Support 1+1 hot backup protection. When the active board fails, the service will switch to the standby board automatically.

Monitor service performance, and collect performance events and alarm information.

Provide the F&f interface through the AUX board for management of case-shape optical amplifier (COA).

Provide one 10 Mbit/s or 100 Mbit/s Ethernet interface (the port is on the AUX board) for communication with the NM.

Provide one 10 Mbit/s Ethernet interface for communication between the active and standby SCCs.

Process 40 DCCs to provide the transmit link for network management information.

Process such bytes as E1, E2, F1 and Serial 1–4. Provide one 64 k codirectional data interface F1 through AUX. Provide the OAM interface through AUX, supporting remote maintenance of the

Modem of RS232 data connected equipment (DCE). Monitor –48 V power supply of the system. Support control of four cabinet indicators. Process 16 housekeeping alarm inputs and four housekeeping alarm outputs. Support management of intelligent fan, such as fan alarm and speed control. Provide PIU with lightening protection and in-position detection function.



8-17

8.3.2 Principle

Caution: There are four important databases on the SCC: mdb, drdb, fdb0 and fdb1. The mdb is in the dynamic random-access memory (RAM), saving the current databases. The drdb is saved in flash RAM. When power failure occurs to NE, the databases will be recovered in the order of drdb→fdb0→fdb1. The drdb will be checked first for configuration data. If the configuration data are safe in drdb, they will be recovered to mdb from drdb; if they are damaged, data will be recovered from fdb0 or fdb1, depending on which saves the latest data. If data in fdb0 are also damaged, fdb1 is used for data recovery. Therefore, it is important to back up data to fdb0 and fdb1 and compare the data in them.

Figure 8-6 shows the functional block diagram of the SCC.

AUX backup power alarm detection

40 DCCs (D1-D3)Fan alarm detection and managementPIU alarm detection and management

Controlmodule

Communicationmodule

Powermonitoring

module

Overheadprocessing

module

1 orderwire phone2 SDH NNI phones

Serial 1-4

F1

NM interfaceF&fOAM

16 alarm inputs and 4 alarm outputs interface5 cabinet alarm indicator interface

Powermodule-48 V

+3.3 V

+2.7 V

+5 V

Figure 8-6 Functional block diagram of the SCC

1. Control Module The control module configures and manages boards and NEs, collect alarms and performance events, and backs up important data. The control module processes 40 DCC (D1–D3) bytes.

2. Communication Module The communication module provides 10 Mbit/s and 100 Mbit/s compatible Ethernet interface for NM connection, F&f interface for managing external devices such as COA, and the OAM interface. The communication module also process 40 DCCs to provide the transmit link for network management.

3. Overhead Processing Module The overhead processing module receives overhead signals from the line slot and



8-18

processes such bytes as E1, E2, F1 and serials 1–4. The overhead processing module also sends overhead signals to the line board, and externally provides one orderwire interface, two SDH NNI audio interfaces, interface F1, and the broadcast data interfaces serials 1–4. The position of respective orderwire bytes in the SDH frame is shown in Figure 8-7.

A1 A1 A1 A2 A2 A2 J0

B1 E1 F1

D1 D2 D3 Serial1 Serial2

AU_PTR

B2 B2 B2 K1 K2

D4 Serial 4 D5 D6

D7 D8 D9

D10 D11 D12 Serial3

S1 M1 E2

Figure 8-7 Position of respective orderwire bytes in the SDH frame

4. Power Monitoring Module The power monitoring module comprises –48 V power monitoring and working power.

The working power provides the SCC with working voltage and detects and switches the active and standby 3.3 V power supply (which is provided through AUX).

The –48 V power monitoring module monitors the +3.3 V power alarm of AUX, monitors fan alarms, monitors and manages the PIU, and processes sixteen housekeeping alarm inputs and four housekeeping alarm outputs as well as the cabinet alarm indicator signal.

8.3.3 Front Panel

The SCC front panel is shown in Figure 8-8.



8-19

STATACTPROGSRVPWRAPWRBPWRCALMC

RESET

ALM CUT

SCC

SCC

Figure 8-8 The front panel of the SCC and the GSCC

1. Switch The switch description of the SCC is shown in Table 8-11 Table 8-11 Switch description of the SCC

Name Function

RESET Reset button

ALM CUT Alarm cut switch Press the ALM CUT to cut off audible alarms for once. Press and hold the ALM CUT for three seconds to cut off audible alarms permanently. Press and hold the ALM CUT again to enable audible alarms.



8-20

2. Indicators The indicator description of the SCC is shown in Table 8-12 Table 8-12 Indicator description of the SCC




STAT (red or green)


On The service is activated. ACT (green)

Off The service is not activated.







PROG (red or green)


On, green Service is normal, no service alarm occurs.

On, red A critical or major alarm occurs to service.

On, yellow A minor or remote alarm occurs to service.

SRV (red, yellow or green)

Off No service is configured.

On, green The –48 V power supply A is normal. PWRA (red or green)

On (red/off) The –48 V power supply A is faulty (lost or failed).

On, green The –48 V power supply B is normal. PWRB (red or green)

On (red/off) The –48 V power supply B is faulty (lost or failed).



8-21


On, green The 3.3 V protection power is normal. PWRC (red or green)

On, red The 3.3 V protection power is lost.

On, green Permanent alarm cut-off. ALMC (yellow)

Off Give audible warning upon alarm.

Note: Power supply A indicates the first power input. Power supply B indicates the second power input.

3. Interfaces The interfaces provided by the SCC are led out through the AUX. For details, refer to the interface description of the AUX.


The SCC has one version N1. It is applicable to the OptiX OSN 3500. It does not support intelligent features or extended subracks. The GSCC has two versions: N1 and N2. The N1GSCC is applicable to the OptiX OSN 3500 and supports intelligent features or extended subracks. The N2GSCC is applicable to the OptiX OSN 7500 or OptiX OSN 3500 and supports intelligent features.


Table 8-13 shows the technical parameters of the SCC. Table 8-13 Technical parameters of the SCC


Processing capability System control, inter-board communication, orderwire, and power detection

Dimensions (mm)

262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W)

H

WD

Weight (kg) 0.88


Long-term operating condition Temperature: 0°C to 45°C Humidity: 10%–90%

Short-term operating condition Temperature: –5°C to 50°C Humidity: 5%–95%


Environment for transportation Temperature: –40°C to 70°C Humidity: 10%–100%



8-22

8.4 CRG

The CRG is the system control and clock unit of the OptiX OSN 2500 REG, seated in slots 9–10. It implements control, orderwire, communication, and clock assignment and tracing functions.

8.4.1 Functionality

1. System Control and Communication Unit Implement service configuration and grooming, monitor service performance, and

collect performance events and alarm information. Provide the F&f interface through the SEI board for management of case-shape

optical amplifier (COA). Provide a 10 Mbit/s or 100 Mbit/s Ethernet interface through the SEI board for

communication with the NM. Provide the RS232 DCE remote maintenance interface (X.25) through SEI,

supporting the access of Modem Process 40 data communication channels (DCCs) to provide the transmit link for

network management Process such bytes as E1, Serial 1–4, F1, D1–D12, and ID. Provide transparent transmission of D1–D12 bytes of other manufacturers. Provide two 485 bus lines for communication between boards. The two lines

backup each other. Provide a 10 Mbit/s/100 Mbit/s compatible Ethernet interface for communication

between boards, and report of board alarm information and performance information.

Provide a 10 Mbit/s Ethernet interface for communication between active and standby SCC boards.

Monitor –48 V power supply of the system. Support management of fan, such as fan alarm and speed control. Support control of four cabinet indicators. Support revertive or nonrevertive switching between active and standby boards

without impact on services. Support warm reset, cold reset and reset by pressing button. The warm reset does

not affect services. Support querying board information, which includes board software version, FPGA

version, BIOS version, and board manufacturing information.

2. Clock Unit Implement system timing function, which complies with the timing characteristics of

SDH equipment slave clocks under REG mode specified in ITU-T G.813. When REG works normally, the clock at the transmit end is synchronized with that

at the receive end. The clock works in pass-through mode. If the clock at the receive end is lost, the clock at the transmit end traces the free-run clock in the equipment. The accuracy is greater than 20 ppm.

Support trace and free-run working modes and switching between the two. The



8-23

current working mode can be queried. Support processing S1 byte. Support setting and querying the clock trace source priority table. The reference clock source of the system clock is the line clock or clock within the

system. 8.4.2 Principle

Figure 8-9 shows the functional block diagram of the CRG.

System controlmodule

Communicationmodule

NM interfaceF&fOAM

TimingmoduleLine clock from

line units

2K

38MBoards inother slots

FPGA

Powermodule-48 V

1.5 V

5 V3.3 V

Detectingmodule

Figure 8-9 Functional block diagram of the CRG

1. System Control Module Configure and manage the board and NEs, collect alarms and performance events, and backup important data.

2. Communication Module It provides:

10 Mbit/s/100Mbit/s compatible Ethernet interfaces for connection with NM and communication between boards.

F&f interface to manage external equipment such as COA as well as OAM interface to support maintenance and management.

communication processing function through ECC channel.

3. FPGA It is a software processing module.

4. Clock Module When the REG works normally, the clock module extracts and traces the line clock received by the source end, and provides system clock signals (2 kbit/s or 38 Mbit/s signals, for example) required by the system.

5. Detection Module It detects board temperature, power supply (over-voltage and under-voltage), clock



8-24

frequency deviation and failure.

6. Power Module The power monitoring module comprises –48 V power monitoring and working power. The working power provides the CRG board with working voltage and detects and switches the active and standby 3.3 V power supply (which is provided through AUX). The –48 V power monitoring monitors the +3.3 V power alarm of AUX, monitors and manages the fan, and processes housekeeping alarm inputs and outputs as well as the cabinet alarm indicator signal.

8.4.3 Front Panel

Figure 8-10 shows the front panel of the CRG.

CRG

CRG

STATACTC

PROGSYNCALMC

RESET

ALM CUT

Figure 8-10 Front panel of the CRG

1. Switch The switch description of the CRG is shown in Table 8-14. Table 8-14 Switch description of the CRG

Name Function

RESET Reset button



8-25

Name Function

ALM CUT Alarm cut switch Press the ALM CUT to cut off audible alarms for once. Press and hold the ALM CUT for five seconds to cut off audible alarms permanently. Press and hold the ALM CUT again to enable audible alarms.

2. Indicators The indicator description of the CRG is shown in Table 8-15. Table 8-15 Indicator description of the CRG




STAT (red or green)


On The CRG is in the active status. ACTC (green)

Off The CRG is in the standby status.







PROG (red or green)


On, green The clock works in synchronous status SYNC (red or green)

On, red Clock source is lost and the clock is working in the hold-over or free-run mode.

On Permanent alarm cut-off ALMC (yellow)

Off Audible warning upon alarm.



8-26

3. Interfaces The interfaces provided by the CRG are led out through the SEI. For details, refer to the interface description of the SEI.


The CRG has one version Q1. It is only applicable to the OptiX OSN 2500 REG. 8.4.5 Technical Parameters

Table 8-16 shows the technical parameters of the CRG. Table 8-16 Technical parameters of the CRG


Processing capability System control, inter-board communication, orderwire, and power detection

Dimensions (mm) 262.05 x 220 x 25.4

Weight (kg) 0.90






OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual 9 Other Boards


9-1

9 Other Boards

This chapter introduces the optical amplifier board, built-in WDM unit, power board, orderwire board and auxiliary interface board of the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500 and OptiX OSN 1500. The technical details cover:

Functionality Principle Front panel Version description Technical parameters

9.1 LWX

The LWX is an arbitrary rate wavelength conversion board, converting signal of arbitrary rate (10 Mbit/s–2.7 Gbit/s NRZ encoding) at the client side into standard wavelength optical signal in compliance with G.692. Table 9-1 shows the slots for the LWX in the OptiX OSN products. Table 9-1 Slots for the LWX

Product LWX




OptiX OSN 2500 REG Not supported

OptiX OSN 1500A Slots 12–13

OptiX OSN 1500B Slots 11–13

9.1.1 Functionality

Convert client-side signals into ITU-T G.692 (DWDM) compliant standard



9-2

wavelength signals and transmit the signals transparently. Provide 3R function for client-side signals (at the rate of 10 Mbit/s–2.7 Gbit/s),

perform clock recovery and monitor its rate. Provide two types of LWX board: one is single-fed single receiving, and the other is

dual-fed signal selection. The dual-fed signal selection LWX supports intra-board protection, realizing optical

channel protection with one board. The protection switching time is less than 50ms. The single-fed single receiving LWX supports inter-board protection, that is, 1+1

inter-board hot backup protection. The protection switching time is less than 50ms. Support sub-carrier modulation to realize ECC communication. The central wavelength complies with ITU-T, and channel spacing is 100 GHz. Support automatic laser shutdown function (ALS). When no light is received, the

corresponding optical transmitting module will be automatically shut down. Support inloop and outloop function at optical interface level for fault location. Provide abundant alarms and performance events for convenient maintenance.

Note: Sub-carrier modulation: Couple a weak 2.4 Gbit/s signal (after spreading) into the service signal and then modulate the laser. Obtain 2.4 Gbit/s signal through the bandpass filter after O/E conversion at the receiving end and then get the original signal through demodulation.

9.1.2 Principle

The functional block diagram of the LWX board is shown in Figure 9-1. Backplane

Performanceand alarmmonitoring


module

SCC

10 Mbit/s -2.7 Gbit/s Optical

transpondermodule

SCC

+3.3 V (Standby)

-48 V

10 Mbit/s -2.7 Gbit/s

Powermodule+2.7 V

+5 V

+3.3 V

Client side WDM side

ITU-T G.692 wavelength

Figure 9-1 Functional block diagram of the LWX



9-3

1. In Receive Direction The optical transponder module processes 10Mbit/s～2.7Gbit/s optical signal received from the client side. At the DWDM side, the LWX outputs ITU-T G.692-compliant standard wavelength signal. The optical transponder module can separate one channel of signal to the performance monitoring circuit for counting B1 bit errors. The optical transponder module has jitter suppression function which guarantees good jitter suppression performance.

2. In Transmit Direction The LWX receives ITU-T G.692-compliant standard wavelength signal from the DWDM side. The optical transponder module processes the optical signal and outputs the 10Mbit/s～2.7Gbit/s signal at the client side .



Provide power supply of various voltages for the board. 9.1.3 Front Panel

Figure 9-2 shows the front panel of the LWX board.



9-4

STATACTPROGSRV

CLASS 1LASER

PRODUCT

OU

T1IN

1O

UT2

IN2

LWX

TXR

X

LWX

Figure 9-2 Front panel of the LWX

1. Indicators There are four indicators on the LWX.



2. Interfaces The LC optical interfaces on the front panel of the LWX are described in Table 9-2. Table 9-2 Interfaces of the LWX

Interface Type Description

IN1/IN2 LC Receive the signals from the optical add/drop multiplexing board MR2.

OUT1/OUT2 LC Send signals to the optical add/drop multiplexing board MR2.

TX LC Send service signal to client-side equipment.



9-5


RX LC Receive the service signal from client-side equipment.

Note: IN1/OUT1 is a pair of receive/transmit optical interfaces, and IN2/OUT2 is another pair.


The LWX has only one version N1. It is applicable to the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, and OptiX OSN 1500.


Table 9-3 and Table 9-4 show the optical interface parameters on client side and DWDM side of the LWX. Table 9-5 shows the technical parameters of the LWX. Table 9-3 Client-side optical interface parameters of the LWX

Item Unit Description

Bit rate 10 Mbit/s–2.7 Gbit/s

Source type MLM SLM SLM

Transmission distance km 2 15 80

Characteristics of transmitter at point S

Operating wavelength range

nm 850 1260–1360 1500–1580

Maximum mean launched power

dBm –3 0 +3

Min. mean launched power

dBm –10 –5 –2

Min. extinction ratio dB +8.2 +8.2 +8.2

Min. side mode suppression ratio

dB NA 30 30

Eye pattern G.957 compliant

G.957 compliant G.957 compliant

Characteristics of receiver at point R

Receiver type PIN PIN APD


nm 1200–1600 1200–1600 1200–1600

Receiver sensitivity dBm –18 –18 –28

Min. receiver overload dBm –3 0 –9

Maximum reflectance dB –27 –27 –27



9-6

Table 9-4 DWDM-side optical interface parameters of the LWX

Item Unit Description

Channel spacing GHz 100

Characteristics of transmitter at point Sn

Transmission distance km 640 170 80

Maximum mean launched power

dBm –2 –2 –2

Min. mean launched power

dBm +3 +3 +3

Min. extinction ratio dB +10 +10 +10

Nominal central frequency THz 192.10–196.00

192.10–196.00 192.10–196.00

Central frequency offset GHz ±12.5 ±12.5 ±12.5

Maximum –20 dB spectrum width

nm 0.2 0.4 0.4

Min. side mode suppression ratio

dB 35 35 35

Dispersion tolerance value ps/nm 12800 2400 1600

Eye pattern G.957 compliant

G.957 compliant

G.957 compliant

Characteristics of receiver at point Rn

Receiver type APD PIN


nm 1200–1600 1200–1600

Receiver sensitivity dBm –31 –21

Min. receiver overload dBm –9 0

Maximum reflectance dB –27 –27

Table 9-5 Technical parameters of the LWX


Line code pattern NRZ encoding

Connector LC

Dimensions (mm)

262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W)

H

WD

Weight (kg) 1.10



9-7










9.2 MR2A/MR2B/MR2C

The MR2A, MR2B and MR2C are 2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing boards, adding/dropping and multiplexing any adjacent two channels of signals.

MR2A: 2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing board MR2B: 2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing board (half-height slot) MR2C: 2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing board (interface area)

Table 9-6 shows the slots for the MR2A, MR2B and MR2C in OptiX OSN products. Table 9-6 Slots for the MR2A, MR2B and MR2C

OptiX OSN product MR2A MR2B MR2C


Slots 1–8, 11–17

Not supported Slots 19–26, 29–36


Slots 1–8, 11–16

Not supported Slots 19–26, 29–36


Slots 5–6, 19–21

Slots 1–4, 15–18

OptiX OSN 2500 REG Not supported Not supported Not supported

OptiX OSN 1500A Slots 12–13 Slots 6–9, 12–13

Not supported

OptiX OSN 1500B Slots 11–13 Slots 6–9, 1–3, 11–13

Slots 14–17

9.2.1 Functionality

Add/drop two adjacent standard wavelengths in compliance with ITU-T G.692 (DWDM), with signals transmitted transparently and operating wavelength ranging from 1535.82 nm to 1560.61 nm.

Serve as an OTM or OADM station adding/dropping two channels, as shown in Figure 9-3.



9-8

Two MR2A/MR2B/MR2C boards connected in serial can form an OTM station adding/dropping four channels, as shown in Figure 9-4.

Work with the LWX to form an OADM station to add/drop two channels of signals. The central wavelength complies with ITU-T, and the channel spacing is 100 GHz.

Drop1 Drop2

Add1 Add2

Out

In

MI

MO

MR2A/MR2B/MR2C

Drop1 Drop2

Add1 Add2

Out

In

MI

MO

Drop1 Drop2

Add1 Add2

Out

In

MI

MO

(1) (2)

MR2A/MR2B/MR2C

MR2A/MR2B/MR2C

(1) MR2A/MR2B/MR2C can serve as an OTM station adding/dropping two channels. (2) Two MR2A/MR2C boards connected in serial can serve as an OTM station adding/dropping four channels.

Figure 9-3 MR2A/MR2B/MR2C serves as OTM station

In Out

MI MO

Drop1

Add1

Add2

Drop2

MR2A/MR2B/MR2C

LWXLWX

Figure 9-4 MR2A/MR2B/MR2C and LWX form OADM station adding/dropping two channels of signals

9.2.2 Principle

The functional block diagram of the MR2A/MR2B/MR2C board is shown in Figure 9-5.



9-9

Drop2Drop1

Add1

Add2

Out

MI

MO

OADMmodule

In

Frontpanel Backplane

Figure 9-5 Functional block diagram of the MR2A/MR2B/MR2C

The MR2A/MR2B/MR2C mainly includes the OADM module adding/dropping two channels of signals. The OADM adds/drops and multiplexes two channels of signals. It also provides concatenation interfaces to connect other add/drop multiplexing boards for more powerful add/drop capability. The MR2A/MR2B/MR2C is a passive board has no interface with the backplane.

9.2.3 Front Panel

Figure 9-6 shows the front panel of the MR2A board. The front panel of the MR2 B and MR2C is the same as the MR2A board, except the panel dimensions.



9-10

OU

TA

O1

AO

2M

I

CLASS 1LASER

PRODUCT

MR2A

M O

DO

2D

O1

IN

MR2A

Figure 9-6 Front panel of the MR2A

1. Indicators None

2. Interfaces There are four pairs of LC optical interfaces on the MR2A/MR2B/MR2C front panel, as described in Table 9-7. Table 9-7 Interfaces of the MR2A/MR2B/MR2C


A01–A02 LC Access two channels of service signal added locally.

D01–D02 LC Drop two channels of service signal locally.

IN LC Receive two channels of multiplexed signal.

OUT LC Send two channels of multiplexed signal.

MO/MI LC Concatenation interface, through which multiple MR2A/MR2B/MR2C boards can be concatenated.



9-11


The MR2A, MR2B and MR2C have only one version: N1. They are applicable to the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, and OptiX OSN 1500.


Table 9-8 shows the technical parameters of the MR2A/MR2B/MR2C. Table 9-8 Technical parameters of the MR2A/MR2B/MR2C


Operating wavelength Any two adjacent channels with G.692 (DWDM) compliant standard wavelength, with operating wavelength being 1535.82 nm to 1560.61 nm


Connector LC

Channel spacing (GHz) 100

Insertion loss (dB) <2

Adjacent channel isolation (dB)

>25

Non-adjacent channel isolation (dB)

>35

–0.5 dB channel wavelength (nm)

<0.11

Dimensions (mm) MR2A: 262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W) MR2B: 111.8 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W) MR2C: 262.05 (H) x 110 (D) x 22 (W)

Weight (kg) 1.01











9-12

9.3 BA2/BPA

The BA2 is a 2-port booster amplifier board. The BPA is a booster amplifier & pre-amplifier board. Table 9-9 shows the slots for the BA2 and BPA in OptiX OSN products. Table 9-9 Slots for the BA2 and BPA

Product BA2 BPA







9.3.1 Functionality

Increase the launched power of line board to +14 dBm or +17 dBm, thus to achieving a transmission distance of above 120 km or 130 km (in the case of G.652 optical fiber and 0.275 dB/km power loss on such fiber).

The BPA uses the pre-amplifier (PA) module to pre-amplify the received optical signal and increase the power gain of weak signals to 22 dB–25 dB, thus improving the receiver sensitivity to –38 dBm.

Control automatically laser temperature and optical power of the EDFA module. Support automatic monitoring of input and output optical power and querying of the

optical power of the EDFA module. Support report of laser performance parameters. Support the protection function of EDFA module. When no light is input, the

software will automatically shut down the laser; when light is input again, the software will automatically start the laser.


Support smooth software upgrade and expansion. 9.3.2 Application

In the long distance transmission, the attenuation of optical signal is great. To make the optical receiver receive normal optical signal, BA and PA are needed. The position of BA and PA in the optical transmission system is shown in Figure 9-7.



9-13

BA

PA Receive

Transmit

Transmit

Receive

Figure 9-7 Position of BA and PA in the network

9.3.3 Principle

Figure 9-8 shows the functional block diagram of the BA2/BPA.

Optical outputOptical input Optical input Optical output

Optics part

Fixed f ilter

Drivemodule

Drivemodule

SCCControlmodule

Communicationmodule

A/D and D/A conversion

Pumpcurrentcheck

Drive andcheck part

Data processing andcommunication part

Pumpcurrentcheck

Moduletemperature

control

Moduletemperature

control

Input/outputpow ercheck

EDFA optical module 1 EDFA optical module 2

Input/outputpow ercheck

Figure 9-8 Functional block diagram of the BA2/BPA

1. Optics Part This part is composed of two EDFA optical modules for optical amplification.

2. Drive and Check Part This part provides the EDFA optical modules with drive current, checks working status of each part of the EDFA optical modules, and forecasts and handles the possible faults. This drive and check part also checks the pump current, drives the optical module, controls the optical module and checks the input and output optical power.

3. Data Processing and Communication Part This part comprises central processing unit (CPU) and peripheral chips. Analysis of the measuring result of the check circuit is conducted at this part. Then, the drive



9-14

circuit will be adjusted within the rated range according to the analysis result, so that the gain of EDFA optical modules and the output optical power can be regulated above the rated value. Any abnormity indicated by the measured value will be arranged and reported to NM.

9.3.4 Front Panel

The front panel of the BA2 and BPA is shown in Figure 9-9.

BA2

OUT1 OUT2

IN1 IN2

BA2

STATACTPROGSRV

BPA

OUT1 OUT2

IN1 IN2

BPA

STATACTPROGSRV

Figure 9-9 Front panel of the BA2 and BPA

1. Indicators There are four indicators on the BA2 and BPA.



2. Interfaces There are two pairs of LC optical interfaces on the front panel of the BA2 and BPA for



9-15

receiving and transmitting optical signal. Using swappable optical module is easy for maintenance.


The BA2 and BPA have only one version N1. They are applicable to the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500 and OptiX OSN 1500.


The technical parameters of the BA2 and BPA are shown in Table 9-10. Table 9-10 Technical parameters of the BA2 and BPA

Description Parameter BA2 BPA

Bit rate 2488320 kbit/s and 9953280 kbit/s

Processing capability 2-channel power amplification

1-channel power amplification and 1-channel pre-amplification


Connector LC

Dimensions (mm)

262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W)

H

WD

Weight (kg) 1.01 1.01


Operating wavelength range (nm)

BA: 1530–1565 BA: 1530–1565 PA: 1550.12

Input power range (dBm) BA: –6 to +3 BA: –6 to +3 PA: –10 to –38

Output power (dBm) BA: +14 or +17 BA: +14 or +17

Receiver sensitivity (dBm) – PA: –38

Noise figure (dB) <6.5 BA: <6.5, PA: <6

Type of optical interface V-16.2, U-16.2, L-64.2, V-64.2, U-64.2

V-16.2, U-16.2, L-64.2, V-64.2, U-64.2







9-16

Description Parameter BA2 BPA




9.4 COA

The COA, a case-shape optical amplifier, integrates the EDFA module, drive circuit and communication circuit in an aluminium case. Two types of COA are available: 61COA and 62COA.

Note: The COA mentioned below includes 61COA and 62COA.

The 61COA is used for 1550 nm window. Its appearance is shown in Figure 9-10. The 61COA is equipped with only one EDFA optical module and can work as optical amplifier, pre-amplifier or line amplifier. The optical characteristics of the 61COA are the same as those of the BPA and the BA2. The COA is externally installed and does not occupy any slot in the subrack. It can be installed in the ETSI cabinet but needs separate power supply. Each OptiX OSN 3500 can work with up to two 61COAs.

Figure 9-10 Appearance of the 61COA (PA)

The 62COA is a case-shape Raman amplifier used at the receiving end of the SDH equipment. It inputs counter-propagating pump light to fibers for distributed Raman amplification. The gain medium of Raman amplification is the line fiber that can realize better noise performance. Therefore, the 62COA can extend the transmission distance, lower the signal-to-noise ratio and realize ultra long hop transmission for a single span. Figure 9-11 shows the appearance of the 62COA.



9-17

5

12

3

4

1. Captive screw 2. Ejector lever 3. COA board 4. ESD jack 5. Power access board Figure 9-11 Appearance of the 62COA

9.4.1 Functionality

The 61COA is an erbium doped fiber amplifier, mainly used as optical booster amplifier. It can raise the launched optical power of the line board up to +14 dBm or +17dBm, thus extending the transmission distance.

The 61COA can also work as the preamplifier with the receiver sensitivity of –38 dBm.

The 62COA is configured at the receiving end of the SDH system as a Raman amplifier. It works with an EDFA of +17 dBm at the transmitting end to realize the transmission of more than 170 km.

The 62COA provides the preamplification function with the receiver sensitivity of –39 dBm.

The 61COA and 62COA support automatic laser shutdown. Communicate with the SCC board through RS-232 serial port, report the alarms

and performance events of the local board to the NM and receive configuration commands from the NM.

The COA is externally installed and does not occupy any slot in the subrack. It can work separately.

9.4.2 Application

The 61COA is applied in the optical transmission system in the same way as the BA2 and BPA. The 62COA is a Raman fiber amplifier, used at the receiving end of the optical transmission system. It amplifies optical signal by means of stimulated Raman scattering (SRS) effect. The 62 COA needs to work with the EDFA to realize the transmission of more than170 km, as shown in Figure 9-12.



9-18

Transmitting end

Opticalreceiver

Pump light

Receiving end

Signal light

Laser

EDFA Pump light

Fiber

Raman Amplifier

Coupler

Figure 9-12 Application of Raman amplifier (62COA)

The Raman amplifier inputs counter-propagating pump light to fibers for distributed Raman amplification. Counter pumping means the pump light is injected at the fiber end and the direction is opposite to the main signals. This kind of pumping results in a big phase difference between the main signals and the pump light. And the Raman pump power vibration is leveled in the reverse direction of signal transmission, thus effectively suppressing the noise created by pump.

9.4.3 Principle

The functional block diagram of the 61COA board is shown in Figure 9-13.

Optical input Optical output

Optics part

Fixed filter

Drivemodule

SCCControlmodule

Communication module

A/D and D/A conversion

Drive andcheck part

Data processing andcommunication part

Pumpcurrentcheck

Moduletemperature

control

EDFA optical module

Input/outputpowercheck

Figure 9-13 Functional block diagram of 61COA

1. Optics Part It consists of EDFA to amplify the optical signal.

2. Drive and Check Part It provides the EDFA with driving current and detects the working status of the components of the EDFA. It predicts and processes the possible faults. It implements the functions such as detecting pump current, driving optical module controlling optical module temperature, and detecting input/output optical power.



9-19

3. Data Processing and Communication Part It consists of the CPU and peripheral chips. It analyzes the measurement results of the detected circuit. Based on the analysis, it adjusts the driving circuit within the nominal range to keep the EDFA gain or power output at the nominal value level. It sorts out the abnormalities indicated by the measured value and reports to the NM. The 62COA works in the same way as the 61COA, except that the 62COA uses Raman amplifier while the 61COA uses EDFA amplifier.

9.4.4 Front Panel

The front panel of the 61COA is shown in Figure 9-14.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

8 9 10

11 1. ID DIP switch 2. Running indicator 3. Alarm indicator 4. RS232-1 5. RS232-2 6. MONITOR-1 7. MONITOR-2 8. IN optical port 9. OUT optical port 10. Power switch 11. –48 V power interface

Figure 9-14 Front panel of the COA

The front panel of the 62COA is shown in Figure 9-15.

1. SC/PC optical interface 2. E2000 optical interface 3. Air filter 4. Fan board 5. RJ-45 6 RS232-1 7 RS232-2 8. DIP switch (5–8 bits) 9. DIP switch (1–4 bits) 10. Power input interface 11. Power switch

Figure 9-15 Front panel of the 62COA

1. Indicators The indicators of the 61COA/62 COA are described in Table 9-11.



9-20

Table 9-11 Indicators of the 61COA/62COA


The ALM is constantly on and the RUN is off

Memory self-check error

Flashing 3 times every other second Critical alarm

Flashing twice every other second Major alarm

ALM (Red)

Flashing once every other second Minor alarm

Flashing once every 2 seconds Normal (in service)

Flashing once every 4 seconds Database protected mode; communication with the SCC interrupted

RUN (Green)

Flashing 5 times every second Program startup/load

2. Interfaces Optical interface

There is one pair of SC/PC optical interface on the front panel of the 61COA for inputting/outputting optical signals. The input optical interface of the 62COA is of E2000 type, and the output optical interface is of SC type. The following figure shows the flange and optical fiber connector used by the input port on the 62COA board.

Figure 9-16 E2000 flange and fiber connector

Caution: The E2000 fiber jumper integrates a specially designed optical cap. Do not remove this optical cap during fiber connection. Just insert the fiber connector (with the optical cap) into the E2000 flange.

RS-232-1/RS-232-2 serial port

Control & communication interface. It communicates with the SCC, reports alarms



9-21

and performance events.

Note: The RS-232-1 port on the COA is connected with the F&f port on the subrack through the serial control cable to realize communication with the SCC.

When there are several COAs on the same station, the RS-232-2 port is employed. Use serial cable to connect the RS-232-2 of No. 1 COA with the RS-232-1 of No. 2 COA, and then the RS-232-2 of No. 2 COA with the RS-232-1 of No. 3 COA. The ports are all connected in this way. All the COAs communicate with the SCC unit on the subrack through the RS-232-1 port of No.1 COA, as shown in Figure 9-17.

Tx GND

Rx

TxGND

Rx

Tx

Rx

F&f RS232-1 RS232-1RS232-2 RS232-2

Rx

Tx

Rx

Tx

SCC

COA COA

Figure 9-17 Serial communication between the COA and the SCC

Note: To concatenate the COAs, the last four digits of the DIP switch on the panel should be switched to different IDs to identify the COAs. The maximum number of concatenated subracks of the OptiX OSN 3500 is 2.

MONITOR-1/MONITOR-2 interface

MONITOR-1 and MONITOR-2 serve as the alarm output port when the 61COA is used alone. The relation between the output alarm and the interface pin is illustrated in Table 9-12. Table 9-12 Relation between output alarm and interface pin

MONITOR-1 pin number


Definition

1, 6 1, 6 EDFA’s input optical power is too low

2, 7 2, 7 Working temperature of the pump laser is over threshold

3, 8 3, 8 Cool current of pump laser is over threshold



9-22



Definition

4, 9 4, 9 Environment temperature is over threshold

5 5 Digital ground

RJ-45 Ethernet interface

Specially designed for the 62COA, the interface is used to connect a computer to load the board software.

–48 V power interface It inputs the –48V power from PIU board or power box on the cabinet. The voltage range under normal working condition: –38.4 V to –57.6 V.

DIP switch The DIP switch of the 61COA is located on the lower left corner of the panel. It is used to set the ID of the 61COA. When it is in the upper state, it is OFF. When it is in the lower state, it is ON. The SCC identifies and communicates with 61COAs with different IDs. The DIP switch of the 62COA is used for setting the ID of 62COA and the type of fiber. For each bit of the 8-bit DIP switch (bit 8 to bit 1 from left to right), up position means 0 and down position means 1. The bits 1–4 show the board ID, and indicate the ID number ranging from 20 to 35. Normally the ID number ranges from 20 to 27. The fifth bit indicates the type of fiber. “0" indicates G.652 fiber, and “1” indicates G.655 fiber.

9.4.5 Installation

The COA adopts case-shape design, not occupying any slot in the subrack. In the OptiX cabinet, a special bracket is designed to hold the 61COA. The 62COA is installed directly in the cabinet with the mounting ears.

1. Installation of the 61COA The bracket is fixed on the crossbars on both sides of the cabinet. The 61COA is pushed into the brackets along the guide rail and fixed. One bracket can house two 61COAs side by side with the front panel of the 61COA facing the front side of the cabinet, as shown in Figure 9-18.



9-23

Figure 9-18 The position of the 61COA in the ETSI cabinet

2. Installation of the 62COA The 62COA can be installed in the 300 mm or 600 mm cabinet with mounting ears and screws. If adopting upward-wiring, the 62COA is installed at the bottom of the ETSI cabinet (first and third floating nuts). If adopting downward-wiring mode, the 62COA is installed in any idle place of the 2.6 m high cabinet or in the ETSI cabinet not fully configured.

9.4.6 Version Description.

The 61COA and 62COA are the externally installed case-shape optical amplifier. Their logic slots on the NM T2000 are slots 101 and 102. The 61COA and 62COA are applicable to the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500 and OptiX OSN 1500. The OptiX OSN 3500 and OptiX OSN 2500 can be equipped with up to two COAs, but the OptiX OSN 1500 can be equipped with only one COA.


Table 9-13 shows the technical parameters of the 61COA and 62COA. Table 9-13 Technical parameters of the 61COA and 62COA

Description Parameter 61COA 62COA

Dimensions (mm) 240 (L) x 190 (W) x 50 (H) 436 (L) x 294 (W) x 86 (H)

Weight (kg) 3.5 8


Processing capability One optical signal One optical signal

Connector SC/PC SC/PC and E2000

Operating wavelength (nm)

1550 1550.12

Input optical power range (dBm)

NA –39 to –20 (2.5 Gbit/s signal without FEC)



9-24

Description Parameter 61COA 62COA

Output optical power (dBm)

+14/+17 NA

Pump wavelength (nm) NA 1451.2

Max, on/off gain (dB) NA >15 (applied to G.652 fiber)

Noise figure (dB) NA <–1.5



9-25

9.5 DCU

The DCU is the dispersion compensation board. It can compensate for the optical signal dispersion accumulated during transmission in the 10 Gbit/s system. In addition, it compresses the optical signal and works with the booster amplifier to achieve long distance optical transmission. The DCU can be seated in slots 1–8 and slots 11–17 of the OptiX OSN 3500 subrack and it is only used in the 10 Gbit/s system.

9.5.1 Functionality

Use chirp grating to compensate for the optical dispersion and compress the pulse signal for signal recovery.

Make dispersion compensation to two channels of optical signals simultaneously, with the compensation being 1020 ps/nm (for dispersion generated on 60 km G.652 fiber) or 1360 ps/nm (for dispersion generated on 80 km G.652 fiber), or the free combination of the two.

Work with BA and PA for long distance optical transmission. 9.5.2 Application

After long distance transmission over optical fiber, the pulse of the 10 Gbit/s signal becomes broadened due to dispersion. The signal is distorted seriously and cannot be received by the optical receiver normally. Thus, the DCU is needed for dispersion compensation. Its position in the optical transmission system is shown in Figure 9-19.

BA PA DCU

1550.12 nm

1550.12 nm

Pulse compressingLong fiber

Opticaltransmitter

Opticalreceiver

Pulse broading

Figure 9-19 The position of DCU in the optical transmission system

Note: The operating wavelength of the chirp grating of the DCU is 1550.12 nm, so it is required that the central wavelength of the optical signal sent from the remote optical interface board is also 1550.12 nm. Otherwise, it is impossible to make dispersion compensation to the optical signal. And insertion loss is very large and no optical signal is output.



9-26

9.5.3 Principle

Figure 9-20 shows the functional block diagram of the DCU.

IN

OUT

Coupler

Chirp grating

Longw avelength

Shortw avelength

Input

Output

Figure 9-20 Functional block diagram of the DCU

1. In Receive Direction The 10 Gbit/s optical signal is sent into IN interface of the coupler, and then to the chirp grating through the single port of the coupler after an attenuation of 3 dB. For spectrum components with different wavelengths, the chirp grating has different reflection positions. The reflection position for short wavelength components is at the inner part of the grating, which means a longer transport distance. While that for long wavelength components is at the external part of the grating, which means a shorter transport distance. Additionally, the delay of signals with different frequencies is different. As a result, the signals reflected back by the grating is “compressed”, thus achieving the compensation effect.

2. In Transmit Direction The signal after compensation will be returned to the coupler and then sent out from the OUT interface after an attenuation of 3 dB. These pulse-compressed optical signals can be received by receiver and transmitted for a long distance over optical fiber.

9.5.4 Front Panel

The front panel of the DCU is shown in Figure 9-21.



9-27

DCU

OUT1 OUT2

IN1 IN2

DCU

Figure 9-21 Front panel of the DCU

1. Indicators None

2. Interfaces There are two pairs of LC optical interfaces on the front panel of the DCU for receiving and transmitting two 10 Gbit/s optical signals. Using pluggable optical module is easy for maintenance.



9-28


The DCU board has two versions: N1 and N2. The DCU is only applicable to the OptiX OSN 3500. The N2 version DCU, as a low insertion loss DCU, brings the insertion loss 3-5 dB less than what the N1 version DCU brings.

Caution: When replacing the N1 version DCU with an N2 version DCU, add an attenuator to avoid optical power overload.


The technical parameters of the DCU are shown in Table 9-14. Table 9-14 Technical parameters of the DCU



Processing capability Dispersion compensation for 2 x STM-64 optical signals


Connector LC

Dimensions (mm)

262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W)

H

WD

Weight (kg) 0.42


Central wavelength (nm) 1550.12 ±0.05

–0.5 dB bandwidth (nm) >0.4

Dispersion compensation (ps/nm) 1020 (60 km) 1360 (80 km)

Insertion loss (dB) <8.3 <3






9-29




9-30

9.6 AUX/EOW/SAP/SEI

The AUX, EOW, SAP and SEI are the system auxiliary interface board, providing the system with various auxiliary interfaces, management interfaces, central backup of the +3.3 V board power supply, orderwire interface and broadcast data interface. The AUX has three versions: N1, R1 and R2. The SAP and SEI has one version Q1, the EOW has one version R1. Table 9-15 shows their slots in OptiX OSN products. Table 9-15 Slots for the AUX, EOW, SAP and SEI

Board Function Product Slot

N1AUX System auxiliary interface board

OptiX OSN 3500 Slot 37

Q1SAP System auxiliary processing board

OptiX OSN 2500 OptiX OSN 2500 REG

Slot 14

Q1SEI The extended signal interface board, providing the system with various auxiliary interfaces and management interfaces

OptiX OSN 2500 OptiX OSN 2500 REG

Auxiliary interface area

R1EOW Orderwire board, providing orderwire interface and broadcast data interface


R1/R2AUX System auxiliary interface board


9.6.1 Functionality

Board Function

N1AUX R1/R2AUX R1EOW Q1SAP Q1SEI

Management interface

Provide an X.25-compliantOAM interface; Provide an F&f serial interface; Provide a ETH NM interface ; Provide a EXT interface to manage extended subracks.

Provide an X.25-compliantOAM/F&f interface; Provide a ETH NM interface.

— Provide a ETH NM interface.

Provide an X.25-compliantOAM interface; Provide an F&f serial interface.



9-31

Board Function


Auxiliary interface

Provide Serial 1–4 broadcast data interfaces; Provide F1 codirectional data interface (64 kbit/s) .

— Provide Serial 1–4 broadcast data interfaces; Provide F1 codirectional data interface (64 kbit/s), which also serves as the OAM interface.

— Provide Serial 1–4 broadcast data interfaces; Provide F1 codirectional data interface (64 kbit/s).

Clock interface Provide two 2.048 MHz BITS clock input/output interfaces; Provide two 2.048 Mbit/s BITS clock input/output interfaces .

Provide two BITS clock input/output interfaces with impedance being 120 Ω.

— — Provide two BITS clock input/output interfaces with impedance being 120 Ω. Provide two BITS clock input/output interfaces with impedance being 75 Ω.

House- keeping alarm interface

Provide house-keeping alarm interface for 16 inputs and 4 outputs; Provide a output alarms concatenating interface for 4 output alarms.

Provide house-keeping alarm interface for three inputs and one output.

— Support house-keeping alarm input, output, and output concatenation.

Provide house-keeping alarm interface for 8 inputs and 4 outputs; Provide a output alarms concatenating interface for 4 output alarms.

Cabinet alarm indicator

Provide a four cabinet alarms output interface; Provide a four input cabinet alarms concatenating interface.

— — Drive and concatenate four cabinet indicator signals.

Provide a four cabinet alarms output interface; Provide a four input cabinet alarms concatenating interface.



9-32

Board Function


Orderwire interface

Provide one orderwire interface. Provide two off network signaling interface. Provide two off network audio interface.

— Provide one orderwire interface.

— Provide one orderwire interface. Provide two off network signaling interface. Provide two off network audio interface.

Commissioning interface

Provide one commissioning interface (COM).

Provide one commissioning interface (COM).

— Provide one commissioning interface (COM).

—

Internal communication

Support communication between boards on one subrack.

Support communication between boards on one subrack.

— Support communication between boards on one subrack.

—

Orderwire processing

— — Process E1, E2, F1, Serial 1–4 bytes.

Process E1, E2, F1, Serial 1–4 bytes.

—

Power backup and detection

Monitor two –48 V subrack power supplies and detect over-voltage (–72 V) and undervoltage; Provide centralized backup of +3.3 V board power (secondary power supply 1:N protection). Detect over-voltage (3.8 V) and under-voltage (3.1 V) for 3.3 V standby power supply. The power is 80 w.

— Monitor two –48 V subrack power supplies and detect over-voltage (–72 V) and undervoltage . Provide centralized backup of +3.3 V board power (secondary power supply 1:N protection). The power is 1000 w. Detect over-voltage (3.8 V) and under-voltage (3.1 V) for 3.3 V standby power supply.

—



9-33

Board Function


Audio alarm Support audio alarm and alarm cut-up.

Support audio alarm and alarm cut-up.

— Support audio alarm and alarm cut-up.

—

9.6.2 Principle Of AUX

The AUX consists of communication module, interface module and power module. Figure 9-22 shows its functional block diagram.

+5 V

Communica-tion

moduleInterfacemodule

Inter-boardcommunication interface

NM interface

Auxiliaryinterface

Powermodule-48 V

+3.3 V(standby powersupply for each

board)

+3.3 V+2.7 V

Figure 9-22 Functional block diagram of the AUX

1. Communication Module Provide the NM interface for active/standby SCCs, OAM interface for remote maintenance, and interfaces for inter-board communication.

2. Interface Module Provide various auxiliary interfaces, such as F&f, OAM, F1 and clock input/output. The N1 AUX and R1/R2 AUX provide different auxiliary interfaces. For details, see section 9.6.1.

3. Power Module Provide the AUX with working power, and other boards on the subrack with +3.3 V centralized backup power.

9.6.3 Principle of EOW

Figure 9-23 shows the functional block diagram of the EOW.



9-34

Overheadprocessing unit SCC

unit

Broadcastingdata interfaceand orderwire

processing unitRinging current

generating,resetting, timing

unit

S1

PHONE

BackplaneFrontpanel

S2S3S4

Figure 9-23 Functional block diagram of the EOW

The overhead processing module processes E1, E2, F1, and Serial 1–4 bytes. The position of each overhead byte in the SDH frame is shown in Figure 9-24.

A1 A1 A1 A2 A2 A2 J0

B1 E1 F1

D1 D2 D3 Serial1 Serial2

AU_PTR

B2 B2 B2 K1 K2

D4 Serial 4 D5 D6

D7 D8 D9

D10 D11 D12 Serial3

S1 M1 E2

Figure 9-24 Position of orderwire bytes in the SDH frame

9.6.4 Principle of SAP

Figure 9-25 shows the functional block diagram of the SAP.



9-35

Systemcommunication

module

Overheadprocessing

module

Powermonitoring

module

13 communications between boards

2 NM itnerfaces

2 protocol bus

ETH

1 orderwire phone

2 SDH NNI phones

1 F1

4 S1-S4

8 alarm inputs/4 alarm outputsand concatenation

Cabinet indicator activatingand concatenation

2 -48V power monitoring

3.3V backup power monitoring

COM

Frontpanel

Backplane

Figure 9-25 Functional block diagram of the SAP

1. Overhead Processing Module It processes E1, E2, F1, and Serial 1–4 bytes. Figure 9-24 shows the position of each orderwire byte in the SDH frame.

2. System Communication Module It implements communication between 13 boards and provides a bus for transmitting MSP, SNCP, TPS protection switching and clock protocol.

3. Power Monitoring Module It detects two –48 V power supplies and 3.3 V backup power supply, and implements eight house-keeping alarm inputs and four house-keeping alarm outputs and their concatenation, and the drive and concatenation of four cabinet indicators.

9.6.5 Principle of SEI

Figure 9-26 shows the functional block diagram of the SEI.



9-36

House-keeping alarm

input

Indicator output

Orderw

ire interfaceO

utgoing subnet voice

Clock input interface

Series 1Series 2Series 3Series 4

F1O

AM

F&f

防护和滤波电路Protection and filtering circuits

Backplane

Front panelHouse-keeping alarm

outputH

ouse-keeping alarm concatenation

Indicator concatenation

House-keeping alarm

output

Clock output interface

Figure 9-26 Functional block diagram of the SEI

The SEI provides a protect and filter circuit. The SEI accesses and sends various control and management signals to the CXL and SAP for processing.

9.6.6 Front Panel

1. N1AUX There is an indicator on the N1AUX front panel to show its working status, as described in Table 9-16. Table 9-16 Indicator of the AUX


On, green The +3.3 V power supply is normal.

On, red The +3.3 V power supply is abnormal, and the AUX board is fed with the backup power.

STAT (red and green)

Off Both the +3.3 V working power and the backup power fail, and the board is fed with no power.

The interfaces of the N1AUX are described in Table 9-17.



9-37

Table 9-17 Interfaces of the N1AUX

Front panel Interface Description Interface type

CLKO1 75 Ω clock output interface 1 SMB

CLKO2 75 Ω clock output interface 2 SMB

CLK1 120 Ω clock interface 1 RJ-45

REV Reserved RJ-45

F&f F&f interface RJ-45

F1 F1 interface RJ-45

PHONE Orderwire interface RJ-45

V1 Off network audio interface 1 RJ-45

V2 Off network audio interface 2 RJ-45

OAM OAM interface RJ-45

S1 Serial 1 RJ-45

S2 Serial 2 RJ-45

S3 Serial 3 RJ-45

S4 Serial 4 RJ-45

CLKI1 75 Ω clock input interface 1 SMB

CLKI2 75 Ω clock input interface 2 SMB

CLK2 120 Ω clock interface 2 RJ-45

ETH NM interface RJ-45

COM COM commissioning interface RJ-45

EXT Extended subrack interface RJ-45

LAMP1 Cabinet indicator output interface RJ-45

LAMP2 Input cabinet indicator concatenating interface

RJ-45

ALMO1 House-keeping alarm concatenating interface

RJ-45

ALMO2 1–4 house-keeping alarm output interface

RJ-45

ALMI1 1–4 house-keeping alarm input interface

RJ-45

CLKI1

CLKI2

CLKO1

CLKO2

CLK2

ETH

COM

EXT

LAMP1

LAMP2

ALMO1

ALMO2

ALMI1

ALMI2

ALMI3

ALMI4

CLK1

REV

F&f

PHONE

V1

V2

OAM

S1

S2

S3

S4

F1

STAT


RJ-45



9-38

Front panel Interface Description Interface type


RJ-45


RJ-45

Table 9-18 Pin assignment of CLK1 and CLK2 interface

Front view Pin No. Description

1 Negative receiving end

2 Positive receiving end

3 Ground

4 Negative transmission end

5 Positive data transmission end

6 Ground

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

7 and 8 Not defined.

Table 9-19 Pin assignment of ETH, COM, EXT and F1 interface


1 Positive data transmission end

2 Negative transmission end

3 Positive receiving end

4 Not defined.

5 Not defined.

6 Negative receiving end

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

7 and 8 Not defined.

Table 9-20 Pin assignment of F&f interface


4 RS-232 receiving end

5 Ground

8 RS-232 transmission end

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

1, 2, 3, 6 and 7 Not defined.



9-39

Table 9-21 Pin assignment of PHONE, V1 and V2 interface


4 Signal 1

5 Signal 2

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

1, 2, 3, 6, 7 and 8 Not defined.

Table 9-22 Pin assignment of LAMP1 and LAMP2 interface


1 The positive of critical alarm signal

2 The negative of cirtical alarm signal

3 The positivie of major alarm signal

4 The positive of power indicator signal

5 The negative of power indicator signal

6 The negative of major alarm signal

7 The positive of minor alarm signal

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

8 The negative of minor alarm signal

Table 9-23 Pin assignment of ALMO1 and ALMO2 interface


1 The positive of critical alarm output signal

2 The negative of cirtical alarm output signal

3 The positivie of major alarm output signal

4 The positive of alarm 1 output signal

5 The negative of alarm 1 output signal

6 The negative of major alarm output signal

7 The positive of alarm 2 output signal

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

8 The negative of alarm 2 output signal



9-40

Table 9-24 Pin assignment of OAM interface


1 Request to send

2 Data terminal ready

3 Transmit data

4 GND

5 GND

6 Receive data

7 Data set ready

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

8 Ready to recieve

Table 9-25 Pin assignment of S1, S2, S3 and S4 interface


1 The positive of RS-422 data transmission

2 The negative of RS-422 data transmission

3 The positivie of RS-422 data recieving

4 RS-232 data recieving

5 Ground

6 The negative of RS-422 data recieving

7 Not defined.

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

8 RS-232 data transmission

Table 9-26 Pin assignment of ALMI1 interface


1 Alarm input 1

2 The ground of alarm input 1

3 Alarm input 2

4 Alarm input 3



7 Alarm input 4

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1




9-41



1 Alarm input 5


3 Alarm input 6

4 Alarm input 7



7 Alarm input 8

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1




1 Alarm input 9


3 Alarm input 10

4 Alarm input 11



7 Alarm input 12

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1




1 Alarm input 13


3 Alarm input 14

4 Alarm input 15



7 Alarm input 16

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1




9-42

2. R1/R2AUX There is no indicator on the R1/R2AUX front panel. The interfaces on the R1/R2AUX front panel are described in Table 9-30. Table 9-30 Interfaces on the R1/R2AUX front panel

Interface Description Interface type

ETH NM interface RJ-45

COM Commissioning interface RJ-45

CLK 120 Ω external clock input/output interface

RJ-45

ALM House-keeping alarm input/output interface

RJ-45

OAM/F&f NM and management serial interface RJ-45

3. EOW There are two indicators on the EOW front panel as described in Table 9-31. Table 9-31 Indicators of the EOW



On, green The board hardware fails.

STAT (red or green)








PROG (red or green)




9-43

The interfaces on the EOW front panel are described in Table 9-32. Table 9-32 Interfaces of the EOW


PHONE Orderwire interface RJ-11

S1 Broadcast data interface S1 RJ-45




4. SAP There are indicators on the SAP front panel. For their description, see Table 9-31. The interfaces on the SAP front panel are described in Table 9-33. Table 9-33 Interfaces of the SAP

Interface Description

COM Commissioning interface

ETH NM interface

5. SEI There is no indicator on the Q1SEI front panel. The interfaces on the SEI front panel are described in Table 9-34. Table 9-34 Interfaces of the SEI



ALMO1 4 house-keeping alarms output interface

RJ-45 ALM1 4 house-keeping alarms input interface

RJ-45

ALMO2 4 output house-keeping alarms concatenating interface

RJ-45 ALM2 4 house-keeping alarms input interface

RJ-45



9-44



LAMP1 4 cabinet alarm indicators output interface

RJ-45 S1 Serial 1 RJ-45

LAMP2 4 input cabinet alarm indicators concatenating interface

RJ-45 S2 Serial 2 RJ-45

OAM OAM interface RJ-45 S3 Serial 3 RJ-45

F1 F1 interface RJ-45 S4 Serial 4 RJ-45

F&f F&f interface RJ-45 V1 Off network audio interface 1

RJ-45

PHONE Orderwire interface RJ-45 V2 Off network audio interface 2

RJ-45

CLK1 120 Ω clock 1 RJ-45 18 Reserved RJ-45

CLK2 120 Ω clock 2 RJ-45 20 Reserved RJ-45

CLKO1 75 Ω clock output 1 SMB CLKO2 75 Ω clock output 2 SMB

CLK1 75 Ω clock input 1 SMB CLK2 75 Ω clock input 2 SMB

CLKO1 CLKO2 CLKI1 CLKI2

CLK1 CLK2PHONEF&fF1OAMLAMP2LAMP1ALMO2ALMO1

ALM2ALM1 S1 S2 S3 S4 V1 V2

9.6.7 Alarm Concatenation

1. House-keeping alarm concatenation Figure 9-27 shows the connection of alarm input and output of a single or multiple OptiX OSN 3500 subrack. Figure 9-28 shows the connection of alarm input and output of a single or multiple OptiX OSN 2500 subrack. Connect the alarm output interface to the alarm concatenation interface downstream. Make the connections one by one until the alarm output is connected to the centralized alarm system.



9-45

ALMO1

ALMO2

ALMI1

ALMO1

ALMO2

ALMI1

Subrack 1

Cabinet 1 Cabinet 2

Centralizedalarm system

ALMO1

ALMO2

ALMI1

ALMO1

ALMO2

ALMI1

Subrack 2

Subrack 3

Subrack 4

Figure 9-27 Connection of alarm input and alarm output (OptiX OSN 3500)

ALMO1

Subrack 1

Cabinet 1

To thecentralized

alarm systemALMO2

ALMO1 ALMO2

ALMO1 ALMO2

ALMO1 ALMO2

Subrack 2

Subrack 3

Subrack 4

Cabinet 2

Figure 9-28 Connection of alarm input and alarm output (OptiX OSN 2500)

2. Cabinet alarm indicator connection The connection of the four OptiX OSN 3500 cabinet alarm indicators is shown in Figure 9-29. The connection of the four OptiX OSN 2500 cabinet alarm indicators is shown in Figure 9-30. Connect the cabinet alarm indicator signal output of subrack 2 to the concatenated cabinet alarm indicator input of subrack 1, and then connect the cabinet alarm indicator signal output of subrack 1 to the indicator interface on the top of the cabinet.



9-46

subrack 1

Cabinet indicator

LAMP2

LAMP1

LAMP2

LAMP1

4 cabinet alarm indicators

subrack 2

Figure 9-29 Connection of cabinet alarm indicators (OptiX OSN 3500)

LAMP1

Subrack 2

Cabinet

Cabinetindicators

LAMP2

LAMP1 LAMP2

Subrack 1

Figure 9-30 Connection of cabinet alarm indicators (OptiX OSN 2500)

9.6.8 DIP Switch and Jumper

The jumper J9 at the lower right part of the N1AUX board is used to set the OptiX OSN 3500 as the main subrack or extended subrack, as shown in Table 9-35. Table 9-35 Jumper J9 setting

Jumper Setting Description

shorted Set the OptiX OSN 3500 as the main subrack. J9

Not shorted Set the OptiX OSN 3500 as the extended subrack.


The AUX has three versions: N1, R1 and R2. The SAP and SEI have one version Q1 and the EOW has one version R1. For the application of the AUX, EOW, SAP and SEI in OptiX OSN products, see Table 9-15.



9-47


Table 9-36 Technical parameters of the AUX, EOW, SAP and SEI

Description Parameter N1AUX R1/R2AUX EOW SAP SEI

Dimensions (mm)

262.05 (H) x 110 (D) x 44 (W)

111.8 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W)

111.8 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W)

262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W)

290 (H) x 30 (D) x 25.4 (W)

Weight (kg) 0.96 0.96 0.40 0.71 0.91


19 19 10 20 10











9-48

9.7 PIU

The PIU or PIUA is a power interface board. It functions power access, lightening protection and filtering. The PIU has three versions: N1, Q1 and R1. The PIUA has one version R1.

The N1PIU is applicable to the OptiX OSN 3500 and seated in slots 27 and 28. The Q1PIU is applicable to the OptiX OSN 2500 and OptiX OSN 2500 REG and

seated in slots 22 and 23. The R1PIU is applicable to the OptiX OSN 1500B and seated in slots 18 and 19. The R2PIU is applicable to the OptiX OSN 1500A and seated in slots 1 and 11.

9.7.1 Functionality

Provide lightning protection function and report the lightning protection failure alarm.

Enhance the electro magnetic compatibility (EMC) of the system by filtering and shielding the power supply.

Report the board in position information. Support 1+1 hot backup protection. Any one PIU can provide power for the whole

subrack independently. Supply the FAN board with 48 V±20% power. The N1PIU provides two 50 W power interfaces for external devices such as COA

and HUB. The Q1PIU and R2PIU provide one 50 W power interface for external devices such as COA and HUB. The R1PIU does not provide external power interface.

The R1PIU provides a 75 Ω clock input interface and a 75 Ω clock output interface, and protects the clock signal.

9.7.2 Principle of N1PIU and Q1PIU

Figure 9-31 shows the functional block diagram of the N1PIU and Q1PIU.

Backplane

BGND

SCC

Lightningprotectionunit andfailure

detection

Filter unit

Lightning protection unit failure alarm

-48V

Pow eraccess

unit

Figure 9-31 The principle block diagram of the PIU

1. Power Access Unit The power access unit accesses the –48/–60 V power for the system.

2. Lightning Protection Unit The lightning protection unit is for overcurrent and lightning protection. The PIU will



9-49

report the failure of lightning protection unit to the SCC.

3. Filter Unit The filter unit uses the electromagnetic interference (EMI) filter to filter the EMI signal to guarantee the stable operation of the equipment.

9.7.3 Principle of R1PIU

Figure 9-32 shows the functional block diagram of the R1PIU.

Lightningprotection

unitFilterunit

Powerdetection

NEG(-)

RTN(+)

NEG(-)

RTN(+)

LED indication

Clock input Clock outputClockprotection

Figure 9-32 Functional block diagram of the R1PIU

1. Power Access Unit The power access unit accesses the –48/–60 V power for the system.

2. Lightning Protection Unit The lightning protection unit is for overcurrent and lightning protection.


4. Power Detection Detect whether the input power fails and indicates the status of the input power through an indicator.

5. Clock Protection Protect the input clock signal.

9.7.4 Principle of R2PIU

Figure 9-33 shows the functional block diagram of the R2PIU.



9-50

Lightningprotection

unit

Fan powerunit

Powerdetectio

n

NEG(-)

RTN(+)

NEG(-)

RTN(+)

LEDindication

Filterunit

Externalpower supply

interface

Figure 9-33 Functional block diagram of the R2PIU

1. Power Access Unit The power access unit accesses the –48 V/–60 V power for the system.

2. Lightning Protection Unit The lightning protection unit is for overcurrent and lightning protection.


4. Power Detection Detect whether the input power fails and indicates the status of the input power through an indicator.

5. Fan Power Unit Provide the fan with regulated power supply.

6. External power interface unit Provide external equipment (COA) with –48 V power. The power interface is on the front panel.

9.7.5 Front Pane

1. N1PIU The N1PIU front panel is shown in Figure 9-34.



9-51

Figure 9-34 Front panel of the N1PIU

There are power interfaces on the N1PIU front panel, as described in Table 9-37. Table 9-37 Interfaces on the N1PIU front panel


PWR –48 V power access interface

PS1/PS2 50 W power output interface, supplying power for COA or HUB

2. Q1PIU The Q1PIU front panel is shown in Figure 9-35.

Figure 9-35 Front panel of the Q1PIU



9-52

There are power interfaces on the Q1PIU front panel, as described in Table 9-38. Table 9-38 Interfaces of the Q1PIU


PWR –48 V power access interface

PWS 50 W power output interface, supplying power for COA or HUB

3. R1PIU The R1PIU front panel is shown in Figure 9-36.

Figure 9-36 Front panel of the R1PIU

There is an indicator on the R1PIU front panel as described in Table 9-39. Table 9-39 Indicator of the R1PIU


On, green Power input is normal. Power indicator (POWER)

Off No power input or power failure

There are interfaces on the Q1PIU front panel as described in Table 9-40. Table 9-40 Interfaces of the Q1PIU


PWR –48 V power input interface

ClK IN 75 Ω clock input interface (SMB)

ClK OUT 75 Ω clock output interface (SMB)

4. R2PIU The N1PIU front panel is shown in Figure 9-37.



9-53

Figure 9-37 Front panel of the R2PIU

The indicator on the R2PIU front panel is the same as that on the R1PIU. Refer to Table 9-39. There are two interfaces and one switch on the R2PIU front panel, as described in Table 9-41. Table 9-41 Indicators and the switch on the R2PIU front panel


PWR –48 V power input interface

PWS 50 W power output interface, supplying power for COA or HUB.

Power switch Switch on the power by pushing the switch to the ON (1) position.Switch off the power by pushing the switch to the OFF (0) position.



9-54


The NIPIU is applicable to the OptiX OSN 3500 and seated in slots 27 and 28. The Q1PIU is applicable to the OptiX OSN 2500 and OptiX OSN 2500 REG, and seated in slots 22 and 23. The R1PIU is applicable to the OptiX OSN 1500B and seated in slots 18 and 19. The R2PIU is applicable to the OptiX OSN 1500A and seated in slots 1 and 11.


Table 9-42 Technical parameters of the PIU

Description Parameter N1PIU Q1PIU R1PIU R2PIU

Input voltage –38.4 V to –72 V

–38.4 V to –72 V –38.4 V to –72 V –38.4 V to –72 V

Protecion tube F7

Main loop: 250 V-20 A-0.00355 Ω

Main loop: 250V-20A-0.00355 Ω

Main loop: 250V-10A-0.006 Ω

Main loop: 250V-10A-0.006 Ω

Dimensions (mm)

262.05 x 110 x 44

220 x 74 x 44 108 x 110 x 41.5 111.8 x 220 x 25.4

Weight (kg) 1.15 1.25 1.25 1.5


8 8 3 3











9-55

9.8 UPM

The uninterruptible power module (UPM), numbered GIE4805S, is a special power supply system. It can convert 110 V/220 V AC power supply directly to –48 V DC needed by transmission equipment, such as OptiX OSN 2500/1500. It is suitable for telecom carriers who do not have –48 V DC power supply equipment or who require storage batteries. The UPM power supply system consists of a power box (from 110 V/220 V to –48 V) and storage batteries. The output power of each UPM is 2 x 270 W. The power box is 1U high and can be installed directly in the 19-inch or ETSI cabinet. The appearance of the power box is shown in Figure 9-38.

GIE4805S

Figure 9-38 Appearance of the power box

Note: The UPM is displayed as a CAU board on the T2000. You can operate the CAU to manage and maintain the UPM power system.

The UPM power supply system can be protected by the storage battery. When the mains 110V/220V AC supply is interrupted, the battery module can supply power for nearly 4 hours. Only one power box is needed to connect to storage batteries when used with OptiX OSN 2500 or OptiX OSN 1500. For more detailed information, refer to OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Installation Manual.



9-56

9.8.1 Functionality

The OptiX OSN 2500 or OptiX OSN 1500 needs to be configured with two power boxes and four 12 V-40 Ah storage batteries. If the equipment does not need storage battery, one power box is all right. Each power box is configured with two rectifier modules and one monitoring module (standard configuration).

1. Hot Backup The power conversion part of the UPM power supply system adopts two AC/DC rectifier modules for hot backup, and the rectifier module can balance load during working. If one rectifier module fails, the other will take over all the load immediately, not affecting the service on the equipment and thus enhancing the stability of the system.

2. Hot-Swap In the UPM power supply system, the AC/DC rectifier module is hot-swappable. When the faulty rectifier module is replaced, the other one is still working normally.

3. Storage Battery Protection The UPM power supply system can be protected by the storage battery. When the mains supply is interrupted, the UPM power system can switch automatically to the storage battery, ensuring normal operation of the equipment. The battery module can provide 40 Ah capacity.

4. Monitoring Function The UPM power supply system integrates module monitoring and NM monitoring functions. The monitoring module can monitor and control the rectifier module, the parameters and status of AC/DC and the battery group in real time and report them to the transmission NM. The battery can achieve floating charge and current limitation management.

5. Loading Capacity The load bearing capability of each rectifier module is designed to be 270 W.

9.8.2 Principle

The UPM power supply system is supplied by one 220 V AC mains power. The input AC power is rectified into –48 V DC voltage by the rectifier module to provide two DC branches and one battery branch to the users. Under normal conditions, the rectifier module, storage battery loop and load loop work according to pre-defined parameters or user settings and they are under control of the monitoring module. The monitoring module monitors various statuses and data. In case of mains supply failure, the equipment will be supplied by storage batteries connected to the UPM power supply system. The batteries must be connected to the UPM power supply system before mains supply failure happens. When batteries start to discharge due to mains supply failure, the monitoring unit will report the alarm of no mains supply. With the discharge of batteries, battery voltage starts to drop. When battery voltage is lower than 45 V, the monitoring unit will report the alarm of DC under-voltage. When battery voltage reaches 43 V termination voltage, batteries will initiate power disconnection protection to cut connection of batteries with equipment to achieve automatic protection of batteries.



9-57

When mains supply is recovered, the UPM power supply system resumes normal operation.

9.8.3 Front Panel

The rear view of the power box is shown in Figure 9-39.

AC100~240

ALM Vout ALM Vout

ALMRUN

RS232

1 2 3 4

5 6

1. AC input 2. Rectifier module/air outlet 3. Communication interface 4. Battery interface 5. Load 6. Load Figure 9-39 Rear view of the power box

1. Indicators There are two indicators (ALM and Vout) on the left side of the front panel of each rectifier module and two indicators (ALM and RUN) on the front panel of the monitoring module. When the power box works normally, the Vout indicators of the two rectifier modules are on (green) and the RUN indicator of the monitoring board is flashing (green). Table 9-43 Indicators of the power box

Module Indicator Status Description

ALM On (red) The rectifier module is faulty. Rectifier module

Vout On (green) The output of the rectifier is normal.

RUN Flashing (green) The power system is normal. Monitoring module

ALM On (red) The power system is faulty.

2. Interfaces The interfaces of the power box are described in Table 9-44. Table 9-44 Interfaces on the power box front panel


AC100–240 It is an AC mains input socket for accessing 110 V/220 V AC power.

Red on/off button It is at the upper right corner of the front panel of the rectifier module. You can enable/disable the rectifier module by pressing the button.



9-58


RS-232 communication interface

Through this interface the UPM power supply system can communication with the SCC board of OptiX OSN products to report alarms and realize remote control. (The RS-232 serial port of one power box is connected to the F&f interface of OptiX OSN products, the RS-232 serial port of the other power box is connected to the ALM1 interface of the OptiX OSN products.)

Power output interface

There are three power output interfaces on the right of the power box. The one above is battery interface, through which the power box connects to the battery input socket at the back of the storage battery box with battery cable. The two interfaces below are load interface. They can supply power to OptiX OSN products through power cable.

9.8.4 Precautions

The battery input interface and load input interface shall not be mixed. Otherwise the UPM power supply system cannot work normally.

When load is added with power on, the strict tool and personal insulation measures must be taken to avoid accidents during operation.


Table 9-45 shows the technical parameters of the UPM. Table 9-45 Technical parameters of the UPM


AC input voltage range 90 V–264 V AC

AC input One channel of monophase three-wire AC power: 47 Hz–63 Hz

Rated input current ≤3.5 A

Output nominal voltage 54.0 V±0.5 V

Rated output current 10 A (two user load branches with each current not more than 5 A)

Number of backup battery groups

1 group (40 Ah)

Charging current of backup battery

≤3 A

Backup battery fuse 10 A

Storage battery: DC under-current point

45±0.5 V

Storage battery: termination voltage point

43±0.5 V



9-59


Storage battery: floating charge voltage

–54.0±0.5V

Regulated voltage precision ≤±1%

Non-balance of load sharing

≤±5% (50%–100% load)

Rated efficiency of integrated equipment

≥80%

Peak stray noise voltage ≤200 mV

Voltage drop in the power panel (20)

≤500 mV

Network adjustment rate ≤±0.1%

Dimensions of a power box 438 mm x 240 mm x 44 mm

Dimensions of a storage battery

197 mm x 165 mm x 170 mm

9.9 FAN

The OptiX OSN equipment uses the modularized fan, as shown in Figure 9-40. The FAN is a fan control board, responsible for fan speed adjustment, fan failure detection and failure report, as well as report of the fan not-in-position alarm. The fan has two versions N1 and R1. The N1FAN is applicable to the OptiX OSN 3500 and OptiX OSN 2500, and the R1FAN is applicable to the OptiX OSN 1500. The OptiX OSN 3500 subrack uses three fan boxes. The OptiX OSN 2500 subrack uses two fan boxes. The OptiX OSN 1500 subrack uses one fan box.

Figure 9-40 Appearance of the FAN (OptiX OSN 3500)



9-60

9.9.1 Functionality

The fan boxes support hot swapping. Power supplies for N1 fan boxes are for mutual backup. Provide intelligent fan speed adjustment, which is reflected in the following

aspects: − Adjust the fan speed automatically − When one fan goes faulty, others operate at their full speeds − When the speed-adjusting signal is not normal, control the fans to operate at their full speeds.

Detect fan failure. Reports alarms and online information of fans. Provide an indicator on front panel to indicate the running status.

9.9.2 Principle of N1FAN

Figure 9-41 shows the functional block diagram of the N1FAN.

Pow er supply

Status signal

Speed adjusting signalStatus ouput

Alarm output

FAN

Pow er ground

Pow ersupply

External pow er supply 1

Fan

External pow er supply 2

External pow er ground 1



Fan pow er board

Figure 9-41 Functional block diagram of the N1FAN

1. Fan Power Board The FAN provides the fans with drive voltage.

2. Fan Control Board The value of the drive voltage is controlled by the fan speed-adjusting signal for different rotating speeds. The fan control board also detects the failure of the fans, fan power board and itself. At fault occurrence, it will report alarm to the SCC for sending command to make the other two fans operate at their full speeds. The FAN also receives the turn-off command in case of low temperature and turn off the fans. The following items involves in the detection by the fan control board: failure of the fan power board, fault of the speed-adjusting signal, fan failure, and fan in-position.



9-61

9.9.3 Principle of R1FAN

Figure 9-42 shows the functional block diagram of the R1FAN.

Poweraccess

unit

Statusdetection

unitVoltagedrop unit

FanDelaystart unit

－48 V 1

－48 V 2

GND1

GND2

GND

－48 V

GND

－48 V

－48 V

GN

D

－48 V GND

Fan alarmsignals

Figure 9-42 Functional block diagram of the R1FAN

1. Power Access Unit Provide –48 V power for the FAN.

2. Status Detection Unit Detect the status of the FAN. It reports the fan failure to the CXL and drive the corresponding alarm indicator when any of the six fans stops.

9.9.4 Front Panel

1. N1FAN There is an indicator on the front panel of the FAN to show its working status, as described in Table 9-46. Table 9-46 Indicator of the N1FAN

Indicator Color Description

On, green The fan operates normally.

On, red The fan, fan power board or fan control board is abnormal.

STATE (red, yellow and green)

On, yellow The fan is turned off due to low temperature.

2. R1FAN The R1FAN front panel is shown in Figure 9-43.



9-62

FANRUN

ALM

Figure 9-43 Front panel of the R1FAN

The indicators on the R1FAN front panel are described in Table 9-47. Table 9-47 Indicators of the R1FAN

Indicator Color Description

On, green The board operates normally. RUN

Off, green The board is not powered.

On, red A fan stops. ALM

Off, red The fans operate normally.


The FAN has two versions: N1 and R1. The N1FAN is applicable to the OptiX OSN 3500 and OptiX OSN 2500, and the R1FAN is applicable to the OptiX OSN 1500.


Table 9-48 Technical parameters of the FAN

Parameter Description N1FAN R1FAN

Dimensions (mm) 50.8 x 120 x 120 120 x 25.4 x 220

Weight (kg) 1.50 1.01

Power consumption (W) (Note)

15 (the input voltage is 48 V)

20 (the input voltage is 48 V)

Working voltage –48 V±20% DC



9-63

Parameter Description N1FAN R1FAN









Note: The value is the power consumption for each fan frame.

OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual 10 Cables


10-1

10 Cables

This chapter describes the cables in the following aspects: cable classification, cable structure, connector, and pin assignment. Cables used by the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, and OptiX OSN 1500 include:

Fiber jumper

Power cable and grounding cable

Alarm cable

Management cable

Clock cable

Signal cable

10.1 Fiber Jumper

10.1.1 Classification

The fiber jumpers used by the OptiX OSN 3500 are classified as shown in Table 10-1.



10-2

Table 10-1 Classification of fiber jumper

Usage Connector 1 Connector 2 Cable Length

2 mm SLM optical fiber

6 m, 10 m, 20 m, 30 m, 50 m

LC/PC FC/PC

2 mm MLM optical fiber

3 m, 5 m, 10 m, 20 m, 30 m, 50 m


5 m, 10 m, 20 m, 30 m, 50 m

LC/PC SC/PC


10 m, 20 m, 30 m, 50 m

Optical fiber connecting OSN equipment to the ODF or other equipment

SC/PC SC/PC 2 mm SLM optical fiber

2 m, 5 m, 10 m, 20 m, 30 m, 50 m, 80 m


1.5 m, 3 m, 5 m, 10 m, 20 m, 30 m

LC/PC LC/PC


3 m, 5 m, 10 m, 20 m, 30 m

LC/PC FC/PC 2 mm SLM optical fiber

6 m, 10 m, 20 m, 30 m, 50 m

LC/PC SC/PC 2 mm SLM optical fiber

5 m, 10 m, 20 m, 30 m, 50 m

Optical fiber connecting OSN equipments

LC/PC E2000/APC 2 mm SLM optical fiber

NA

Select fiber connector and fiber length according to the on-site survey. The OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 uses LC/PC fiber connector (SC/PC for the N2OU08 board). The “IN” interface on the externally-installed 62COA uses E2000/APC connector.

Caution:

Multi-transverse mode optical transmitting module needs to be connected to multi-mode fiber; the single-longitudinal mode or multi-longitudinal mode optical transmitting module needs to be connected to single-mode fiber.

10.1.2 Connector

Most optical interfaces on the OptiX OSN 3500/2500/2500 board front panel are of LC/PC type, as shown in Figure 10-1. The N2OU08 board provides SC/PC optical



10-3

interface. The “IN” interface of the externally-installed 62COA uses E2000/APC connector, as shown in Figure 10-4.

On the client-side ODF, the FC/PC or SC/PC optical interface is used. The matched FC/PC and SC/PC connectors are shown in Figure 10-3 and Figure 10-2 respectively. The four types of connector are described in Table 10-2.

Table 10-2 Classification of fiber connector

Internal fiber connector Description

LC/PC Plug-in square fiber connector/protruding polished

E2000/APC Connector with dust-proof cover/protruding polished (8°)

FC/PC Round fiber connector/protruding polished

SC/PC Square fiber connector/protruding polished

1. LC/PC Optical Interface

The appearance of the LC/PC optical interface is shown in Figure 10-1.

Figure 10-1 LC/PC optical interface

The plugging/unplugging of LC/PC optical interface only needs axial operation instead of rotation.

When inserting the fiber jumper with LC/PC connector, be careful to align the head of the fiber jumper with the optical interface on the optical board and push in the fiber with proper strength. When pulling it out, press the clip first, then push fiber connector inward slightly, and then pull out the connector.

2. SC/PC Optical Interface

The appearance of the SC/PC optical interface is shown in Figure 10-2.



10-4

Figure 10-2 SC/PC Optical interface

3. FC/PC Optical Interface

The appearance of the FC/PC optical interface is shown in Figure 10-3.

Figure 10-3 FC/PC optical interface

4. E2000/APC Optical Interface

The appearance of the E2000/APC optical interface is shown in Figure 10-4.



10-5

Figure 10-4 E2000/APC optical interface

10.2 Power Cable and Grounding Cable

The OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 power cables and grounding cables are listed in Table 10-3.

Table 10-3 OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 power cables and grounding cables


Cabinet –48V/BGND/PGND power cable



Cabinet door grounding cable

Cabinet door grounding cable _

Subrack power cable Subrack power cable Equipment –48 V/-60 V power cable/PGND power cable

HUB/COA power cable HUB/COA power cable _

_ UPM power cable UPM power cable

10.2.1 Cabinet –48 V/BGND/PGND Power cable

–48 V, BGND and PGND power cables are used for supplying power to the equipment in the cabinet. One end of the power cable connects to the power distribution cabinet and grounding bar in the equipment room, and the other end connects to the power distribution box at the cabinet top.

1. Structure

The structure of the –48 V cabinet power cable/BGND power cable is shown in Figure 10-5. The PGND power cable is shown in Figure 10-6.



10-6

1 2

3

1. Naked connector 2. Naked connector-OT type 3. Cable tie

Figure 10-5 –48 V cabinet power cable/cabinet BGND power cable

1. Naked connector-OT type 2. Cable tie 3. Naked connector 4. Heat-shrink tube 5. Main tag 6. Wire 7. Heat-shrink tube Figure 10-6 Cabinet PGND power cable

2. Pin Assignment

None

3. Technical Parameters Item Description

Connector 2 Naked crimping terminal-OT type-16 mm2-M8-tin plating-naked ring terminal

Connector 1 Single cord end terminal-16 mm2-length 24 mm-inserted 12 mm deep-80A-green

–48 V cabinet power cable

Cable type Power cable-450 V/750 V-16 mm2-round and bllue-85A



10-7

Item Description


Connector 1 Single cord end terminal-16 mm2-24 mm-inserted 12 mm deep-80A-green

Cabinet BGND grounding cable

Cable type Power cable-450 V/750 V-16 mm2-round and black-85A


Connector 3 Naked crimping connector-JG2-16 mm2-M6-95A-tin plating

Cabinet PGND grounding cable

Cable type Power cable-450 V/750 V-16 mm2-yellow and green-85A

Fireproof level CM

Length 10 m, 20 m, 30 m

10.2.2 Cabinet Door Grounding Cable

The cabinet door grounding cable grounds the front door, rear door and side panels. This cable is installed before delivery.

1. Structure

The structure of the cabinet door grounding cable is shown in Figure 10-7.

1. Naked connector--OT6-6 2. Heat-shrink tube 3. Main tag

Figure 10-7 Structure of the cabinet door grounding cable

2. Pin Assignment

None



10-8


Connector X1/X2 Naked crimping terminal-OT-6mm2-M6-tin plating-insulated ring terminal-12~10AWG

Model Wire-600 V-UL1015-10AWG-50A-yellow and green

Fireproof level CM

Cable

Length 350 mm

10.2.3 Subrack Power Cable

The subrack power cable connects the power distribution box at the cabinet top and the PIU board on the subrack, leading the –48 V power supply from the top of the cabinet to subrack. This cable is installed before delivery.

1. Structure

The structure of the subrack power cable is shown in Figure 10-8.

1. Cable connector 2. Main tag 3. Cable tie 4. Tag 5. Common connector

Figure 10-8 Structure of the subrack power cable

2. Pin Assignment

The pin assignment of the subrack power cable is shown in Table 10-4.

Table 10-4 Pin assignment of subrack power cable

Cable connector Bare connector Relation Core color

X1.A1 X2 A1 connects to X2 Blue (–48 V power)

X1.A3 X3 A3 connects to X3 Black (power ground)



10-9

3. Technical Parameters Item Parameter

Cable connector X1 Cable connector-D type-3PIN-female

Naked connector X2/X3 Single cord end terminal-4 mm2-20A-insertion depth 10mm-gray

Model Power cable-600 V-0 mm2-12AWG-balck (the core is blue and black)-41A

Number of cores

2

Fireproof level CM

Color Blue or black

Cable

Length 2500 mm, 3000 mm, 3500 mm

10.2.4 Equipment –48 V/–60 V Power Cable/PGND Grounding Cable

The –48 V/–60 V power cable and grounding cable connects –48 V/–60 V power supply to the PIU board of the OptiX OSN 1500 to access –48 V/–60 V power to the equipment.

1. Structure

The structure of the –48 V/–60 V power cable is shown in Figure 10-9 and that of the PGND grounding cable is shown in Figure 10-10.

AA3

A1

A2

Figure 10-9 Structure of the –48 V/–60 V power cable



10-10

1. Bare connector-OT type 2. Cable tie 3. Bare connector 4. Heat-shrink tube 5. Main tag 6. Wire 7. Heat-shrink tube

Figure 10-10 Structure of the PGND power cable

2. Pin Assignment

The pin assignment of the –48 V/–60 V power cable is shown in Table 10-5.

Table 10-5 Pin assignment of the –48 V/–60 V power cable

Cable connector Cable Core color

A1 W1 Blue (–48 V/–60 power)

A3 W2 Black (power ground)

3. Technical Parameters –48 V/–60 V power cable PGND grounding cable

Cable connector Cable connector-D type-3PIN-female

Bare connector-OT-6mm2-M4-tin plating-round insulated conennctor-12 to 10AWG

Bare connector-OT-6mm2-M8-tin plating-round insulated conennctor-12 to 10AWG



10-11

–48 V/–60 V power cable PGND grounding cable

Model Wire-300 V-16AWG-black(the core is blue and black)-13A

Wire-600 V-0mm2-10AWG-yellow/green-50A

Number of cores

2 1

Fireproof level

CM CM

Color Blue and black Yellow and green

Cable

Length 15 m, 30 m 15 m, 30 m

10.2.5 HUB/COA Power Cable

The OptiX OSN 3500/2500 PIU board can supply power to external equipment (such as COA or HUB). The HUB/COA power cable connects power port on the PIU and the power port of external equipment.

Both ends of the HUB/COA power cable use 4PIN connector, with one end connected to the PIU board and the other end to the power port of external equipment (HUB or COA).

1. Structure

The structure of the HUB/COA power cable is shown in Figure 10-11.

13

24

A-A1

2

3

B

BA

A

W1

W2

X1

X2

X3

W1

W2

W1.1

W1.2W2.1

W2.2

X3

1. Common connector-female 2. Plug-4PIN 3. Main tag A-A. Sectional view in A direction

Figure 10-11 Structure of the HUB/COA power cable



10-12

2. Pin Assignment

The pin assignment of the HUB/COA power cable is shown in Table 10-6.

Table 10-6 Pin assignment of the HUB power cable

Connector X1, X2 Cable W1, W2 Color Connector X3

X1.1 W1.1

X2.1 W2.1

Brown X3.1

X1.3 W1.2

X2.3 W2.2

Black X3.3


Connector X3 Common plug-4 PIN-double rows/4.20 mm

Connector X1/X2 Common terminal-female-4PIN-18/26AWG-13.7 mm in length

W1/W2 cable model Twisted pair-0Ω-UL2464-0.64mm-22AWG-1 pair-black

Number of cores 2

Fireproof level CM

Color Black

Length 1800 mm

10.2.6 UPM Power Cable

1. Structure

The structure of the power cable connecting UPM to the OptiX OSN 2500/1500 is shown in Figure 10-12.

X1 X2

A B

A

BA1A2A3

12

Figure 10-12 Structure of the subrack power cable



10-13

2. Pin Assignment

The pin assignment of the UPM power cable is shown in Table 10-7.

Table 10-7 Pin assignment of the UPM power cable

Cable connector X1

Cable Cable connector X2 Core color

A1 W1 1 Blue (–48 V/–60 V power)

A3 W2 2 Black (power ground)

3. Technical Parameters Item Parameter

Cable connector X1 Cable connector-D-spin-female (2 female, 1 male)

Common connector X2 Common terminal-2PIN-single row

Model Power cable-300 V-1.31 mm2-16AWG-black (the core is blue and black)-13A

Number of cores

2

Fireproof level CM

Color The color of the core is blue or black

Cable

Length 2500 mm



10-14

10.3 Alarm Cable

The OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 alarm cables are listed in:

Table 10-8 OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 alarm cable


Cabinet indicator cable Cabinet indicator cable _

Indicator/Alarm concatenating cable between OSN subracks

Indicator/Alarm concatenating cable between OSN subracks

_

Alarm concatenating cable between OSN subrack and other subrack

Alarm concatenating cable between OSN subrack and other subrack

_

Housekeeping alarm input/output cable



10.3.1 Cabinet Indicator Cable

The cabinet indicator cable is used to connect the AUX board on the subrack to the cabinet indicator, leading out the indicator signal from the AUX to the cabinet indicator.

1. Structure

The structure of the cabinet indicator is shown in Figure 10-13.

A-A. Sectional view in A direction B-B. Sectional view in B direction

Figure 10-13 Structure of the cabinet indicator cable

2. Pin Assignment

The pin assignment of the cabinet indicator cable is shown in Table 10-9.



10-15

Table 10-9 Pin assignment of the cabinet indicator cable

Connector X1 Connector X2,/X3/ X4/ X5

Color Relationship Function Label print

X1.4 X2.2 White Critical alarm

X1.5 X2.1 Green

Pair

Ground

Green

X1.1 X3.2 White Major alarm

X1.2 X3.1 Blue

Pair

ground

Red

X1.3 X4.2 White Power indicator

X1.6 X4.1 Brown

Pair

ground

Orange

X1.7 X5.2 White Minor alarm

X1.8 X5.1 Orange

Pair

Ground

Yellow


Connector X1 Network interface connector-8PIN-8bit-shielded-crystal model connector

Connector X2/X3/X4/X5

Common connector -2PIN-single row/2.5 mm

Cable model Twisted pair cable-120 Ω-SEYVPV-0.5 mm-24AWG-8 cores-PANTONE 430U

Number of cores 8

Fireproof level CM

Core diameter 0.5 mm

Length 2500 mm, 3000 mm, 3500 mm

10.3.2 Indicator/Alarm Concatenating Cables between OSN Subracks

The indicator/alarm concatenating cables between subracks respectively concatenates indicator and alarm signals of the OSN subracks in one cabinet or different cabinet. Both ends of the cable uses RJ-45 connector, with one end connected to LAMP1 or ALMO2 interface of one subrack and the other end to LAMP2 or ALMO1 interface of another subrack.



10-16

1. Structure

The structure of the indicator/alarm concatenating cables between OSN subracks is shown in Figure 10-14.

1. Network port connector – RJ-45

2. Tag 1 3. Main tag A-A. Sectional view in A direction

Figure 10-14 Structure of the indicator/alarm concatenating cable between OSN subracks

2. Pin Assignment

The pin assignment of the indicator/alarm concatenating cables between OSN subracks is shown in Table 10-10.

Table 10-10 Pin assignment of indicator/alarm concatenating cables between OSN subracks

Connector X1

Connector X2

Relationship Alarm output Indicator function

X1.1 X2.1 EMERGENCY ALARM + YALMP

X1.2 X2.2

Pair

EMERGENCY ALARM - YALMN

X1.3 X2.3 MAIN ALARM + GRUNP

X1.6 X2.6

Pair

MAIN ALARM - GRUNN

X1.4 X2.4 AUXILIARY ALARM 1+ RALMP

X1.5 X2.5

Pair

AUXILIARY ALARM 1- RALMN

X1.7 X2.7 AUXILIARY ALARM 2+ WALMP

X1.8 X2.8

Pair

AUXILIARY ALARM 2- WALMN


Connector X1/X2 Network interface connector-8PIN-8bit-shielded-crystal model connector

Cable model Twisted pair-120 Ω-SEYVPV-0.5 mm-24AWG-8 cores-PANTONE 430U

Number of cores 8



10-17

Item Description

Fireproof level CM


Length 3 m, 5 m, 10 m, 20 m

10.3.3 Alarm Concatenating Cable between OSN Subrack and Other Subrack

The alarm concatenating cable between OSN subrack and other subrack is used to concatenate the signals output/input from/to the OptiX OSN equipment and non OSN series transmission equipment (such as OptiX 2500+, OptiX OSN 9500) of Huawei. One end of the cable uses RJ-45 connector, connected to ALMO1 or ALMO2 interface of the subrack and the other end to the alarm output or alarm concatenating interface of other equipment.

1. Structure

The structure of the alarm concatenating cable between OSN subrack and other subrack is shown in Figure 10-15.

1. Network port connector - RJ45

2. Main tag 3. Tag 1 4. Cable connector-D type 9 PINs-female

L: 5 m, 10 m, 20 m Figure 10-15 Alarm concatenating cable between OSN subrack and other subrack

2. Pin Assignment

The pin assignment of the alarm concatenating cable between OSN subrack and other subrack is shown in Table 10-11.



10-18

Table 10-11 Pin assignment of alarm concatenating cable between OSN subrack and other subrack

Connector X1 Connector X2 Relationship Relationship

X1.1 X2.7 EMERGENCY ALARM +

X1.2 X2.3

Pair

EMERGENCY ALARM -

X1.3 X2.6 MAIN ALARM +

X1.6 X2.1

Pair

MAIN ALARM -

X1.4 X2.8 AUXILIARY ALARM 1+

X1.5 X2.4

Pair

AUXILIARY ALARM 1-

X1.7 X2.9 AUXILIARY ALARM 2+

X1.8 X2.5

Pair

AUXILIARY ALARM 2-



ConnectorX2 Cable connector-D type-9PIN-female


Number of cores 8

Fireproof level CM


Length 5 m, 10 m, 20 m

10.3.4 Housekeeping Alarm Input/Output Cable

The housekeeping alarm input cable inputs the alarm signal of the external equipment into the OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 and the output cable outputs the alarm signal of the OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 to the centralized alarm monitoring equipment.

One end of the housekeeping alarm input/output cable connects to the housekeeping alarm input/output interface through an RJ-45 connector and the other end connects to the external equipment or the centralized alarm monitoring equipment. Make the connector following the on-site requirements. Each cable can provide 4 channels transmission for housekeeping alarm.



10-19

1. Structure

The structure of the housekeeping alarm input/output cable is shown in Figure 10-16.

1. Network port connector – RJ-45 2. Main tag A-A. Sectional view in A direction

Figure 10-16 Structure of the housekeeping alarm input/output cable

2. Pin Assignment

OptiX OSN 3500 provide house-keeping alarm interface for 16 inputs and 4 outputs.

OptiX OSN 2500 provide house-keeping alarm interface for 8 inputs and 4 outputs.

OptiX OSN 1500 provide house-keeping alarm interface for three inputs and one output.

So the pin assignment of the housekeeping alarm input/output cable for OptiX OSN 3500/2500 is shown in Table 10-12 and that for OptiX OSN 1500 is shown in Table 10-13.

Table 10-12 Pin assignment of housekeeping alarm input/output cable for OptiX OSN 3500/2500

Connector X1

Color Relationship Alarm output Alarm input

X1.1 Blue EMERGENCY ALARM +

SW_INPUT 1+

X1.2 White

Pair

EMERGENCY ALARM -

SW_INPUT 1-

X1.3 Orange MAIN ALARM + SW_INPUT 2+

X1.6 White

Pair

MAIN ALARM - SW_INPUT 2-

X1.4 Green AUXILIARY ALARM 1+

SW_INPUT 3+

X1.5 White

Pair

AUXILIARY ALARM 1- SW_INPUT 3-



10-20

Connector X1


X1.7 Brown AUXILIARY ALARM 2+

SW_INPUT 4+

X1.8 White

Pair

AUXILIARY ALARM 2- SW_INPUT 4-

Table 10-13 Pin assignment of housekeeping alarm input/output cable for OptiX OSN 1500

Connector X1


X1.1 Blue - SW_INPUT 1+

X1.2 White

Pair

- SW_INPUT 1-

X1.3 Orange - SW_INPUT 2+

X1.6 White

Pair

- SW_INPUT 2-

X1.4 Green - SW_INPUT 3+

X1.5 White

Pair

- SW_INPUT 3-

X1.7 Brown SW_OUT1+ -

X1.8 White

Pair

SW_OUT1- -


ConnectorX1 Network interface connector-8PIN-8bit-shielded-crystal model connector

Cable model OptiX OSN 3500/2500: Twisted pair-120 Ω-SEYVPV-0.5 mm-24AWG-8 cores-PANTONE 430U

OptiX OSN 1500: Twisted pair-100±15 Ω-shielded CAT5E SFTP-24AWG-8 cores-PANTONE445U

Number of cores 8

Fireproof level CM

Core diameter OptiX OSN 3500/2500: 0.5 mm

OptiX OSN 1500: 0mm

Length 10 m, 20 m, 30 m



10-21

10.4 Management Cable

The OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 management cables are listed in Table 10-14.

Table 10-14 OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 management cables


OAM serial port cable OAM serial port cable OAM serial port cable

Serial1–4/F&f serial port cable



RS-232/422 serial port cable



Ordinary telephone wire Ordinary telephone wire Ordinary telephone wire

COA concatenating cable COA concatenating cable

COA concatenating cable

Straight through cable Straight through cable Straight through cable

Crossover cable Crossover cable Crossover cable

10.4.1 OAM Serial Port Cable

The OAM serial port cable is used for management and remote maintenance of the OptiX OSN 3500. One end of the cable uses RJ-45 connector, connected to the OAM interface. The other end uses DB25 connector, connected to the laptop computer, serial NM or modem.

1. Structure

The structure of the OAM serial port cable is shown in Figure 10-17

1. Network port connector – RJ-45 2. Main tag 3. Cable connector-DB25 male A-A. Sectional view in A direction B-B. Sectional view in B direction

Figure 10-17 Structure of the OAM serial port cable



10-22

2. Pin Assignment

The pin assignment of the OAM serial port cable is shown in Table 10-15.

Table 10-15 Pin assignment of OAM serial port cable

Connector X1 Connector X2 Relationship Function

X1.2 X2.20 Single DTR (Data Terminal Ready)

X1.3 X2.2 Single TD (Transmit Data)

X1.6 X2.3 Single RD (Receive Data)

X1.4

X1.5

X2.7 Pair SG (Signaling Ground)



ConnectorX2 Cable connector-D type-25PIN-male


Number of cores 8

Fireproof level CM

Length 5000 mm

10.4.2 Serial 1–4/F&f Cable

The serial 1~4/F&f cable is used for:

transparent transmission of environment detection data signal

management of external devices like COA

management of the UPM

One end of the cable uses RJ-45 connector, connected to serial 1–4 interfaces or F&f serial interface, and the other end uses DB9 connector, connected to external detection equipment or external equipment.

1. Structure

The structure of the Serial 1–S4/F&f cable is shown in Figure 10-18.



10-23

1. Network port connector – RJ-45 2. Main tag 3. Cable connector-DB9 male A-A. Sectional view in A direction B-B. Sectional view in B direction

Figure 10-18 Structure of the serial 1–4/F&f cable

2. Pin Assignment

The pin assignment of the Serial 1–4/F&f cable is shown in Table 10-16.

Table 10-16 Pin assignment of the serial 1–4/F&f cable


X1.1 X2.8 RS-422TX +

X1.2 X2.9 Pair

RS-422TX -

X1.3 X2.6 RS-422RX +

X1.6 X2.7 Pair

RS-422RX -

X1.4 X2.3 RS-232RX

X1.8 X2.2 Pair

RS-232TX

X1.5 X2.5 Single SG



ConnectorX2 Cable connector-D type-9PIN-male

Cable model (1) Twisted pair-120 Ω-SEYVPV-0.5 mm-24AWG-8 cores-PANTONE 430U

(2) Twisted pair-100 Ω-SEYVP-0.48 mm-26AWG-8 cores-black



10-24

Item Description

Number of cores

8

Fireproof level CM

Length Cable (2) is 3 m and cable (1) is 15 m

10.4.3 RS-232/422 Serial Port Cable

The RS-232/422 serial port cable is used to transmission management signaling between different subnets. Both ends use RJ45 connector. One end is connected to the RS-232/422 serial port, and the other end to the RS-232/422 serial port of other NE.

1. Structure

The structure of the RS232/422 serial port cable is shown in Figure 10-19.

1. Network port connector – RJ-45 2. Main tag A-A. Sectional view in A direction

Figure 10-19 Structure of the RS-232/422 serial port cable

2. Pin Assignment

The pin assignment of the RS232/422 serial port cable is shown in Table 10-17.



10-25

Table 10-17 Pin assignment of the RS-232/422 serial port cable


X1.3 X2.1 RX +

X1.6 X2.2

Pair

RX -

X1.1 X2.3 TX +

X1.2 X2.6

Pair

TX -

X1.5 X2.5 SG

X1.4 X2.8

Pair

232RX

X1.8 X2.4 Single 232TX


Connector X1/X2 Network interface connector-8PIN-8bit-shielded-crystal model connector

Model Twisted pair-120 Ω-SEYVPV-0.5 mm-24AWG-8 cores-PANTONE 430U

Number of cores 8

Fireproof level CM

Length 15 m

10.4.4 Orderwire Telephone Wire

The telephone wire is used to connect the orderwire phone. Both ends use RJ-11 connector. One end is connected to the PHONE interface and the other end to the interface of the orderwire phone.

1. Structure

The structure of the ordinary telephone wire is shown in Figure 10-20.

1. Phone connector-RJ-11crystal plug 2. Main tag

Figure 10-20 Structure of ordinary telephone wire



10-26

2. Pin Assignment

The pin assignment of the ordinary telephone wire is shown in Table 10-18.

Table 10-18 Pin assignment of ordinary telephone wire

Connector X1 Connector X2 Function

X1.1 X2.1 No connected


X1.3 X2.3 TIP

X1.4 X2.4 RING




Connector X1/X2 Network interface connector-6PIN-26 to 28AWG

Cable model Power cable-150 V-UL20251-0.08 mm2-28AWG-black-1A-2-core telephone wire

Number of cores 2

Fireproof level CM

Length 15 m

10.4.5 COA Concatenating Cable

When multiple COAs are installed in the cabinet, the RS-232/422 serial port is required to concatenate them. Both ends of the cable use DB9 connector, connected to the RS232-1 serial port of one COA and the RS232-2 serial port of another COA.

1. Structure

The structure of the COA concatenating serial port cable is shown in Figure 10-21.



10-27

1. Cable connector-DB9 male 2. Main tag

Figure 10-21 Structure of the COA concatenating serial port cable

2. Pin Assignment

The pin assignment of the COA concatenating serial port cable is shown in Table 10-19.

Table 10-19 pin assignment of the COA concatenating serial port cable

Connector X1 Connector X2 Remark

3 2

2 3

A pair

5 5 Grounding


Connector X1/X2 Cable connector-D type-9PIN-male

Cable model Twisted pair-100 ohm-UL2464-0.32 mm-28AWG-2P-grey

Number of cores 2 pairs

Fireproof level CM

Length 0.6 m, 2.5 m

10.4.6 Straight Through Cable

The straight through cable is used in many ways, including:

Connect the OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 and HUB.

Connect HUB and NM computer

Connect the Ethernet interface board and Ethernet equipment



10-28

Both ends of the straight through cable use RJ-45 connector which connects the equipment at two ends respectively.

1. Structure

The structure of the straight through cable is shown in Figure 10-22.

1. Network port connector – RJ-45 2. Tag 1 3. Main tag 4. Tag 2

Figure 10-22 Structure of straight through cable

2. Pin Assignment

The pin assignment of the straight through cable is shown in Table 10-20.

Table 10-20 Pin assignment of the straight through cable

Connector X1 Connector X2 Color Relationship

X1.2 X2.2 Orange

X1.1 X2.1 White/Orange

Pair

X1.6 X2.6 Green

X1.3 X2.3 White/Green

Pair

X1.4 X2.4 Blue

X1.5 X2.5 White/Blue

Pair

X1.8 X2.8 Brown

X1.7 X2.7 White/Brown

Pair


Connector X1/X2 Network interface connector-crystal model connector-8PIN-8bit-shielded-24 to 26AWG-CAT 6/used with SFTP network cable



10-29

Item Description

Cable model Communication cable-100±15 Ω-CAT5E-SFTP 24AWG-8 cores-PANTONE 445U

Number of cores 8

Fireproof level CM

Length 5 m, 10 m, 20 m, 30 m

10.4.7 Crossover Cable

The crossover cable is used to connect the NM computer to the OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500. Both ends of the cable use RJ-45 connector. One end is connected to the ETH interface, and the other end to the network port of the compute.

1. Structure

The structure of the crossover cable is shown in Figure 10-23.

1. Network port connector RJ-45 2. Tag 1 3. Main tag 4. Network cable 5. Tag 2

Figure 10-23 Structure of the crossover cable

2. Pin Assignment

The pin assignment of the crossover cable is shown in Table 10-21.

Table 10-21 Pin assignment of crossover cable


X1.6 X2.2 Orange

X1.3 X2.1 White/Orange

Pair

X1.2 X2.6 Green

X1.1 X2.3 White/Green

Pair

X1.4 X2.4 Blue

X1.5 X2.5 White/Blue

Pair



10-30


X1.8 X2.8 Brown

X1.7 X2.7 White/Brown

Pair


Connector X1/X2 Network interface connector-crystal model connector-8PIN-8bit-shielded-24 to 26AWG-CAT 6/used with SFTP network cable

Model Communication cable-100±15Ω-CAT5E-SFTP-24AWG-8 cores PANTONE 646U

Number of cores 8

Fireproof level CM

Length 5 m, 30 m



10-31

10.5 Signal Cable

The OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 signal cables are listed in Table 10-22.

Table 10-22 OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 signal cables


75 Ω E1 cable 75 Ω E1 cable 75 Ω E1 cable

120 Ω E1 cable 120 Ω E1 cable 120 Ω E1 cable

E3/DS3/STM-1 cable E3/DS3/STM-1 cable E3/DS3/STM-1 cable

Extended subrack service connection cable _ _

10.5.1 75 Ω 8xE1 Cable

The 75 Ω 8xE1 cable, used to input/output E1 signal, connects to the interface on the D75S interface board. One end uses DB44 connector, connected to the 75 Ω E1 interface board. The other end is connected to DDF. The connector needs to be made as required. Each cable can transmit eight E1 signals.

1. Structure

The structure of the 75 Ω 8xE1 cable is shown in Figure 10-24.

1. Cable connector-D type-44PIN-male 2. Tag 1, marked: ”W1 (E1:1 to 4)” 3. Tag 3, marked: “W2 (E1:5 to 8)” 4. Main tag

Figure 10-24 Structure of the 75 Ω 8xE1 cable

2. Pin Assignment

The pin assignment of the 75 Ω 8xE1 cable is shown in Table 10-23.



10-32

Table 10-23 Pin assignment of the 75 Ω 8xE1 cable

Cable W1 Cable W2 PIN of DB44 Core Series

NO.

Remark

PIN of DB44 Core Series

NO.

Remark

38 Ring 34 Ring

23 Tip

1 R1

19 Tip

1 R5

37 Ring 33 Ring

22 Tip

3 R2

18 Tip

3 R6

36 Ring 32 Ring

21 Tip

5 R3

17 Tip

5 R7

35 Ring 31 Ring

20 Tip

7 R4

16 Tip

7 R8

15 Ring 11 Ring

30 Tip

2 T1

26 Tip

2 T5

14 Ring 10 Ring

29 Tip

4 T2

25 Tip

4 T6

13 Ring 9 Ring

28 Tip

6 T3

24 Tip

6 T7

12 Ring 8 Ring

27 Tip

8 T4

7 Tip

8 T8

Shell Out braid of whole cable & ring of each coax

Shell Out braid of whole cable & ring of each coax


Connector X Cable connector-D type-44PIN-male

Cable model (W1/W2)

Coaxial cable-SYFVZP-75-1-1x8(A)-75 ohm-9.65 mm-1.2 mm-0.252 mm-white

Fireproof level CM

Number of cores 8 x E1

Diameter cover diameter 9.65mm-insulation diameter 1.2mm-conductor diameter 0.252mm

Length 3 m, 10 m, 15 m, 20 m, 25 m, 30 m, 40 m



10-33

Caution:

The pin assignment table of the E1 cable is put in one packing case with the cable. Be sure not to discard it before installation

10.5.2 75 Ω 16xE1 Cable

The 75 Ω 16xE1 cable, used to input/output E1 signal, connects to the interface on the L75S interface board. One end uses 2 mm HM connector, connected to the 75 Ω E1 interface board L75S. The other end is connected to DDF. The connector needs to be made as required. Each cable can transmit 16 E1 signals.

1. Structure


1. Cable connector 2. Terminal


2. Pin Assignment



Cable W Cable W Plug X Core Series

No. Remark Plug X Core Series

No. Remark

a1 Tip a10 Tip

a2 Ring 1 R1

a11 Ring 17 R9



10-34



No. Remark

a3 Tip a12 Tip

a4 Ring 2 T1

a13 Ring 18 T9

a6 Tip a15 Tip

a7 Ring 3 R2

a16 Ring 19 R10

a8 Tip a17 Tip

a9 Ring 4 T2

a18 Ring 20 T10

b1 Tip b10 Tip

b2 Ring 5 R3

b11 Ring 21 R11

b3 Tip b12 Tip

b4 Ring 6 T3

b13 Ring 22 T11

b6 Tip b15 Tip

b7 Ring 7 R4

b16 Ring 23 R12

b8 Tip b17 Tip

b9 Ring 8 T4

b18 Ring 24 T12

c1 Tip c10 Tip

c2 Ring 9 R5

c11 Ring 25 R13

c3 Tip c12 Tip

c4 Ring 10 T5

c13 Ring 26 T13

c6 Tip c15 Tip

c7 Ring 11 R6

c16 Ring 27 R14

c8 Tip c17 Tip

a9 Ring 12 T6

c18 Ring 28 T14

d1 Tip d10 Tip

d2 Ring 13 R7

d11 Ring 29 R15

d3 Tip d12 Tip

d4 Ring 14 T7

d13 Ring 30 T15

d6 Tip d15 Tip

d7 Ring 15 R8

d16 Ring 31 R16



10-35



No. Remark

d8 Tip d17 Tip

d9 Ring 16 T8

d18 Ring 32 T16


Connector X 2 mm HM cable connector-4x18PIN-28-30AWG-press-fit

Cable model (W1/W2) Coaxial cable-SYFVZP-75-1-1x32(A)-75 ohm-18 mm-1.2 mm-0.254 mm-Huawei gray

Fireproof level CM

Number of cores 16 x E1

Cover diameter-insulation diameter-conductor diameter

18 mm-1.2 mm-0.254 mm

Length 10 m, 15 m, 20 m, 25 m, 30 m

Caution:

The pin assignment table of the E1 cable is put in one packing case with the cable. Be sure not to discard it before installation

10.5.3 120 Ω 8xE1 Cable

The 120 Ω 8 x E1 cable is used to input/output E1 signals. One end uses DB44 connector, connected to 120 Ω E1 electrical interface board D12S. The other end is connected to the DDF. The connector needs to be made as required. Each cable can transmit eight E1 signals.

1. Structure




10-36

1. Cable connector-D type-44PIN-male 2. Tag 1, marked:"W1 (TX1–8)" 3. Tag 3, marked"W2 (RX1–8)" 4. Main tag

Figure 10-26 Structure of the 120 Ω 8 x E1 cable

2. Pin Assignment


Table 10-25 Pin assignment of the 120 Ω 8 x E1 cable


NO.

Remark PIN of DB44 Core Series

NO.

Remark

15 Blue 38 Blue

30 White

Pair Tx1

23 White

Pair Rx1

14 Orange 37 Orange

29 White

Pair Tx2

22 White

Pair Rx2

13 Green 36 Green

28 White

Pair Tx3

21 White

Pair Rx3

12 Brown 35 Brown

27 White

Pair Tx4

20 White

Pair Rx4

11 Grey 34 Grey

26 White

Pair Tx5

19 White

Pair Rx5

10 Blue 33 Blue

25 Red

Pair Tx6

18 Red

Pair Rx6

9 Orange 32 Orange

24 Red

Pair Tx7

17 Red

Pair Rx7



10-37


NO.

Remark PIN of DB44 Core Series

NO.

Remark

8 Green 31 Green

7 Red

Pair Tx8

16 Red

Pair Rx8

Shell Out braid of whole cable Shell Out braid of whole cable


Connector X Cable connector-D type-44PIN-male

Cable model Communication cable-120 Ω-SEYPVPV-0.5 mm-24AWG-16 cores-PANTONE 430U

Number of cores 16

Inner conductor diameter

0.5 mm

Fireproof level CM

Length 10 m, 15 m, 20 m, 30 m, 40 m

10.5.4 120 Ω 16xE1 Cable

The 120 Ω 16 x E1 cable is used to input/output E1 signals. One end uses 2 mm HM connector, connected to the 120 Ω E1 electrical interface board L12S or PL1B. The other end is connected to the DDF. The connector needs to be made as required. Each cable can transmit 16 E1 signals.

1. Structure


3

1

2X

W2

W1

1. Cable connector 2. Terminal 3. Main tag




10-38

2. Pin Assignment



Cable W1 Cable W2 Plug X Core Series

NO. Remark Plug X Core Series

NO. Remark

a1 Blue a3 Blue

a2 White Pair R1

a4 White Pair T1

a6 Orange a8 Orange

a7 White Pair R2

a9 White Pair T2

b1 Green b3 Green

b2 White Pair R3

b4 White Pair T3

b6 Brown b8 Brown

b7 White Pair R4

b9 White Pair T4

c1 Grey c3 Grey

c2 White Pair R5

c4 White Pair T5

c6 Blue c8 Blue

c7 Red Pair R6

c9 Red Pair T6

d1 Orange d3 Orange

d2 Red Pair R7

d4 Red Pair T7

d6 Green d8 Green

d7 Red Pair R8

d9 Red Pair T8

a10 Brown a12 Brown

a11 Red Pair R9

a13 Red Pair T9

a15 Grey a17 Grey

a16 Red Pair R10

a18 Red Pair T10

b10 Blue b12 Blue

b11 Black Pair R11

b13 Black Pair T11

b15 Orange b17 Orange

b16 Black Pair R12

b18 Black Pair T12

c10 Green c12 Green

c11 Black Pair R13

c13 Black Pair T13



10-39

Cable W1 Cable W2 Plug X Core Series

NO. Remark Plug X Core Series

NO. Remark

c15 Brown c17 Brown

c16 Black Pair R14

c18 Black Pair T14

d10 Grey d12 Grey

d11 Black Pair R15

d13 Black Pair T15

d15 Blue d17 Blue

d16 Yellow Pair R16

d18 Yellow Pair T16

a5 shield PGND a14 shield PGND


Connector X 2 mm HM cable connector-4x18PIN—24-26AWG-press-fit

Cable model W1/W2

Symmetrical twisted pair-120 Ω-SEYPVPV-0.5 mm-24AWG-32 cores-PANTONE 430U

Number of cores 32

Inner conductor diameter

0.5 mm

Fireproof level CM

Length 10 m, 15 m, 20 m, 25 m, 30 m

10.5.5 E3/DS3/STM-1 Cable

The E3/DS3/STM-1 cable is used to input/output E3/DS3/STM-1 signal. One end uses SMB connector, connected to the E3/DS3/STM-1 interface board. The other end is connected to the DDF, and the connector needs to be made as required.

1. Structure

The structure of the E3/DS3/STM-1 cable is shown in Figure 10-28.



10-40

1. Coaxial connector-SMB 2. Main tag 3. Coaxial cable

Figure 10-28 Structure of the E3/DS3/STM-1 cable

2. Pin Assignment

None


Connector Coaxial connector-SMB-75 Ω-straight and female

Model Coaxial cable-75 ohm-3.9 mm-2.1 mm-0.34 mm-shielded

Diameter cover diameter 3.9 mm-insulation diameter 2.1 mm-conductor diameter 0.34 mm

Cable I

Length 10 m, 15 m, 20 m, 30 m

Model Coaxial cable-75 ohm-4.4 mm-2.4 mm-0.4 mm-shielded-grey


Cable II

Length 15 m, 20 m, 25 m, 30 m, 40 m

Model Coaxial cable-75ohm-6.7mm-3.8mm-0.61mm-shielded-grey


Cable III

Length 15 m, 20 m, 25 m, 30 m, 130 m

Model Coaxial cable-75 ohm-5.80 mm-3.71 mm-0.643 mm-black


Cable IV

Length 30 m

Fireproof level CM



10-41

10.5.6 Extended Subrack Service Connection Cable

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports extended subrack, adding/dropping up to 504 x E1 services. The extended subrack service connection cable is used to connect the service between main subrack and extended subrack in one cabinet. One end of the cable is connected to the EXA/EXB interface of the UXCSB board of the main subrack and the other end to the EXA/EXB interface of the XCE board.

1. Structure

The structure of the extended subrack service connection cable is shown in Figure 10-29.

2

1

1

2

X1 X2

1. PIN#1 2. PIN#26

Figure 10-29 Structure of the extended subrack service connection cable

2. Pin Assignment

The pin assignment of the extended subrack service connection cable is shown in Table 10-27.



10-42

Table 10-27 Pin assignment of the extended subrack service connection cable

Pin Core and serial number

1

14

Core

2 Ground

1

15

3

Core

16 Ground

2

4

17

Core

5 Ground

3

18

6

Core

19 Ground

4

9

21

Core

8 Ground

5

23

10

Core

22 Ground

6

12

24

Core

11 Ground

7

26

13

Core

25 Ground

8

7

20

Core

X1/X2 enclosure Ground

9



10-43


Connector X1/X2 Cable Connector-1.27mm mini D type-26PIN male-LVDS,28AWG or 30AWG

Cable model Communication Cable-100Ω-UL20379-30AWG-8P+1P-grey

Number of cores 8P+1P

Fireproof level CM

Length 5 m

10.6 Clock Cable

The OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 clock cables are listed in Table 10-28.

Table 10-28 OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 clock cables


75 Ω clock cable 75 Ω clock cable 75 Ω clock cable

120 Ω clock cable 120 Ω clock cable 120 Ω clock cable

1/2-channel clock transfer cable



10.6.1 Clock Cable

The clock cable includes 75 Ω clock cable and 120 Ω clock cable, used for inputting/outputting external clock signal.

For the 75 Ω clock cable, one end uses SMB connector, connected to the external clock interface of the AUX board. The other end is connected to external clock equipment and the connector needs to be made as required

For the 120 Ω clock cable, one end uses RJ-45 connector, connected to the external clock interface of the AUX board. The other end is connected to external clock equipment and the connector needs to be made as required. The 120 Ω clock cable can input/output two clock signals.

1. Structure

The structure of the 75 Ω and 120 Ω clock cables is respectively shown in Figure 10-30 and Figure 10-31.



10-44

1. Coaxial connector -SMB 2. Tag

Figure 10-30 Structure of the 75 Ω clock cable

1. Tag 1 (R) and Tag2 (T) 2. Communication cable 3. Main tag4. Network port connector-RJ-45

Figure 10-31 Structure of the 120 Ω clock cable

2. Pin Assignment

The pin assignment of the 120 Ω clock cable is shown in Table 10-29.

Table 10-29 Pin assignment of the 120 Ω clock cable

X1 W Remark

X1.1 Blue

X1.2 White

W1

X1.4 Orange

X1.5 White

W2



10-45



Model Coaxial cable-75 ohm-3.9 mm-2.1mm-0.34 mm-shielded


75 Ω clock cable Cable

Length 10 m, 15 m, 20 m, 30 m

Connector X1 Network interface cable-8PIN-8bit-shielded-crystal model connector

Model Twisted pair-120 ohm-SEYPVPV-0.4 mm-26AWG-2 pairs-Pantone 430U

Conductor diameter

0.4 mm/26AWG

120 Ω clock cable

Cable

Length 5 m, 10 m, 20 m, 30 m, 40 m, 50 m, 70 m, 100 m

10.6.2 1/2-Channel Clock Transfer Cable

The clock transfer cable includes 1-channel and 2-channel 75 Ω/120 Ω clock cables.

1. Structure

The structure of 1-channel and 2-channel 75 Ω/120 Ω clock transfer cables is shown in Figure 10-32 and Figure 10-33 respectively.

1. Coaxial connector-SMB-75 Ω-straight/plug-female 2. Main tag 3. 75 Ω/120 Ω transfer PCB

Figure 10-32 Structure of the 1-channel 120 Ω/75 Ω clock transfer cable



10-46

1. Coaxial connector-SMB-75 Ω-straight/plug-female 2. Tag 1:“1#” 3. Tag 2:“2#” 4. Main tag5. 75 Ω/120 Ω transfer PCB 6. Tag 3:“1#” 7. Tag 4:“2#” Figure 10-33 Structure of the 2-channel 120 Ω/75 Ω clock transfer cable

2. Pin Assignment

The pin assignment of the 2-channel 120 Ω/75 Ω clock transfer cable is shown in Table 10-30.

Table 10-30 Pin assignment of the 75 Ω/120 Ω clock transfer cable

Connector 75 Ω cable Color 120 Ω cable

Core Blue X1

Shielding layer White

W3

Core Blue X2

Shielding layer White

W4




75 Ω cable

Diameter Cover diameter 3.9 mm-insulation diameter 2.1 mm-conductor diameter 0.34 mm


120 Ω cable

Conductor diameter

0.4 mm/26AWG

1-channel

Length 30 m



10-47

Item Description

X1/X2 connector Coaxial connector-SMB-75 Ω-straight and female


75 Ω cable

Diameter Cover diameter 3.9 mm-insulation diameter 2.1 mm-conductor diameter 0.34 mm


120 Ω cable

Conductor diameter

0.4 mm/26AWG

2-channel

Length 30 m

OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual

A Indicator Description for Equipment and Board


A-1


A.1 Cabinet Indicator Description


On The cabinet is powered on. Power indicator – Green

Off The cabinet is not powered on.

On There is a critical alarm. Critical alarm indicator – Red

Off There is no critical alarm.

On There is a major alarm. Major alarm indicator – Orange

Off There is no major alarm.

On There is a minor alarm. Minor alarm indicator – Yellow

Off There is no minor alarm.




A-2

A.2 Board Indicator Description

1. Board Hardware Indicator - STAT Status Description




2. Service Activation Indicator - ACT Status Description

On, green The service is activated, and the board is in service.

Off The board is not activated.

3. Board Software Indicator - PROG Status Description








4. Service Alarm Indicator - SRV Status Description

On, green Service is normal, no service alarm occurs.

On, red Critical or major alarm occurs to service.

On, yellow Minor or remote alarm occurs to service.

Off No service is configured or no power is fed.




A-3

5. Power Monitoring Indicators and Alarm Cut Indicator of the SCC Indicator name Status Description

On, green The –48 V power supply A is normal. Indicator for –48 V power supply A (PWRA) On, red, or off The –48 V power supply A is faulty (lost or

failed).

On, green The –48 V power supply B is normal. Indicator for –48 V power supply B (PWRB) On, red, or off The –48 V power supply B is faulty (lost or

failed).

On, green The +3.3 V protection power is normal. Indicator for +3.3 V power supply C (PWRC) On, red The +3.3 V protection power is lost.

On, yellow Currently in permanent alarm cut-off status. Alarm cut indicator (ALMC)

Off Give sound warning upon alarm.

6. Ethernet Indicators of the SCC and AUX Indicator name Status Description

On Link between network cable and equipment is established.

LINK indicator (Green)

Off Link between network cable and equipment is not established.

On There is data transmitted/received. ACT indicator (Orange)

Off There is no data transmitted/received.

7. Ethernet Port Indicator of Interface Board Status Description Remark

The green and yellow indicator is off.

The Ethernet cable is not connected.

-

The green indicator is on, and the yellow indicator does not flash.

The Ethernet cable is connected, but no data is transmitted.

-

The green indicator is on, and the yellow indicator flashes.

The Ethernet cable is connected, and data is transmitted.

The flashing frequency of yellow indicator depends on the transmission of Ethernet data.

OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual B Board Version Description


B-1

B Board Version Description

B.1 Board Version List

The board versions provided by the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, and OptiX OSN 1500 are listed

Equipment Board

OSN3500 (40Gbit/s)

OSN3500 (80Gbit/s)

OSN2500 REG OSN2500 OSN1500A OSN1500B

N2SL64 √ √

N1SL16(A) √ √ √ √ √ √

N2SL16(A) √ √ √ √ √ √

N1SF16 √ √ √ √ √ √

N1SLQ4 √ √ √ √ √

N2SLQ4 √ √ √ √ √

N1SLD4 √ √ √ √ √

N2SLD4 √ √ √ √ √

N1SL4 √ √ √ √ √

N2SL4 √ √ √ √ √

N1SLT1 √ √ √ √ √

N1SLQ1 √ √ √ √ √

N2SLQ1 √ √ √ √ √

N1SL1 √ √ √ √ √

N2SL1 √ √ √ √ √



B-2

Equipment Board

OSN3500 (40Gbit/s)

OSN3500 (80Gbit/s)


R1SLD4 √ √ √

R1SL4 √ √ √

R1SLQ1 √ √ √

R1SL1 √ √ √

N1SEP1 √ √ √ √ √

N1SEP √ √ √ √ √

N1PQ1 √ √ √ √

R1PD1 A/B √ √ √

R1PL1 A/B √ √

R1L75S √

R1L12S √

N1PQM √ √ √ √

N1PD3 √ √ √ √

N1PL3 √ √ √ √

N1PL3A √ √ √ √ √

N1SPQ4 √ √ √ √

N2SPQ4 √ √ √ √

N1D75S √ √ √ √

N1D12S √ √ √ √

N1D12B √ √ √ √

N1D34S √ √ √ √

N1C34S √ √ √ √

N1MU04 √ √ √ √

N1EU08 √ √ √

N1OU08 √ √ √

N2OU08 √ √ √

N1TSB8 √ √ √ √

N1EFS4 √ √ √ √ √

N1EFS0 √ √ √ √



B-3

Equipment Board

OSN3500 (40Gbit/s)

OSN3500 (80Gbit/s)


N2EFS0 √ √ √ √

N1EGS2 √ √ √ √ √

N2EGS2 √ √ √ √ √

N1EGT2 √ √ √ √ √

N1EFT8 √ √ √ √ √

R1EFT4 √ √ √

N1EMR0 √ √ √ √ √

N2EMR0 √ √ √ √ √

N1EGR2 √ √ √ √ √

N2EGR2 √ √ √ √ √

N1EFF8 √ √ √ √

N1ETF8 √ √ √ √

N1ETS8 √ √ √ √

N1ADL4 √ √ √ √ √

N1ADQ1 √ √ √ √ √

N1IDL4 √ √ √ √ √

N1IDQ1 √ √ √ √ √

N1MST4 √ √ √ √ √

N1MR2A √ √ √ √ √

N1MR2B √ √ √

N1MR2C √ √ √ √

N1LWX √ √ √ √ √

N1BPA √ √ √ √ √

N1BA2 √ √ √ √ √

N1DCU √ √

N1GXCSA √

N2GXCSA √

N1EXCSA √

N1UXCSA √



B-4

Equipment Board

OSN3500 (40Gbit/s)

OSN3500 (80Gbit/s)


N1UXCSB √

N1XCE √

Q1CXL1/4/16 √ √ √

Q2CXL1/4/16 √ √ √

N1SCC √ √

N1GSCC √ √

N2GSCC √ √

Q1CRG √

N1PIU √ √

Q1PIU √ √

R1PIU √

R1PIUA √

N1FAN √ √ √ √

R1FAN √ √

N1FANA √ √

R1EOW √ √

Q1SAP √ √

Q1SEI √ √

N1AUX √ √

R1AUX √ √

R2AUX √ √

61COA/62COA √ √ √ √ √ √

TDA √ √ √ √ √ √

UPM √ √ √ √

√ indicates that the product supports the board.

B.2 Version Description

B.2.1 Optical Line Interface Board

The optical line interface boards of OptiX OSN products all have two versions: N1 and N2, as described in Table B-1



B-5

Table B-1 N1 and N2 optical line interface boards

Item Description Similarity The boards of two versions implement the same functions.

Difference The N2 version supports tandem connection monitoring (TCM), but the N1 version does not.

NM support The T2000 distinguishes N1 from N2 directly.

OptiX OSN product

Each product version (including V100R001, V100R002 and V100R003) supports N1 and N2 optical line interface boards.

The optical interface board with single optical interface supports replacement between N1 and N2. After completion of hardware replacement, use the direct replacement command on the T2000 to effectuate the replacement.

Note: If an N2 board starts the TCM function before replacement, its replacement by an N1 board will fail.

Version replacement

Other optical interface boards do not support replacement between N1 and N2.

Note: The optical interface boards with one optical interface refer to SL64, SL16, SF16, SL4 and SL1, which have one pair of optical interface.

B.2.2 Ethernet Processing Board

The Ethernet processing boards of OptiX OSN products can support N1, N2 or R1 versions. For details, refer to Table B-2. The EGT2 and EFT8 are Ethernet transparent transmission boards, supporting only N1 version currently. The EFT4, an Ethernet transparent transmission board seated in half-height slot and used on the OptiX OSN 1500 subrack, supports R1. Except EFS4, other Ethernet processing boards with Layer 2 switching function all support N1 and N2 version. Table B-2 Ethernet processing board version

VersionBoard N1 N2 R1

EGT2/EFT8 Supported – –

EFT4 – – Supported

EFS4 Supported – –

EFS0/EGS2 Supported Supported –

EMR0/EGR2 Supported Supported –

N1 and N2 Ethernet processing boards are described Table B-3.



B-6

Table B-3 N1 and N2 Ethernet processing boards

Item Description Similarity The working principle and functions of N1 and N2 boards are the same.

Difference The uplink bandwidth of the N1 board at the SDH side is half that of the N2 board. The N1 and N2 boards have the same hardware but different software.

NM support The T2000 differentiates N1 from N2 directly.

V100R001 products only support N1Ethernet processing boards. When N2 boards are inserted, they are displayed as N1 boards on the T2000 and used as N1 boards.


Product support


For any product version, the board software can be upgraded from N1 to N2.

Version replacement

The N1 boards are only used as N1 boards. For V100R002 and V100R003 products, N2 boards can be used as either N1 boards (displayed as N1 boards on the T2000) or N2 boards (displayed as N2 boards on the T2000). When N2 boards are used as N1 boards, the boards can be upgraded to N2 boards by deleting the original board and adding an N2 board. During the upgrade, services will be interrupted.



B-7

B.2.3 Cross-Connect and SCC boards

1. GXCSA The OptiX OSN 3500 GXCSA has N1 and N2 versions, as described in Table B-4 Table B-4 N1 and N2 GXCSA boards

Item Description Similarity Board functions and board software are the same.

Difference Different FPGA program is uploaded due to different hardware

NM support The T2000 does not differentiate N1 from N2.

Product support

Each product version (including V100R001, V100R002 and V100R003) supports N1 GXCSA and N2 GXCSA.

Version replacement

The N1 GXCSA and N2 GXCSA can be replaced by each other. Because the N1 GXCSA and N2 GXCSA use different FPGA program, select corresponding FPGA program in upgrading. Otherwise, the upgrading will fail.

2. SCC The OptiX OSN 3500 SCC supports the following three versions: N1SCC, N1GSCC and N2GSCC, as described in Table B-5. Table B-5 N1SCC, N1GSCC and N2GSCC

Item Description Description Implement system control and communication functions.

Difference

N1SCC: does not support extended subracks or intelligent features N1GSCC: support extended subracks and intelligent N2GSCC: applicable to the OptiX OSN 7500 and OptiX OSN 3500, supporting intelligent features.

NM support On the T2000, N1SCC is displayed as SCC, N1GSCC as GSCC, N2GSCC as GSCC. Specific version number can be distinguished by bar code on the board front panel.

Product support

V100R001 products support N1SCC only. V100R002 products support N1SCC and N1GSCC. V100R003 products support all versions.

Version replacement Compatible with subsequent versions.

3. CXL1/4/16 The CXL1/4/16 has Q1 and Q2 versions, as described in Table B-6.



B-8

Table B-6 Q1 and Q2 CXL1/4/16 boards

Item Description

Similarity Implement cross-connect, clock, system control and optical line processing functions.

Difference

Q1CXL1/4/16: support 20 Gbit/s higher order and 5 Gbit/s lower order cross-connect capacity. Q2CXL1/4/16: support 20 Gbit/s higher order and 20 Gbit/slower order cross-connect capacity, and support intelligent features.

NM support

CXL1/4/16 is displayed as three parts on the T2000: system control, cross-connect and optical line interface. Q1CXL1/4/16 is displayed as SCC, CXL and Q1SL1/4/16. Q2CXL1/4/16 is displayed as GSCC, ECXL and Q1SL1/4/16.

Product support

V100R001 products support Q1CXL1/4/16 only. V100R002 products support Q1CXL1/4/16 and Q2CXL1/4/16. V100R003 products support Q1CXL1/4/16 and Q2CXL1/4/16.

Version replacement Compatible with subsequent versions.

B.2.4 Other Boards

The OptiX OSN PIU, AUX and FAN also have several versions, as described in Table B-7. Table B-7 Version description of PIU, AUX and FAN

Description Item PIU AUX FAN

Similarity Access and distribute –48 V power

Provide auxiliary interfaces and orderwire processing functions

Dissipate heat

Difference

N1PIU: applicable to 3500 Q1PIU: applicable to 2500 R1PIU: applicable to 1500B R1PIUA: applicable to 1500A

N1AUX: applicable to the OptiX OSN 3500 R1AUX and R2AUX: applicable to the OptiX OSN 1500

N1FAN: applicable to the OptiX OSN 3500 and the OptiX OSN 2500 R1FAN: applicable to OptiX OSN 1500 N1FANA: used in high power consumption occasions

NM support All displayed as PIU on the T2000.

All displayed as AUX on the T2000.

All displayed as FAN or FANA on the T2000.

Version replacement Irreplaceable

For V100R003 products, R1AUX and R2AUX can be replaced by each other.

Irreplaceable

OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual C Power Consumption and Weight


C-1

C Power Consumption and Weight

Board Power consumption (W)

Weight (kg) Board Power consumption (W)

Weight (kg)

N2SL64 32 1.12 N1EFS4 30 0.98

N1/N2SL16 20 1.10 N1/N2EFS0 35 0.98

N1SF16 26 1.09 N1/N2EGS2 40/43.2 1.04

N1/N2SLQ4 16 1.04 N1EGT2 23 0.90

N1/N2SLD4 15 1.01 N1EFT8 26 1.01

N1/N2SL4 15 1.00 N1EFT4 14 0.53

N1SLT1 15 1.22 N1/N2EMR0 50 1.20

N1/N2SLQ1 15 1.04 N1/N2EGR2 54 1.10

N1/N2SL1 14 1.00 N1ETF8 2 0.37

R1SL4 10 0.34 N1EFF8 6 0.44

R1SLD4 11 0.36 N1ETS8 2.5 0.37

R1SLQ1 12 0.40 N1ADL4 35 0.90

R1SL1 10 0.34 N1ADQ1 37 0.95

N1BA2 20 1.01 N1IDL4 36.6 1.01

N1BPA 20 1.01 N1IDQ1 36.6 1.01

N1DCU 0 0.42 N1MR2A 0 1.01

N1SEP1 17 0.95 N1MR2B 0 1.01

N1EU08 11 0.41 N1MR2C 0 1.01

OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual C Power Consumption and Weight


C-2

Board Power consumption (W)

Weight (kg) Board Power consumption (W)

Weight (kg)

N2SL64 32 1.12 N1EFS4 30 0.98

N1/N2OU08 6 0.41 N1LWX 30 1.10

N1EU04 6 0.40 N1GXCSA 27 1.81

N1/N2SPQ4 24 0.91 N1EXCSA 62 2.00

N1MU04 2 0.41 N1UXCS 65 2.00

N1PD3 19 1.12 N1XCE 25 1.50

N1PL3 15 1.00 Q1CXL1/4/16 40 1.12

N1D34S 2 0.38 Q2CXL1/4/16 40 1.12

N1C34S 2 0.31 N1SCC 10 0.88

N1PQM 22 1.01 N2GSCC 10 0.88

N1PQ1 19 1.01 Q1CRG 12 0.90

N1D75S 5.5 0.35 N1PIU 8 1.15

N1D12B 1 0.31 Q1PIU 8 1.25

N1D12S 9 0.35 R1PIU 1.5 1.25

R1PD1 15 0.5 R1PIUA 3 1.25

R1PL1 7 0.45 N1FAN (Note 1)

15 1.50

R1L75S 5 0.27 R1FAN (Note 1)

20 1.01

R1L12S 3 0.24 R1EOW 10 0.40

N1PL3A 15 1.00 N1AUX 19 0.96

N1TSB8 5 0.28 N2AUX 19 0.96

61COA 10 3.50 62COA 75 8.00

Note: The value is the power consumption for each fan frame.

OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual D Abbreviations and Acronyms


D-1

D Abbreviations and Acronyms

Abbreviation Full name A

ADM Add/Drop Multiplexer

AMI Alternate Mark Inversion

APS ATM Protection Switch

ATM Asynchronous Transfer Mode

B

BITS Building Integrated Timing Supply

C

CBR Constant Bit Rate

CC Continuity Check

CMI Coded Mark Inversion

COA Case-shaped Optical Amplifier

CPU Center Processing Unit

CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check

D

DC Direct Current

DCC Data Communication Channel

DCE Data Circuit-terminal Equipment

DCU Dispersion Compensation Unit

DDF Digital Distribution Frame



D-2

Abbreviation Full name DTR Data Terminal Ready

DVB-ASI Digital Video Broadcast-Asynchronous Serial Interface

DWDM Dense Wavelength Division Multiplexing

E

ECC Embedded Control Channel

EDFA Erbium-Doped Fiber Amplifier

EMC Electromagnetic Compatibility

EMI ElectroMagnetic Interference

EPL Ethernet Private Line

EPLAN Ethernet Private LAN

ESCON Enterprise Systems Connection

ETS European Telecommunication Standards

ETSI European Telecommunications Standards Institute

EVPL Ethernet Virtual Private Line

EVPLAN Ethernet Virtual Private LAN

F

FC Fiber Channel

FE Fast Ethernet

FICON Fiber Connection

FPGA Field Programmable Gate Array

G

GE Gigabit Ethernet

GFP Generic Framing Procedure

H

HDB3 High Density Bipolar of order 3 code

HDLC High level Data Link Control

I

IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers

IS-IS Intermedia System-Intermedia System

ITU-T International Telecommunication Union - Telecommunication Standardization Sector



D-3

Abbreviation Full name L

LAPS Link Access Procedure-SDH

LB LoopBack

LCAS Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme

LCT Local Craft Terminal

M

MPLS Multi-protocol Label Switch

MSP Multiplex Section Protection

N

NA Not applicable

NRZ Non Return to Zero

O

OAM Operation Administration and Maintenance

OSPF Open Shortest Path First

P

PA nylon(polyamide); polyamide bar; Power Amplifier; Project Accounting; Project Administrator; Protocol Adapter

PDH Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy

R

RD Receive Data

RIP Routing Information Protocol

RSTP Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol

S

SG Signaling Ground

SNCP Sub-Network Connection Protection

SSM Synchronization Status Marker

T

TD Transmit Data

TDA Tone & Data Access Unit

TPS Tributary Protection Switching



D-4

Abbreviation Full name U

UBR Unspecified Bit Rate

V

VBR Variable Bit Rate

VLAN Virtual Local Area Network

VPN Virtual Private Network

W

WDM Wavelength Division Multiplexing

OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Hardware Description Manual Index


i-1

Index

Numerics 1:1 TPS protection,for EFS0, 7-17 1:N TPS protection,for E1/T1, 6-26 1:N TPS protection,for E3/DS3, 6-15 1:N TPS protection,for E4/STM-1, 6-5 1:N TPS protection,for STM-1, 5-40 120 Ω E1 cable, 10-35, 10-37 1-channel clock transfer cable, 10-45 2-channel clock transfer cable, 10-45 75 Ω E1 cable, 10-31, 10-33

A abbreviation, D-1 acronym, D-1 ACT. see service activation indicator ADL4 board

front panel, 7-36 function, 7-34 indicator, 7-37, 7-42 interface, 7-37 principle, 7-35 protection configuration, 7-38 slots, 7-34 technical parameter, 7-39 version description, 7-39, 7-44

ADQ1 board front panel, 7-36 function, 7-34 indicator, 7-37, 7-42 interface, 7-37 principle, 7-35 protection configuration, 7-38 slots, 7-34 technical parameter, 7-39 version description, 7-39, 7-44

alarm concatenanting cable between OSN subrack and other subrack, 10-17

alarm concatenation, 9-44 alarm cut indicator, A-3 architecture,equipment, 1-1 ATM service processing board

ADL4, 7-34 ADQ1, 7-34

ATM service processing board with IMA function IDL4, 7-40 IDQ1, 7-40

AUX communication module, 9-33 interface, 9-36 interface module, 9-33 power module, 9-33 technical parameter, 9-47

AUX board DIP switch and jumper, 9-46 front panel, 9-36 function, 9-30 principle, 9-33 slots, 9-30 version description, 9-46

B BA2 board

application, 9-12 front panel, 9-14 function, 9-12 indicator, 9-14 interface, 9-14 principle, 9-13 slots, 9-12 technical parameter, 9-15 version description, 9-15

BGND power cable, 10-5 board

appearance, 4-11 classification, 4-1 indicator (summary table), A-2 power consumption (summary table), C-1 weight (summary table), C-1

board classification cross-connect and SCC boards, 4-7 Data processong boards, 4-5 other boards, 4-9 PDH boards, 4-3 SDH boards, 4-1



i-2

board hardware indicator, A-2 board software indicator, A-2 BPA board

application, 9-12 front panel, 9-14 function, 9-12 indicator, 9-14 interface, 9-14 principle, 9-13 slots, 9-12 technical parameter, 9-15 version description, 9-15

C C2. see signal label byte C34S board

front panel, 6-13 cabinet

configuration, 2-3 ETSI cabinet, 2-1 indicator, 2-3 indicator (summary table), A-1 power distribution unit, 2-4 size, 2-6 technical parameter, 2-6 type, 2-1 weight, 2-6

cabinet door grounding cable, 10-7 cabinet indicator cable, 10-14 cable technical parameter

1/2-channel clock transfer cable, 10-46 –48 V cabinet power cable, 10-6 75 Ω E1 cable, 10-32, 10-35 alarm concatenating cable between OSN subrack and

other subrack, 10-18 cabinet BGND power cable, 10-6 cabinet door grounding cable, 10-8 cabinet indicator cable, 10-15 cabinet PGND power cable, 10-6 clock cable, 10-45 COA concatenating cable, 10-27 crossover cable, 10-30 E3/DS3/STM-1 cable, 10-40 extended subrack service connection cable, 10-43 housekeeping alarm input/output cable, 10-20 HUB/COA power cable, 10-12 indicator/alarm concatenation cable between OSN

subracks, 10-16 OAM serial port cable, 10-22 RS-232/422 serial port cable, 10-25 serial 1–4/f&f cable, 10-23 straight through cable, 10-28 subrack power cable, 10-9, 10-10 telephone wire, 10-26 UPM power cable, 10-13

capacity cross-connect for OptiX OSN 2500/1500, 8-9 cross-connect for OptiX OSN 3500, 8-2

case-shape optical amplifier COA, 9-16

clock cable, 10-43

COA 62COA, 9-16 application, 9-17 front panel, 9-19 function, 9-17 indicator, 9-19 installation, 9-22 interface, 9-20 MONITOR-1/MONITOR-2 interface, 9-21 power interface, 9-22 principle, 9-18 RS-232-1/RS-232-2 serial port, 9-20 technical specification, 9-23 version description, 9-23

COA concatenating cable, 10-26 connector

E2000/APC, 9-20 CRG board

front panel, 8-24 function, 8-22 indicator, 8-25 interface, 8-26 principle, 8-23 slots, 8-22 switch, 8-24 techincal parameter, 8-26 version description, 8-26

cross-connect & synchronous timing board CXL1, 8-9 CXL16, 8-9 CXL4, 8-9 EXCS, 8-2 GXCS, 8-2 UXCS, 8-2 XCE, 8-2

crossover cable, 10-29 CXL1 board

front panel, 8-11 function, 8-9 indicator, 8-11 interface, 8-13 parameter configuration, 8-13 principle, 8-10 technical parameter, 8-14

CXL1/CXL4/CXL16 board protection configuration, 8-13 slots, 8-9 version description, 8-14

CXL16 board front panel, 8-11 function, 8-9 indicator, 8-11 interface, 8-13 parameter configuration, 8-13 principle, 8-10 technical parameter, 8-14

CXL4 board front panel, 8-11 function, 8-9 indicator, 8-11 interface, 8-13 parameter configuration, 8-13



i-3

principle, 8-10 technical parameter, 8-14

D D12B. see also PQ1 D12S. see also PQ1 D34S. see also PD3 D34S board

front panel, 6-13 slots, 6-11 version description, 6-20

D75S. see also PQ1 D75S/D12S/D12B board

front panel, 6-24 function, 6-22 slots, 6-22 version description, 6-29

DCU application, 9-25 front panel, 9-26 function, 9-25 interface, 9-27 principle, 9-26 technical parameter, 9-28 version description, 9-28

DCU board slots, 9-25

dispersion compensation board DCU, 9-25

E E1 interface board

D75S, 6-22 E1 processing board

PQ1, 6-22 E1 processing board (half-slot)

PD1 board, 6-31 PL1 board, 6-31

E1/T1 interface board D12B, 6-22 D12S, 6-22

E1/T1 processing board PQM, 6-22

E2000/APC optical interface, 10-4 E3/DS3 interface switching board

D34S, 6-11 E3/DS3 processing board

PD3, 6-11 PL3, 6-11 PL3A, 6-11

E3/DS3/STM-1 cable, 10-39 E4/STM-1 processing board

SPQ4, 6-1 EFF8 board

front panel, 7-5 interface, 7-7

EFF8/ETF8 board slots, 7-2 version description, 7-8

EFS0 board

1:1 TPS protection, 7-17 1:1 TPS protection for OptiX OSN 1500B, 7-19 1:1 TPS protection for OptiX OSN 2500, 7-18 1:1 TPS protection for OptiX OSN 3500, 7-17 front panel, 7-15 indicator, 7-16 interface, 7-16 parameter configuration, 7-19 slots, 7-11 technical parameter, 7-21

EFS0/EFS4/EGS2 board version description, 7-20

EFS4 board front panel, 7-15 function, 7-12 indicator, 7-16 interface, 7-16 parameter configuration, 7-19 principle, 7-14 slots, 7-11 technical parameter, 7-21

EFS8 board function, 7-12 principle, 7-14

EFT4 board front panel, 7-5 function, 7-3 indicator, 7-6 interface, 7-7 parameter configuration, 7-8 principle, 7-4 slots, 7-2

EFT8 board front panel, 7-5 function, 7-3 indicator, 7-6 interface, 7-7 parameter configuration, 7-8 principle, 7-4 slots, 7-2

EGR2 board front panel, 7-28 function, 7-24 indicator, 7-29 interface board, 7-30 principle, 7-27 protection configuration, 7-30 slots, 7-24 technical parameter, 7-33 version description, 7-32

EGS2 board front panel, 7-15 function, 7-12 indicator, 7-16 interface, 7-16 parameter configuration, 7-19 principle, 7-14 slots, 7-11 technical parameter, 7-21

EGT2 board front panel, 7-5 function, 7-3



i-4

indicator, 7-6 interface, 7-7 parameter configuration, 7-8 principle, 7-4 slots, 7-2

EGT2/EFT8/EFT4 board version description, 7-8

ejector lever, 4-11 EMR0 board

front panel, 7-28 function, 7-24 indicator, 7-29 interface board, 7-30 principle, 7-27 protection configuration, 7-30 slots, 7-24 technical parameter, 7-33 version description, 7-32

EOW board front panel, 9-42 function, 9-30 principle, 9-33 slots, 9-30 version description, 9-46

Equipment –48 V/–60 V Power Cable/PGND Grounding Cable, 10-9

equipment architecture, 1-1 OptiX OSN 1500A, 1-5 OptiX OSN 1500B, 1-5 OptiX OSN 2500, 1-3 OptiX OSN 3500, 1-1

ETF8 board front panel, 7-5 interface, 7-7

Ethernet board with RPR function EGR2, 7-24 EMR0, 7-24

Ethernet electrical interface board ETF8, 7-2

Ethernet indicator ACT indicator, A-3 LINK indicator, A-3

Ethernet interface switching board ETS8, 7-11

Ethernet optical interface board EFF8, 7-2

Ethernet port indicator, A-3 Ethernet switching processing board

EFS0, 7-11 EFS4, 7-11 EGS2, 7-11

Ethernet transparent transmission board EFT4, 7-2 EFT8, 7-2 EGT2, 7-2

ETS8 board front panel, 7-15 indicator, 7-16 interface, 7-16 slots, 7-11 technical parameter, 7-21 version description, 7-21

ETSI cabinet appearance, 2-1

EU08. see also SEP1 EU08 board

front panel, 5-35 interface, 5-36 slots, 5-32 technical parameter, 5-40

EU08/OU08 board function, 5-33 version description, 5-40

EXCS board front panel, 8-4

EXCS board function, 8-2 indicator, 8-4 interface, 8-5 parameter configuration, 8-7 principle, 8-3 technical parameter, 8-7

EXCSA board version description, 8-7

extended subrack service connection cable, 10-41

F FAN

function, 9-60 principle, 9-60 technical parameter, 9-62 version description, 9-62

FAN board indicator, 9-61

fan control board FAN, 9-59

fan tray assembly. see FAN FC/PC optical interface, 10-4 FE processing board

RPR transmission, 7-24 switching, 7-11 transparent transmission, 7-2

fiber jumper. see tail fiber

G GE processing board

RPR transmission, 7-24 switching, 7-11 transparent transmission, 7-2

GSCC board front panel, 8-18 slots, 8-16

GXCS board front panel, 8-4 function, 8-2 indicator, 8-4 interface, 8-5 parameter configuration, 8-7 principle, 8-3 technical parameter, 8-7

GXCS/EXCS/UXCS/XCE board protection configuration, 8-6



i-5

slots, 8-2 GXCSA board

version description, 8-7 GXCSB board

version description, 8-7

H housekeeping alarm input/output cable, 10-18 HUB/COA power cable, 10-11

I IDL4 board

front panel, 7-41 function, 7-40 interface, 7-42 principle, 7-41 protection configuration, 7-43 slots, 7-40 technical parameter, 7-44

IDQ1 board front panel, 7-41 function, 7-40 interface, 7-42 principle, 7-41 protection configuration, 7-43 slots, 7-40 technical parameter, 7-44

indicator alarm cut indicator, A-3 board hardware indicator, A-2 board software indicator, A-2 cabinet, 2-3 cabinet (summary table), A-1 Ethernet indicator, A-3 Ethernet port indicator, A-3 power monitoring indicator, A-3 service activation indicator, A-2 service alarm indicator, A-2

indicator/alarm concatenating cable between OSN subracks, 10-15

interface switching & bridging board TSB8, 5-32

J J1. see path trace byte

L L12S board

front panel, 6-32 L75S board

front panel, 6-32 L75S/L12S board

function, 6-31 slots, 6-31 version description, 6-35

LC/PC optical interface, 10-3 LWX board

front panel, 9-3 function, 9-1 indicator, 9-4 interface, 9-4 principle, 9-2 slots, 9-1 technical parameter, 9-5 version description, 9-5

M mapping relation between terminals and PIUs, 2-4 MR2 board

slots, 9-7 MR2A/MR2B/MR2C

technical parameter, 9-11 version description, 9-11

MR2A/MR2B/MR2C board front panel, 9-9 function, 9-7 indicator, 9-10 interface, 9-10 principle, 9-8

MST4 board front panel, 7-48 function, 7-45 indicator, 7-48 interface, 7-48 parameter configuration, 7-49 principle, 7-46 slots, 7-45 technical parameter, 7-49 version description, 7-49

MU04. see also SPQ4 MU04 board

front panel, 6-4 function, 6-2 interface, 6-4 principle, 6-2 slots, 6-1 technical parameter, 6-9 version description, 6-9

Multi-service transparent transmission processing board MST4, 7-45

N N1PIU board

front panel, 9-50 principle, 9-48

O OAM serial port cable, 10-21 optical add/drop multiplexing board

MR2A/MR2B/MR2C, 9-7 optical booster & pre-amplifier

BPA, 9-12 optical booster amplifier

BA2, 9-12 orderwire processing board



i-6

EOW, 9-30 OU08. see also SEP1 OU08 board

front panel, 5-35 interface, 5-36 slots, 5-32 technical parameter, 5-40

P path trace byte, 5-5 PD1 board

1:N TPS protection, 6-33 1:N TPS protection for OptiX OSN 1500A, 6-35 1:N TPS protection for OptiX OSN 1500B, 6-35 1:N TPS protection for OptiX OSN 2500, 6-34 front panel, 6-32 function, 6-31 indicator, 6-33 interface, 6-33 parameter configuration, 6-35 principle, 6-32 protection configuration, 6-33 slots, 6-31 technical parameter, 6-35

PD1/PL1 board version description, 6-35

PD3 board front panel, 6-13 function, 6-11 indicator, 6-15 interface, 6-15 parameter configuration, 6-20 principle, 6-12 slots, 6-11 technical parameter, 6-20

PD3/PL3 board 1:N TPS protection for OptiX OSN 1500B, 6-19 1:N TPS protection for OptiX OSN 2500, 6-18 1:N TPS protection for OptiX OSN 3500, 6-17

PGND power cable, 10-5 pin assignment

1/2-channel clock transfer cable, 10-46 120 Ω E1 cable, 10-36, 10-38 75 Ω E1 cable, 10-31, 10-33 alarm concatenating cable between OSN subrack and

other subrack, 10-17 cabinet indicator cable, 10-14 clock cable, 10-44 COA concatenating cable, 10-27 crossover cable, 10-29 extended subrack service connection cable, 10-41 housekeeping alarm input/output cable, 10-19 HUB/COA power cable, 10-12 indicator/alarm concatenation cable between OSN

subracks, 10-16 OAM serial port cable, 10-22 RS-232/422 serial port cable, 10-24 serial 1–4/F&f cable, 10-23 straight through cable, 10-28 subrack power cable, 10-8, 10-10 telephone wire, 10-26

UPM power cable, 10-13 PIU board

function, 9-48 slots, 9-48 technical parameter, 9-54

PL1 board front panel, 6-32 function, 6-31 indicator, 6-33 interface, 6-33 parameter configuration, 6-35 principle, 6-32 slots, 6-31 technical parameter, 6-35

PL3 board front panel, 6-13 function, 6-11 indicator, 6-15 interface, 6-15 parameter configuration, 6-20 principle, 6-12 slots, 6-11 technical parameter, 6-20

PL3/PD3 board 1:N TPS protection, 6-15 version description, 6-20

PL3A board front panel, 6-13 function, 6-11 indicator, 6-15 interface, 6-15 parameter configuration, 6-20 principle, 6-12 slots, 6-11 technical parameter, 6-20 version description, 6-20

power consumption board (summary table), C-1

power distribution unit appearance, 2-4

power interface COA, 9-22

power interface board PIU, 9-48

power monitoring indicator, A-3 PQ1 board

1:N TPS protection for OptiX OSN 1500B, 6-29 1:N TPS protection for OptiX OSN 2500, 6-28 1:N TPS protection for OptiX OSN 3500, 6-27 front panel, 6-24 function, 6-22 indicator, 6-25 interface board, 6-25 parameter configuration, 6-29 principle, 6-23 protection configuration, 6-26 slots, 6-22 technical parameter, 6-29

PQ1/PQM board 1:N TPS protection, 6-26 version description, 6-29

PQM board



i-7

front panel, 6-24 function, 6-22 indicator, 6-25 interface board, 6-25 parameter configuration, 6-29 principle, 6-23 protection configuration, 6-26 slots, 6-22 technical parameter, 6-29

PROG. see board software indicator PWRA/B/C. see power monitoring indicator

Q Q1PIU board

front panel, 9-51

R R1PIU board

front panel, 9-52 principle, 9-49

R1PIUA board front panel, 9-52

R1SL1 board front panel, 5-29 function, 5-28 indicator, 5-30 interface, 5-30 parameter configuration, 5-30 principle, 5-29 slots, 5-27 technical parameter, 5-31

R1SL1/R1SLQ1 board version description, 5-31

R1SL4 board front panel, 5-29 function, 5-28 indicator, 5-30 interface, 5-30 parameter configuration, 5-30 principle, 5-29 slots, 5-27 technical parameter, 5-31

R1SL4/R1SLD4 board version description, 5-31

R1SLD1 board function, 5-28

R1SLD4 board front panel, 5-29 indicator, 5-30 interface, 5-30 parameter configuration, 5-30 principle, 5-29 slots, 5-27 technical parameter, 5-31

R1SLQ1 board front panel, 5-29 function, 5-28 indicator, 5-30 interface, 5-30 parameter configuration, 5-30

principle, 5-29 slots, 5-27 technical parameter, 5-31

RS-232/422 serial port cable, 10-24

S SAP board

front panel, 9-43 function, 9-30 principle, 9-34 slots, 9-30 version description, 9-46

SC/PC optical interface, 10-3 SCC

power monitoring module, 8-18 SCC board

communication module, 8-17 control module, 8-17 front panel, 8-18 function, 8-16 indicator, 8-20 interface, 8-21 principle, 8-17 slots, 8-16 switch, 8-19 technical parameter, 8-21 version description, 8-21

SEI board front panel, 9-43 function, 9-30 principle, 9-35 slots, 9-30 version description, 9-46

SEP1 board 1:N TPS protection, 5-36 1:N TPS protection for OptiX OSN 1500B, 5-39 1:N TPS protection for OptiX OSN 2500, 5-38 1:N TPS protection for OptiX OSN 3500, 5-38 front panel, 5-35 function, 5-33 indicator, 5-35 interface, 5-36 parameter configuration, 5-40 principle, 5-34 slots, 5-32 technical parameter, 5-40 version description, 5-40

serial 1–4/F&f cable, 10-22 service activation indicator, A-2 service alarm indicator, A-2 SF16 board

front panel, 5-10 function, 5-7 indicator, 5-10 interface, 5-11 parameter configuration, 5-11 principle, 5-8 slots, 5-7 technical parameter, 5-12 version description, 5-11

signal label byte, 5-5



i-8

size cabinet, 2-6 OptiX OSN 1500A subrack, 3-23 OptiX OSN 1500B, 3-31 OptiX OSN 2500 subrack, 3-17 OptiX OSN 3500 subrack, 3-9

SL1 board front panel, 5-24 function, 5-22 indicator, 5-24 interface, 5-25 parameter configuration, 5-25 principle, 5-22 slots, 5-21 technical parameter, 5-26 version description, 5-25



SL64 board front panel, 5-4 function, 5-1 indicator, 5-4 interface, 5-4 parameter configuration, 5-5 principle, 5-2 slots, 5-1 technical parameters, 5-5 version description, 5-5

SLD4 board front panel, 5-17 function, 5-15 interface, 5-18 parameter configuration, 5-18 principle, 5-16 slots, 5-15 technical parameter, 5-19 version description, 5-19

slot distribution for OptiX OSN 1500A board, 3-20 for OptiX OSN 1500B board, 3-27 for OptiX OSN 2500 board, 3-13 for OptiX OSN 2500 REG board, 3-18 for OptiX OSN 3500 board, 3-4 OptiX OSN 1500A, 3-19

OptiX OSN 1500B, 3-25 OptiX OSN 2500, 3-11 OptiX OSN 3500, 3-3 slot mapping table for OptiX OSN 1500B, 3-26 slot mapping table for OptiX OSN 2500, 3-13 slot mapping table for OptiX OSN 3500, 3-3

SLQ1 board front panel, 5-24 function, 5-22 indicator, 5-24 interface, 5-25 parameter configuration, 5-25 principle, 5-22 slots, 5-21 technical parameter, 5-26 version description, 5-25

SLQ4 board front panel, 5-17 function, 5-15 interface, 5-18 parameter configuration, 5-18 principle, 5-16 slots, 5-15 technical parameter, 5-19 version description, 5-19

SLT1 board front panel, 5-24 function, 5-22 indicator, 5-24 interface, 5-25 parameter configuration, 5-25 principle, 5-22 slots, 5-21 technical parameter, 5-26 version description, 5-25

SPQ4 board 1:N TPS protection, 6-5 1:N TPS protection for OptiX OSN 1500B, 6-8 1:N TPS protection for OptiX OSN 2500, 6-7 1:N TPS protection for OptiX OSN 3500, 6-6 front panel, 6-4 function, 6-2 indicator, 6-4 interface, 6-4 parameter configuration, 6-9 principle, 6-2 slots, 6-1 technical parameter, 6-9 version description, 6-9

SRV. see service alarm indicator STAT. see board hardware indicator STM-1 electrical processing board

SEP1, 5-32 STM-1 interface board

EU08, 5-32 MU04, 6-1 OU08, 5-32

STM-1 optical processing board SL1 board, 5-21 SLQ1 board, 5-21 SLT1 board, 5-21

STM-1 optical processing board (half-slot)



i-9

R1SL1 board, 5-27 R1SLQ1 board, 5-27

STM-1/E4 processing board SPQ4, 6-1

STM-16 optical processing board SL16 board, 5-7

STM-4 optical processing board SL4 board, 5-15 SLD4 board, 5-15 SLQ4 board, 5-15

STM-4 optical processing board (half-slot) R1SL4 board, 5-27 R1SLD4 board, 5-27

STM-64 processing board SL64 board, 5-1

straight through cable, 10-27 subrack

size for OptiX OSN 1500A, 3-23 size for OptiX OSN 1500B, 3-31 size for OptiX OSN 2500, 3-17 size for OptiX OSN 3500, 3-9 slot distribution for OptiX OSN 1500A, 3-19 slot distribution for OptiX OSN 1500B, 3-25 slot distribution for OptiX OSN 2500, 3-11 slot distribution for OptiX OSN 2500 REG, 3-18 slot distribution for OptiX OSN 3500, 3-3 technical parameter for OptiX OSN 1500A, 3-23 technical parameter for OptiX OSN 1500B, 3-31 technical parameter for OptiX OSN 2500, 3-17 technical parameter for OptiX OSN 3500, 3-9 weight for OptiX OSN 1500, 3-31 weight for OptiX OSN 1500A, 3-23 weight for OptiX OSN 2500, 3-17 weight for OptiX OSN 3500, 3-9

subrack power cable, 10-8 subrack structure

OptiX OSN 1500A, 3-19 OptiX OSN 1500B, 3-24 OptiX OSN 2500, 3-10 OptiX OSN 3500, 3-2

system auxiliary interface board AUX, 9-30 SAP, 9-30 SEI, 9-30

system control & communication board GSCC, 8-16 SCC, 8-16

system control and clock unit for REG CRG, 8-22

T tail fiber, 10-1 technical parameter

120 Ω E1 cable, 10-37, 10-39 cabinet, 2-6 OptiX OSN 1500 A, 3-23 OptiX OSN 1500B, 3-31 OptiX OSN 2500 subrack, 3-17 OptiX OSN 3500 subrack, 3-9

technical specification

COA, 9-23 telephone wire, 10-25 TPS protection

1:1, 7-17 1:N, 6-5, 6-15

TSB8. see also SEP1 TSB8 board

front panel, 5-35 function, 5-33 slots, 5-32 technical parameter, 5-40 version description, 5-40

U uninterruptible power modules

UPM, 9-55 UPM, 2-4

front panel, 9-57 function, 9-56 indicator, 9-57 interface, 9-57 precaution, 9-58 priciple, 9-56 technical parameter, 9-58

UPM power cable, 10-12 UXCS board

front panel, 8-4 function, 8-2 indicator, 8-4 interface, 8-5 parameter configuration, 8-7 principle, 8-3 technical parameter, 8-7

UXCSA board version description, 8-7

W wavelength conversion board

LWX, 9-1 weight

board (summary table), C-1 cabinet, 2-6 OptiX OSN 1500A subrack, 3-23 OptiX OSN 1500B, 3-31 OptiX OSN 2500subrack, 3-17 OptiX OSN 3500subrack, 3-9

X XCE board

front panel, 8-4 function, 8-2 indicator, 8-4 interface, 8-5 parameter configuration, 8-7 technical parameter, 8-7 version description, 8-7

45154590 OSN 3500 2500 1500 Hardware Description Manual

Documents